
v > s 

- ^ ^ - <" <* a< 

: **$ 


.f % '. If ; % °yfw, : *■ 

„ w c ‘‘V*' » *''' ' * « <'*'•• 1 ■* ^ 

o™**/, r\ v v' s * . <P x, 

° 0 ^ v -% 

, «8m. °o :»K' ; 

AyvlW ESfc? - * Va .3 bn-, ' • ■ . I . O lT> -V ' 


o \ X- ^ 

— . ^ -*'*'\VVvS J > A <-> <- 

^ aO j '©, 

v/> JKt / f *:;;'/\ 
* tCC\WA o ' 

v ^ 

o 


<3 * 


^ « * s s •i,* 
,0* 


v* ° 

■*> n X> <?' ^ v te- 

\ ,.V . * , ^ c " ,A A 

° * X A . 0 N G 

rv o ,rV^~' ^ vl^ * ' O 0 

f*'** AV "o°. 

\° °c. ' : a t. 


y » * X 




A 


/ 

* *b 

' o \° r y S%W§^ - oS 7j, ' 

*f. ' * * - o 7 ‘ < * 0 \ ' * •«' * \\^ > S * * , **>l *o * 0 ' / ^ 

✓* <V * x 0 /■ G> V <! ^Ofs. ^ ^ A V- ,, 

' %/ ' i 

,\V ~ 1^/ « A> ° % 

* ** <V %'©£©’ * i 5 * ^ V^ v ^ **' ^ . 

A 'o //r / s s ,6 V / y o « x ^ A ’■^L ** 

'/T*A " rP\^'Z:^% ,/ .‘ # JL-^ °o 







°<t» *81'* s * * T 

v s s - > 

&v* ^ *Jpfe' *w 

&// > Z » -r 

TK<j( o > 


<?- *v * ‘ 

* * $ J < 

>, z r. 



< 

.S ^ * A.V </> " o <A 

»\v > ^ •"/• 2?^* * *y*!K^x* 

y ° 9 k * a\ X c 0 * c ^ ^ 1 **° 0 ^° 

> * % '-3 0 ° ± *rST??^ J ' ^ 

v ►» S^.\' ’/s£ / ^ > r *f* r 0& -T ^ \>» V 

3' . A v ; -vSb • w 


















The 

Daring Twi ns 


Best Books for Young' Folk 


The Aunt Jane Series 

By EDITH VAN DYNE 

Aunt Jane’s Nieces 
Aunt Jane’s Nieces Abroad 
Aunt Jane’s Nieces at Millville 
Aunt Jane’s Nieces at Work 
Aunt Jane’s Nieces in Society 
Aunt Jane’s Nieces and Uncle John 

“Aunt Jane’s Nieces’’ chronicles the real doings of real girls 
in a most interesting manner. “Aunt Jane’s Nieces Abroad” tells 
of a delightfully adventurous trip through Europe, and the third 
volume describes their summer holiday on a farm “at Millville.” 
In the fourth story the “Nieces ” are shown at work in the political 
arena. The fifth volume introduces the girls to society and the 
last story relates further adventures of these fascinating girls. 

Illustrated 1 Vinos . Uniform cloth binding , stamped in colors , 
with beautiful colored inlay. 

Price 60 cents each 


Annabel 

By SUZANNE METCALF 

A bright, swiftly-moving story of a young girl just blossoming 
into womanhood, and of a boy struggling for a start in life. 

1 2mo. Dainty cloth binding , with inlaid design and six duotone 
illustrations. 


Price 60 cents 





‘ ‘ You ’re Elected Little Mother. ” 
(See Page 104 .) 


The Daring Twins 

A Story for Young Folk 


y By 

L. Frank Baum 


Author of The Oz Books, The Sea Fairies 
and Other Tales 



Publishers 

The Reilly & Britton Co. 
Chicago 



COPYRIGHT, 1911 
by 

The Reilly & Britton Co. 


THE DARIN.G ! TWINS 



©CI.A293810 


CONTENTS 


CHAPTER PAGE 

I Introducing the Darings 9 

II Phil Interviews the Lawyer 17 

III Becky Gets Acquainted 32 

IV Ph(pbe's Secret 46 

V A Match Game 54 

VI Hunting a Job 63 

VII The Coming of Cousin Judith 74 

VIII The 6 6 Articles of Adoption” 94 

IX PHceBE Has an Adventure 109 

X A Depressing Interview 121 

XI Getting Regulated 127 

XII A Battle Royal 145 

XIII Phil Makes a Discovery 153 

XIV The Folly of Gran 'pa Eliot 166 

XV Sue Gets a Divorce 173 

XVI The Boat Race 188 

XVII In the Toils 195 

XVTII A Sister's Love 215 

XIX The Way of the Transgressor 232 

XX Accused 242 


Contents 


XXI Shifting the Burden 251 

XXII Marion's Ghost Story 261 

XXIII Two and Two Make Four 276 

XXIV Toby Clark's Heroism 290 

XXV Father and Son 298 

XXVI The Watermark 309 


LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS 


“ You're elected ‘ Little Mother' " Frontispiece 

She eagerly counted the gold 166 

Phoebe glanced at her calmly 245 


“1 have a story to relate/' said the banker 302 
















































The Daring Twins 

CHAPTER I 

INTBODUCING THE DAKINGS 

“Now you-all stop dat a-foolin’ an’ eat yo’ 
brekfas’ like sens’ble chill ’ns/ ’ said Aunt Hya- 
cinth, coming in with a plate of smoking cakes. 
“Ef yo’ don’, yo’ done be late fo’ school, shore 
’nuff . ’ ’ 

A ripple of laughter went around the group of 
five young Darings as a scramble was made for 
the cakes. 

“I don’t b’lieve I ’ll go to school to-day, 
Auntie,” said Sue, a demure little miss at the 
lower end of the table. 

“Yes yo’ will, honey,” retorted the black 
mammy, in a voice she meant to be severe. “ Yo’ ’s 
goin’ to school, all of yo’, an’ I don’t ’tend 
yous ’ll be late, nuther.” 

“I ’m not going, for one,” declared Don, his 
mouth too full to speak properly. 

“Get some more cakes; will you, Aunt Hy?” 
requested Becky, in a plaintive tone. “They 
9 


10 The Daring Twins 

snapped those up so quick I could n’t harpoon a 
single one.” 

The faithful old servant pattered back to the 
kitchen, slid more cakes from the griddle to her 
plate, poured on fresh batter and came pattering 
back again. 

44 Yo’, now, Miss Sue; what ’s dat I heah ’bout 
stayin’ home f ’m school?” she demanded, a frown 
wrinkling her ebony brow. 

4 4 That ’s it, Auntie; no school for me,” said 
Sue, grabbing a cake with her fork before Phoebe 
could reach the plate. 

4 4 But yo’ mus’, chile; yo’ ain’t sick. Yo’ mus’ 
go to school.” 

4 4 Not to-day. I jus ’ won ’t, Auntie. ’ ’ 

4 4 Yes yo’ will, Miss Sue! yo’ ’ll go ef I has 
to lead yo ’ dere by de ear o ’ you. ’ ’ 

Even Phil joined the laughter now, and he said 
in his grave yet pleasant way : 

4 4 You ’ll have to lead us all, then, Auntie, and 
there are more ears than you have hands.” 

Aunt Hyacinth seemed bewildered. She looked 
around the table, from one to another of the 
bright, laughing faces, and shook her head re- 
proachfully. 

Then Sue, having consumed the cake, leaned 
back in her chair, shook the tangled brown curls 
from her face and slowly raised her long curling 


Introducing the Darings 


11 


lashes, until the mischievous eyes were unveiled 
and sent a challenge to Auntie’s startled ones. 

“ We ’re misbehavin ’ dr ea ’fully ; ain ’t we ? But 
a fact ’s a fact, Auntie. We ’re none of us goin’ 
to school — so there, now ! ’ ’ 

“W’y, yo’ — yo’ — yo’ — ” 

Sue sprang upon her chair and threw both arms 
around old Hyacinth’s neck, giving the black 
cheek a smacking kiss. 

4 4 You big goose!” said she; “ don’t you know 
it ’s Sat ’day? There be n’t no school.” 

“Wha’ ’s ’at?” cried Auntie, striving to cover 
her humiliation at being caught in such a foolish 
error. “Is dat a proper speechifyin’ to say dere 
‘be n’t no school’? Where ’s yo’ grammeh, Miss 
Sue? Hon’ let me heah yo’ say ‘be n’t’ agin. 
Say, ‘dere hain’t no school.’ ” 

Phoebe led the laughter this time; but, when it 
had subsided she said to the indignant servant : 

“She certainly does use awfully bad grammar, 
Auntie, and you ’re quite right to correct her. 
But, I ’m positive that something ’s burning in 
the kitchen. ’ ’ 

Aunt Hyacinth made a dive for the door and 
let in a strong odor of charred cakes as she passed 
through. 

Phoebe got up from her place and walked to the 
latticed window. Something attracted her atten- 


12 


The Daring Twins 


tion outside, for she gave a little start. Phil 
joined her just then and slipped his arm around 
her slim waist. They were twins, these two, and 
the eldest of the five Darings. 

“What is it, dear?” he asked. 

“The people are moving in, across the way,” 
she said, rather sadly. 4 4 1 did n ’t know they were 
expected so soon.” 

There was a rush for the window, at this, but 
five heads were too many for the space and the 
outlook was hindered by a mass of climbing ivy. 
Don made for the porch, and the others followed 
him into the fresh morning air. 

For a while they all gazed silently at the great 
mansion across the way, set in the midst of an 
emerald lawn. Men were carrying trunks in at 
the side entrance. Before the door stood a car- 
riage from which a woman, a man, a girl and a 
boy had alighted. They were gazing around them 
with some curiosity, for the scene was all new to 
them. 

4 4 Is n’t it funny,” whispered Becky, softly, 4 4 to 
think of other folks living in our old home?” 

4 4 It is n’t ours, now,” said Don, testily; 4 4 so, 
what ’s the odds ? ’ ’ 

4 4 It was sold last fall, soon after papa died,” re- 
marked Phoebe, 4 4 and this Mr. Bandolph bought 
it. I suppose that ’s him strutting across the 
lawn — the stout gentleman with the cane.” 


Introducing the Darings 


13 


“The grounds seem more of an attraction to 
them than the house, ’ ’ remarked Phil. 

“Yes, they ’re fresh from the city,” answered 
his twin. “I ’m rather surprised they have n’t 
come to Riverdale before, to occupy their new 
home. ’ ’ 

“Our house was sold ’cause we were poor, 
was n’t it?” asked Sue. 

“Yes, dear. We could n’t afford to keep it, be- 
cause poor papa left a lot of debts that had to be 
paid. So we moved over here, to Gran ’pa 
Eliot’s.” 

“Don’t like this place,” observed Don, his 
hands thrust deep in his pockets, as he stared 
across the street. “It is n’t half as fine or cosy 
as our old home. ’ ’ 

“It ’s lucky for us that Gran ’pa Eliot had a 
house,” returned Phil, gravely. “And it ’s lucky 
Mr. Ferguson induced him to let us live in it.” 

“Guess gran ’pa could n’t help himself, being 
paralyzed like he is,” said Becky. 

“It ’s the first thing he ever did for us, any- 
how,” added Don, grumblingly. “And he sticks 
to his room upstairs and won’t let us come near 
him.” 

“Do you want to visit gran ’pa?” asked Phoebe, 
turning to her younger brother. 

“No.” 


14 


The Daring Twins 


4 4 Then don’t complain, dear, if lie does n’t want 
you. He ’s old and helpless; and as for helping 
ns, I ’m afraid gran ’pa is almost as poor as we 
are, ’ ’ she said, her eyes still regarding, with wist- 
ful earnestness, the scene across the street. 

“Poor! Gran ’pa Eliot poor, with this big 
house?” exclaimed Sue, incredulously. 

“I think so; I ’m sure it ’s so,” answered 
Phoebe. 4 4 Old Miss Halliday asked me to keep you 
all from picking the fruit in the garden, when it 
ripens; because, she says gran ’pa has to sell it to 
get enough money to pay taxes and his living ex- 
penses. And she gathers all the eggs from tne 
chickens and sells them to Mr. Wyatt, the 
grocer. That must mean gran ’pa ’s pretty poor, 
you know.” 

4 4 Is old Miss Halliday any relation to us?” 
asked Don. 

“No; she was an old servant of grandmother’s, 
before she died — her housekeeper, I believe; and 
afterward, when gran ’pa became paralyzed, she 
took care of him.” 

4 4 She seems to run everything around this place 
as if she owned it,” muttered the boy. 

4 4 She ’s a very faithful woman,” observed Phil ; 
4 4 and a very disagreeable one. I don’t know 
what gran ’pa would have done without her. She 
gets his meals and waits on him night and day.” 


Introducing the Darings 


15 


“ Somehow,’ ’ said Becky, “I sort o’ hate her. 
She won’t let us into any of the back rooms up- 
stairs, though she and gran ’pa can’t use all of 
’em ; and she never comes near us unless she wants 
to jaw about something we ’ve done. I run a 
clothesline through the grass yesterday, and 
tripped old Halliday up when she went to feed the 
chickens, and she was as mad as anything.” 

“I think she does n’t care much for young peo- 
ple,” admitted Phoebe; “and as none of us cares 
for her it ’s just as well that we should live apart — 
even if we occupy the same house. After all, my 
dears, we should be grateful for being allowed so 
much room in this comfortable old shack. We 
had no other place to go after our own home was 
sold.” 

There was silence in the little group for a mo- 
ment. Then Becky asked, curiously : 

“Where do we get the money to live on? We 
have to pay our own grocery bills, don ’twef” 

Phil started and looked upon his younger sis- 
ter wonderingly, as if she had suggested a new 
thought to him. Then he turned to Phoebe. 

4 4 There must have been a little money left, ’ ’ he 
said. 4 4 It never occurred to me before. I must 
ask Mr. Ferguson about it.” 

Phoebe flushed a trifle, but looked down instead 
of meeting her twin’s earnest gaze. 


16 


The Daring Twins 


“ 1 ’ve thought of it, Phil,” she replied, softly. 
“ Whatever was left after paying papa’s debts 
must have been little enough, and can’t last for- 
ever. And then — ” 

Phil was regarding her with serious eyes. He 
glanced at the younger ones and said quickly : 

‘ 4 Never mind. We have n’t sutler ed from pov- 
erty so far, have we? And we won’t. We ’ve 
Daring blood in our veins, and that means we can 
accomplish anything we set out to do. ’ ’ 

Phoebe smiled and turned to reenter the house. 

4 ‘ Saturday is my busy day,” she remarked 
brightly. “I suppose you ’re going to practice 
for the baseball match, Phil?” 

4 ‘Yes,” he said, “I promised the boys — ” Then 
he stopped and shook his head. “I don’t know 
yet what I ’ll do, Phoebe,” he added. “Just now 
I ’ve an errand down town.” 

He caught up his cap, kissed his twin and strode 
down the walk to the gate. Phoebe cautioned the 
younger ones not to raise a racket under Gran ’pa 
Eliot’s window, but to keep in the front yard if 
they were going to play. Then she stole softly 
away to her own little room upstairs and locked 
herself in so as not to be disturbed. 


CHAPTER II 


PHIL INTERVIEWS THE LAWYER 

Phil Daring walked toward the village with un- 
easy, nervous strides. There was an anxious ex- 
pression upon his usually placid face. 

‘ 4 Queer , 9 9 he muttered to himself, ‘ ‘ that I never 
thought to ask how we ’re able to live. It costs 
money to feed five hungry youngsters ; and where 
does it come from, I wonder V 9 

The Eliot house was on the brow of a knoll and 
the street sloped downward to the little village 
where the ‘ ‘ business center ’ 9 clustered around the 
railway station. The river was just beyond, flow- 
ing sleepily on its way to the gulf, and at River- 
dale a long wooden bridge spanned the murky 
water. It was a quiet, pretty little town, but had 
such a limited population that every resident 
knew nearly everyone else who lived there and 
kept fairly well posted on the private affairs of 
each member of the community. 

Wallace Daring, the father of the twins, had 
been the big man of Riverdale before he died a 
few months ago. He had come to the town many 
17 


18 


The Daring Twins 


years before, when he was a young man, and 
built the great beet sugar factory that had made 
all the farmers around so prosperous, growing 
crops to supply it. Mr. Daring must have made 
money from the business, for he married Jona- 
than Eliot ’s daughter and established a cosy home 
where Phil and Phoebe, and Donald and Becky 
were born. Afterward he erected a splendid man- 
sion that was the wonder and admiration of all 
Riverdale. But no one envied Wallace Daring 
his success, for the kindly, energetic man was 
everybody’s friend and very popular with his 
neighbors. 

Then began reverses. His well-beloved wife, 
the mother of his children, was taken away from 
him and left him a lonely and changed man. He 
tried to seek consolation in the society of his lit- 
tle ones ; but in a brief four years he himself met 
a sudden death in a railway wreck. Then, to the 
amazement of all who knew him, it was discovered 
that his vast fortune had been swept away and he 
was heavily in debt. 

Judge Ferguson, his lawyer, was made his 
executor by the court and proceeded to settle the 
estate as advantageously as he could ; but the fine 
mansion had to be sold. The five orphaned chil- 
dren lived in their old home, cared for by honest, 
faithful Aunt Hyacinth, until two months before 


Phil Interviews the Lawyer 19 

the time this story begins, when a man from the 
East named Randolph bought the place and the 
Darings moved over to their grandfather’s old- 
fashioned but roomy and comfortable house 
across the way. 

Phil walked more slowly as he approached the 
business district. The task he had set himself 
was an unpleasant one, but he felt that he must 
face it courageously. 

The boy’s father had been so invariably indul- 
gent that Phil, although now sixteen years of age, 
had never been obliged to think of financial mat- 
ters in any way. He was full of life and healthful 
vitality, and his one great ambition was to pre- 
pare himself for college. His father’s sudden 
death stunned him for a time, but he picked up 
the trend of his studies again, after a little, and 
applied himself to work harder than ever. 
Vaguely he realized that he must make a name 
and a fortune for himself after graduating from 
college ; but so far he had not been called upon to 
consider the resources of the family. Mr. Fer- 
guson had attended to the settlement of his fa- 
ther ’s estate, of which the boy knew nothing what- 
ever, and Aunt Hyacinth had cared for the house, 
and got the meals and sent her five charges to 
school each day in ample season. The lives of the 
young Darings had scarcely been interrupted as 


20 


The Daring Twins 


yet by the loss of their father ; although with him 
vanished every tangible means of support. A 
chance word this morning, however, had caused 
Phil to realize for the first time the fact that they 
were really poor and dependent; and he knew it 
was his duty, as the eldest of the family to find 
out what their exact circumstances were. In 
reality he was not the eldest, for his twin sister, 
Phoebe, was five minutes his senior; but Phil was 
a boy, and in his estimation that more than made 
up for the five minutes’ difference in age and es- 
tablished him as the natural protector of Phoebe, 
as well as of the other children. 

Down at “The Comers” the main residence 
street entered the one lying parallel with the river, 
and around this junction the business center of 
Riverdale was clustered, extending some two or 
more blocks either way. The hotel was on one 
corner and Bennett’s general store on another, 
while the opposite comers were occupied by the 
druggist and the hardware store, feennett’s was 
a brick structure and all the other||were frame, 
except Spaythe’s Bank, a block up thlistreet. Be- 
tween them were rambling one story' mid two story 
wooden buildings, mostly old and weather-beaten, 
devoted to those minor businesses that make up a 
town and are required to supply the wants of the 
inhabitants, or of the farmers who “came to 
town” to trade. 


Phil Interviews the Lawyer 21 

Between the post office and the hardware store 
was a flight of stairs leading to offices on the sec- 
ond floor. These stairs Phil ascended and knocked 
at a door bearing a small painted sign, the letters 
of which were almost effaced by time, with the 
words: “P. Ferguson; Lawyer.* ’ 

No one answered the knock, so Phil opened the 
door and walked softly in. 

It was a bare looking room. A few maps and 
a print of Abraham Lincoln hung upon the cracked 
and discolored plaster of the walls. At one side 
was a shelf of sheep-covered law books; in the 
center stood a big, square table ; beyond that, fac- 
ing the window, was an old-fashioned desk at 
which sat a man engaged in writing. His back 
was toward Phil ; but from the tousled snow white 
locks and broad, spreading ears the boy knew he 
stood in the presence of his father’s old friend and 
confidant, Judge Ferguson. His title of 6 ‘ Judge” 
was derived from his having been for some years 
a Justice of the Peace, and it was, therefore, more 
complimentary than official. 

As Phil closed the door and stood hesitating, a 
voice said : i 1 Sit down. ’ ’ The tone was quiet and 
evenly modulated, but it carried the effect of a 
command. 

Phil sat down. There was a little room con- 
nected with the big office, in which sat a tow- 


22 


The Daring Twins 


headed clerk copying paragraphs from a law 
book. This boy glanced np and, seeing who his 
master’s visitor was, rose and carefully closed the 
door between them. Mr. Ferguson continued 
writing. He had no idea who had called upon 
him, for he did not turn around until he had lei- 
surely completed his task, when a deliberate whirl 
of his revolving office chair brought him face to 
face with the boy. 

‘ 4 Well, Phil?” said he, shooting from beneath 
the bushy overhanging eyebrows a keen glance of 
inquiry. 

‘ 4 1 — I wanted to have a little talk with you, sir, ’ ’ 
returned Phil, a bit embarrassed. i ‘ Are you very 
busy?” 

“No. Fire ahead, my lad.” 

“It ’s about our — our family affairs,” con- 
tinued the visitor, haltingly. 

“What about them, Phil?” 

“Why, I know nothing as to how we stand, sir. 
No one has told me anything and I ’ve been too 
thoughtless to inquire. But, I ought to know, Mr. 
Ferguson — ought n’t I?” 

The judge nodded. 

“You ought, Phil. I Ve been going to speak of 
it, myself, but waited to see if you would n’t come 
here of your own accord. You, or Phoebe. In fact, 
I rather expected Phoebe.” 


Phil Interviews the Lawyer 


23 


“Why, sir?” 

“You Ye not a very practical youth, Phil. They 
say you Ye a student, and are trying for honors 
at the high school graduation next month. Also, 
you Ye the pitcher of the baseball team, and stroke 
oar for the river crew. These things occupy all 
your time, it seems, as well they may.” 

Phil flushed red. There was an implied re- 
proach in the old man’s words. 

“Now, Phoebe is different,” continued the law- 
yer, leaning back in his chair with his elbows on 
the arms and joining the tips of his fingers to- 
gether — a characteristic attitude. “Phoebe has a 
shrewd little head, full of worldly common sense 
and practical, if womanly, ideas. I ’d a notion 
Phoebe would come to me to make these necessary 
inquiries. ’ 9 

Phil slowly rose. His face was now white with 
anger, yet his voice scarcely trembled, as he said : 

“Then, I ’ll let her come to you. Good morn- 
ing, sir.” 

Mr. Ferguson nodded again. 

“Yes,” he remarked, without altering his po- 
sition, “my judgment of you was correct. You ’ll 
be a man some day, Phil, and a good one ; but, just 
now, you Ye merely a stubborn, unformed boy.” 

Phil paused with his hand on the knob of the 
door. To leave the office at this juncture would 


24 


The Daring Twins 


be humiliating and unsatisfactory. His nature 
was usually calm and repressed, and under excite- 
ment he had a way of growing more quiet and 
thinking more clearly, which is exactly the op- 
posite of the usual formula with boys of his age 
His strong resentment at the frank speech of the 
old lawyer did not abate, but he began to reason 
that a quarrel would be foolish, and if he intended 
to satisfy the doubts that worried him he must 
ignore the slight cast upon his character. 

He laid down his hat and resumed his chair. 

4 4 After all, sir,” he said, “I ’m the eldest boy 
and the head of the family. It is my duty to find 
out how we stand in the world, and what is neces- 
sary to be done to protect and care for my brother 
and sisters.” 

* 4 True enough, my lad,” rejoined the lawyer, in 
a hearty tone. “I ’ll help you all I can, Phil, for 
your father’s sake.” 

4 ‘You administered the estate,” said the boy, 
“and you are still my guardian, I believe.” 

“Yes. Your father left no will, and the court 
appointed me administrator and guardian. I ’ve 
done the best I could to untangle the snarl Wal- 
lace Daring left his business in, and the affairs of 
the estate are now closed and the administrator 
discharged.” 

“Was — was there anything left?” inquired 
Phil, anxiously. 


Phil Interviews the Lawyer 


25 


“Your father was a wonderful man, Phil,” re- 
sumed the lawyer, with calm deliberation, 4 4 and no 
doubt he made a lot of money in his day. But he 
had one fault as a financier — he was too conscien- 
tious. I knew Wallace Daring intimately, from 
the time he came to this town twenty years ago, 
and he never was guilty of a crooked or dishonest 
act.” 

Phil’s face brightened at this praise of his fa- 
ther and he straightened up and returned the law- 
yer ’s look with interest. 

4 4 Then there was nothing disgraceful in his fail- 
ure, sir?” 

4 4 No hint of disgrace,” was the positive reply. 
4 4 Daring made a fortune from his sugar factory, 
and made it honestly. But three years ago all 
the beet sugar industries of the country pooled 
their interests — formed a trust, in other words — 
and invited your father to join them. He refused, 
believing such a trust unjust and morally unlaw- 
ful. They threatened him, but still he held out, 
claiming this to be a free country wherein every 
man has the right to conduct his business as he 
pleases. I told him he was a fool ; but I liked his 
sterling honesty. 

4 4 The opposition determined to ruin him, and 
finally succeeded. Mind you, Phil, I don’t say 
Wallace Daring would n’t have won the fight had 


26 


The Daring Twins 


lie lived, for he was in the right and had a host of 
friends to back him up; but his accidental death 
left his affairs in chaos. I had hard work, as ad- 
ministrator, to make the assets meet the indebted- 
ness. By selling the sugar factory to the trust at 
a big figure and disposing of your old home quite 
advantageously, I managed to clear up the estate 
and get my discharge from the courts. But the 
surplus, I confess, was practically nothing/ ’ 

Phil’s heart sank. He thought earnestly over 
this statement for a time. 

“We — we ’re pretty poor, then, I take it, sir?” 

“Pretty poor, Phil. And it ’s hard to be poor, 
after having enjoyed plenty.” 

“I can’t see that there ’s any college career 
ahead of me, Mr. Ferguson,” said the boy, trying 
to keep back the tears that rushed unbidden to his 
eyes. 

“ Nor I, Phil. College is a fine thing for a young 
fellow, but under some circumstances work is 
better. ’ ’ 

“Why did n’t you tell me this before, then?” 
demanded the boy, indignantly. 

“There was no use in discouraging you, or in- 
terrupting your work at high school. I consider 
it is best for you to graduate there, especially as 
that is liable to end your scholastic education. 
The time is so near — less than three months — that 


Phil Interviews the Lawyer 


27 


to continue your studies would make little differ- 
ence in deciding your future, and the diploma will 
be valuable to you.” 

No one but Phil will ever know what a terrible 
disappointment he now faced. For years bis 
ambition, fostered by bis father, bad been to at- 
tend college. All his boyish dreams bad centered 
around making a record there. Phil was a stu- 
dent, but not one of the self-engrossed, namby- 
pamby kind. He was an athlete as well as a 
scholar, and led his high school class in all manly 
sports. At college he had determined to excel, 
both as a student and an athlete, and never had 
he dreamed, until now, that a college career would 
be denied him. 

It took him a few minutes to crowd this intense 
disappointment into a far comer of his heart and 
resume the conversation. The lawyer silently 
watched him, his ’ een gray eyes noting every ex- 
pression that flitted over the boy’s mobile fea- 
tures. Finally, Phil asked: 

“ Would you mind telling me just how much 
money was left, Mr. Ferguson?” 

“The court costs in such cases are extremely 
high,” was the evasive reply. The lawyer did 
not seem to wish to be explicit, yet Phil felt he 
had the right to know. 

“And there were your own fees to come out 
of it,” he suggested. 


28 


The Daring Twins 


“My fees? I did n’t exact any, my lad. Your 
father was the best and truest friend I ever had. 
I am glad I could do something to assist his 
orphaned children. And, to be frank with you, 
Phil, I could n’t have squared the debts and col- 
lected legal fees at the same time, if I ’d wanted 
to.” 

“I see,” returned Phil, sadly. “You have been 
very kind, Mr. Ferguson, and we are all grateful 
to you, I assure you. But will you please tell me 
how we have managed to live for the past eight 
months, since there was nothing left from father’s 
estate ? ’ ’ 

It was the lawyer’s turn to look embarrassed 
then. He rubbed his hooked nose with one finger 
and ran the other hand through the thick mat of 
white hair. 

“Wallace Daring’s children,” said he, “had 
trouble enough, poor things, without my adding 
to it just then. I ’ve a high respect for old black 
Hyacinth, Phil. The faithful soul would die for 
any one of you, if need be. She belongs to the 
Daring tribe, mind you; not to the Eliots. Your 
father brought her here when he was first mar- 
ried, and I think she nursed him when he was a 
baby, as she has all his children. So I took Aunt 
Hyacinth into my confidence, and let her manage 
the household finances. A month ago, when the 


Phil Interviews the Lawyer 


29 


final settlement of the estate was made, I turned 
over to her all the surplus. That ’s what you ’ve 
been living on, I suppose.’ ’ 

“How much was it?” asked the boy, bent on 
running down the fact. 

“Forty dollars.” 

“Forty dollars! For all our expenses! Why, 
that won ’t last us till I graduate — till I can work 
and earn more.” 

“Perhaps not,” agreed the attorney, drily. 

Phil stared at him. 

“What ought I to do, sir? Quit school at 
once ? ’ ’ 

“No. Don’t do that. Get your diploma. You ’ll 
regret it in after life if you don’t.” 

“But — there are five of us, sir. The youngsters 
are hearty eaters, you know; and the girls must 
have clothes and things. Forty dollars ! Why, it 
must have all been spent long ago — and more. ’ ’ 

Mr. Ferguson said nothing to this. He was 
watching Phil’s face again. 

“It ’s all so — so — sudden, sir; and so unex- 
pected. I — I — ” he choked down a sob and con- 
tinued bravely: “I ’m not able to think clearly 
yet.” a ' . t iedto eif i balaog 

“Take your times’d/; advised H the lawyer. 
“There ’s no rush. iAnd .don’t * get discouraged, 
Phil. Remember, you ’re the head of the family. 


30 


The Daring Twins 


Remember, there ’s no earthly battle that can’t be 
won by a brave and steadfast heart. Think it all 
over at your leisure, and consider what your 
father might have done, had some whim of for- 
tune placed him in your position. Confide in 
Phoebe, if you like, but don ’t worry the little ones. 
Keep a stiff upper lip with your friends and play- 
mates, and never let them suspect you ’re in 
trouble. The world looks with contempt on a fel- 
low who shows he ’s downed. If he does n ’t show 
it, he is n’t downed. Just bear that in mind, Phil. 
And now run along, for I ’ve a case to try in half 
an hour, at the courthouse. If you need any help 
or advice, lad,” he added, with gentle kindliness, 
“come to me. I was your father’s friend, and 
I ’m your legal guardian. ’ ’ 

Phil went away staggering like a man in a 
dream. His brain seemed in a whirl, and some- 
how he could n’t control it and make it think, 
logically. As he reached the sidewalk A1 Hayden 
and Eric Spaythe ran up to him. 

“We ’ve been waiting for you, Phil,” said one. 
“Saw you go up to the judge’s office.” 

“Let ’s hurry over to the practice field,” sug- 
gested the other, eagerly. “The rest of our nine 
is there by this time, and we ’ve got to get in 
trim for the match this afternoon.” 

Phil stared, first at one face and then the other, 


Phil Interviews the Lawyer 31 

trying to understand what they were talking 
about. 

‘ 4 If we ’re beaten by Exeter to-day, ’ ’ continued 
Al, “we ’ll lose the series; but we won’t let ’em 
beat us, Phil. Their pitcher can’t hold a candle 
to you, and we ’ve got Eric for shortstop.” 

4 4 How ’s your arm, Phil?” demanded Eric. 

They had started down the street as they talked, 
and Phil walked with them. Gradually, the mist 
began to fade from his mind and he came back to 
the practical things of life. “If a fellow does n’t 
show it, he is n’t downed,” the shrewd old lawyer 
had said, and Phil knew it was true. 

“My arm?” he replied, with a return of his 
usual quiet, confident manner; “it ’s fit as any- 
thing, boys. We ’ll beat Exeter to-day as sure 
as my name ’s Phil Daring.” 


CHAPTER HI 


BECKY GETS ACQUAINTED 

Meantime Becky, Donald and Sue had main- 
tained their interest in the new neighbors, and 
partly concealed by the vines that covered the 
porch were able to watch every movement across 
the way. 

“Is n’t it a shame,’ ’ said Don, “to have them 
walk into our old home that father built, and use 
the pretty furniture that mother bought in the 
city, and have all the good things that we used to 
have ? ’ ’ 

“Wonder who ’s got my room,” mused Sue. 
“If it ’s that yellow haired girl yonder, I could 
scratch her eyes out.” 

“She ’s about my age,” asserted Becky, gazing 
hard at the fairylike form of the new arrival. “I 
hope she ’s ’spectable an’ decent, an’ won’t try to 
be bossy.” 

“They ’re from New York,” added Sue. “I 
jus’ hate New York folks.” 

“How do you know they ’re from New York?” 
demanded Don. 


32 


Becky Gets Acquainted 


33 


“ Somebody said so. Oh, it was Lil Harring- 
ton; her father once knew ’em.” 

The elders had entered the house by this time, 
and the carriage and baggage wagon had driven 
away. The girl and boy, about fourteen and 
twelve years of age, were walking with mincing 
steps about the grounds, examining the shrub- 
bery and flowers and, as Don said, evidently 4 ‘ tak- 
ing stock’ ’ of their, new possessions. 

“That fellow,” Don added, “is a snob. I can 
see that from here. He wears a velvet suit, and 
it ’s braided. Think of that, girls!” 

“Let ’s go over and talk to ’em,” suggested 
Becky. “We can show ’em the stables, an’ where 
we kept the rabbits an’ guinea pigs, an’ how to 
climb the pear-tree. ’ ’ 

“Not me!” exclaimed Don, scornfully. 

“We ’ve got to know ’em sometime,” retorted 
his sister, “bein’ as we ’re next door neighbors. 
And it ’s polite for us to make the first call.” 

“They ’re usurpers,” declared Don. “What 
right had they to buy our old house ? They ’ll get 
no politeness out o’ me, Beck, if they live here a 
thousand years.” 

The boy and girl opposite came down the lawn 
and stood at the entrance of the driveway, looking 
curiously down the wide village street, shaded 
with its avenue of spreading trees. 


34 


The Daring Twins 


“Come on, Sue,” said Becky. “Don’t be cross 
to-day, anyhow. Let ’s go and talk to our neigh- 
bors.” 

But Sue drew back, shaking her curls, posi- 
tively. 

“I don’t like ’em, Becky. They — they ’re not 
our style, I ’m ’fraid. You can go — if you dare.” 

One thing Becky could n’t do, was to “take a 
dare.” She was not really anxious to make the 
pilgrimage alone, but having suggested it, she 
turned a comical look upon the others and said: 

‘ 4 All right. Here goes. ’ ’ 

Don gave a snort of disdain and Sue laughed. 
It would be fun to watch their reckless sister and 
see what she did. 

Becky Daring was not the beauty of the family, 
by any means. Her hair was a glaring, painful 
red; her face long, thin and freckled; her nose 
inclined to turn upward. But Becky’s hazel eyes 
were splendid and sparkled so continuously with 
humor and mischief that they won for her more 
smiles and friendly words than she really de- 
served. Auntie had despaired long ago of trying 
to make Becky look neat and tidy, and at fourteen 
she was growing so fast that she shot out of her 
gowns as if by magic, and you could always see 
more of her slim legs and sunburned wrists than 
was originally intended. She was not dainty, like 


Becky Gets Acquainted 


35 


little Sue, nor calm and composed like beautiful 
Phoebe; but Becky enjoyed life, nevertheless, and 
had a host of friends. 

One of her shoes became untied as she crossed 
the road to where the Randolph children stood. 
She placed her foot on the stone coping at the 
sidewalk and, as she fastened the knot, said with 
her slow Southern drawl: 

“Good mawnin’. I s’pose you ’re our new 
neighbors.” 

The boy and girl, standing side by side, looked 
at her solemnly. 

“Come to stay, I guess, have n’t you?” con- 
tinued Becky, inspecting them carefully at close 
range. 

“Come away, Doris,” said the boy, taking his 
sister’s hand. “It is some common village child. 
I am sure mamma won’t care to have us know 
her. ’ ’ 

Becky threw back her head with a merry laugh. 

“Don was right, you know,” she said, nodding. 
“He sized you up in a jiffy, an’ from ’way over 
there, too, ’ ’ indicating the porch from whence she 
had come. 

“Who is Don, pray?” asked Doris, in quiet, 
ladylike tones ; ‘ 1 and in what way was he right ? ’ ’ 

“Don ’s my brother,” was the reply; “an’ he 
jus’ gave one squint at your brother an’ said he 
was a snob.” 


36 


The Daring Twins 


“Me — a snob!” cried the boy, indignantly. 

“That ’s what he said. Funny how he spotted 
you so quick, is n’t it?” 

6 i Come, Doris. It is an insult, ’ ’ he said, his face 
growing red as he tugged at Doris 9 hand. 

“Wait a moment, Allerton; we must return 
good for evil. Evidently the poor child does not 
know she has been rude,” remarked the girl, 
primly. 

Becky gave a gasp of astonishment. 

“Child!” she echoed. “I’m as old as you are, 
I ’ll bet a cookie. ’ ’ 

“In years, perhaps,” answered Doris. “But, 
permit me to state that your brother was wrong. 
Having been bred in this simple, out of the way 
village, he does not understand the difference be- 
tween a gentleman and a snob. Nor do you realize 
the rudeness of accosting strangers without a 
proper introduction, repeating words designed to 
injure their feelings. I am not blaming you for 
what you do not know, little girl; I am merely 
trying to point out to you your error. ’ ’ 

Becky sat plump down upon the sidewalk and 
stared until her great eyes seemed likely to pop 
out of their sockets. Then, suddenly seeing the 
humor of the situation, she smiled her sunny, ami- 
able smile and hugging her knees with both arms 
said: 


Becky Gets Acquainted 


37 


“I got it that time — right in the Adam’s apple, 
where it belonged. My compliments to Miss Doris 
Randolph, ’ ’ rising to drop a mock curtsy. ‘ ‘ I Ve 
mislaid my cardcase somewhere, but allow me to 
present Miss Rebecca Daring, of Riverdale, who 
resides on the opposite corner. When you return 
my call I hope you ’ll find me out. ’ ’ 

‘ ‘ Wait!” cried Doris, as Becky turned to fly. 
“Did you say Daring?” 

“I said Daring, my child,” with great conde- 
scension. 

“The Daring family that used to live here, in 
this place?” 

“The same Darings, little girl.” 

“Forgive me if I seemed supercilious,” said 
Doris, earnestly. “I — I mistook you for a com- 
mon waif of the village, you know. But mamma 
says the Darings are an excellent family.” 

“Score one for mamma, then. She hit the 
bull’s-eye,” returned Becky, lightly. But, the 
recognition of her social position was too flatter- 
ing to be ignored. 

Said Allerton, rather sourly: 

“Is that fellow who called me a snob a Daring, 
too?” 

“He is Donald Ellsworth Daring,” replied 
Becky, with pride. “But he may have been 
wrong, you know. You ’ll have a chance to prove 
it when we know you better.” 


38 The Daring Twins 

That gracious admission mollified the boy, 
somewhat. 

“You see,” continued Becky in a more genial 
tone, “I can’t stay dressed up all the time, ’cause 
we ’re slightly impecunious — which means shy 
of money. If it had n’t been for that we ’d not 
have sold our house and moved over to Gran ’pa 
Eliot’s. In that case, you ’d never have had the 
pleasure of my acquaintance.” 

Doris looked across the street to the rambling 
old mansion half hid by its trees and vines. In 
front were great fluted pillars that reached be- 
yond the second story, and supported a porch and 
an upper balcony. 

“You live in a much more beautiful house than 
the one papa has bought,” she said, rather en- 
viously. 

“What! that old shack?” cried Becky, amazed. 

“Yes. Mamma and I hunted all over this part 
of the state to find one of those old Colonial 
homesteads ; but none was for sale. So, we were 
obliged to take this modern affair,” tossing a 
thumb over her shoulder. 

“Modem affair! By cracky, I should think it 
was,” retorted Miss Daring, indignantly. “It 
cost a lot more money than Gran ’pa Eliot’s place 
ever did. ’ ’ 

“Of course,” agreed Doris, with a slight smile. 


Becky Gets Acquainted 


39 


“The accident of wealth will enable anyone to 
build a much more palatial house than this. But 
only the accident of birth, it seems, enables one 
to occupy a splendid old Southern homestead.’ ’ 

Becky regarded the speaker with wonder. 

“You ’re from the No’th?” she inquired. 

“Yes. Our family is old, too; perhaps as 
aristocratic as that of your Grandfather Eliot. 
We are from Boston.” 

“L-a-w — zee! I believe you are,” declared 
Becky. “I knew a Boston girl once, who was 
even more proper an’ ridic’lous in her ways than 
you are ; but she died of a cold in the head, poor 
thing. ’ ’ 

“A cold?” 

“Yes. Mortification set in, ’cause she could n’t 
pronounce all the big words proper, on account 
o’ the cold.” Noticing a resentful look creep over 
Doris’ face, she hastened to add: “But that 
don’t count, you know. What really s ’prises me 
is that you think Gran ’pa Eliot’s shack is finer 
than our beautiful old home. I guess that as 
soon as Noah’s flood faded away Gran ’pa Eliot’s 
house was built, it ’s so blamed old.” 

“Dear me!” said Doris, in seeming distress, 
“I wish you would n’t speak disrespectfully of 
Bible history.” 

“What ’s Bible history?” asked the astonished 
Becky. 


40 


The Daring Twins 


i ‘ The flood God sent to punish a wicked world. ’ ’ 

‘ ‘ Oh, that ; ’ ’ with much relief. ‘ 4 1 thought you 
were in earnest, at first/ ’ 

4 4 My sister,’ ’ explained Allerton Randolph, 
with dignity, “is very religiously inclined/ ’ 

“Are you?” asked Becky, curiously. 

“Yes, dear. I am trying to live my daily life 
in conformance with the highest religious prin- 
ciples. So it hurts me to hear sacred things 
spoken of lightly. ’ ’ 

Becky regarded this prim young lady with a 
sudden access of shyness. She felt that a gulf 
had opened between them that never could be 
bridged. Allerton, studying her face, saw the ef- 
fect of his sister’s announcement and said in his 
serious way: 

“Doris takes her religious ideas from our 
mother, who is interested in charities and foreign 
missions. She has exhausted her strength and 
undermined her health in this unselfish work, and 
that is why we have come to the country to live. 
Neither father nor I have much religious inclina- 
tion.” 

‘ ‘ Oh, Allerton ! ’ ’ 

“It ’s true, Doris. Father detests it with all 
his heart, and says our mother has ruined his 
home for a lot of naked niggers in Africa; but 
I ’m more — more — ” 


Becky Gets Acquainted 


41 


“Tolerant, I suppose you mean. But you must 
not convey a wrong impression of our father to 
Miss Daring. He merely regrets our mother’s 
excessive devotion to the cause. He does not 
hate religion, in the abstract.” 

Becky had never been so astonished in her life. 
Here was a boy of Don’s age and a girl of about 
her own years discussing religion with the utmost 
gravity, and using such “nifty” language that it 
positively shocked her. Again she realized that 
there could be nothing in common between the 
youthful Randolphs and the tribe of Daring; but, 
she had determined to be gracious to these 
strangers and so she stifled a sigh of regret and 
said : 

“If you like, I ’ll show you over the stables, 
and where we played circus back of the harness 
room, and Phil ’s rabbit warren, and how to climb 
the pear-tree in the garden without breaking your 
neck, and — ” 

“Thank you very much,” interrupted Doris; 
“but, we are not interested in vulgar romps of 
that character ; are we, Allerton ? ’ ’ 

“They — they sound rather interesting,” he 
submitted, eyeing Becky a little wistfully. 

“Perhaps, for village children,” returned the 
girl, haughtily. “But although we are now living 
in the country we should remember our breeding 


42 


The Daring Twins 


and try to instill some of our native culture into 
these primitive surroundings, rather than sink 
our refinement to the level of the community.” 

44 L-a-w — zee!” cried Becky, again. Then, in 
spite of her effort to be 4 4 good” she laughed in 
Doris ’ face, bobbing her frouzled red head up 
and down as peal after peal of genuine merri- 
ment burst from her slim throat. 

Allerton frowned and Doris looked grieved and 
sad. Positively, this country girl was laughing 
at their expense. 

“I — I can’t help it!” chuckled Becky, trying 
to control herself. * 4 It ’s — it ’s too good to keep. 
I must go an’ tell the kids before I — I bust with 
it all ! Bye-bye, Doris. See you again soon. 4 Or 
river,’ Allerton! Guess I ’ll call you Al. Come 
over an’ get acquainted.” 

She had backed away one step at a time, still 
bubbling with hysterical laughter that she could 
not control, and at the final words turned and 
dashed across the street like mad, her thin legs 
twinkling beneath her short skirts. 

4 4 Well,” said Don, as Becky threw herself 
down upon the porch and shook with an abandon 
of glee; 4 4 tell us the joke, Beck. What ’s hap- 
pened ? ’ ’ 

4 4 Oh, dear! oh, dear!” was all the reply. 

4 4 Are they nice?” inquired Sue, squatting in a 


Becky Gets Acquainted 


43 


rustic chair and swinging her legs, as she calmly 
surveyed her sister. 

4 4 Nice? Sue, they ’re the funniest kids you ever 
heard of,” gasped Becky, her eagerness to talk 
stifling the spasms of merriment. 4 4 They ain’t 
New Yorkers — not a bit — they ’re Bostoners! 
Think of that. It would kill you to hear ’em talk. 
They ’re as full of culture as an egg is of meat; 
an’ langwidge ! — say, folks, it ’s something 
awful. ’ ’ 

44 I guessed as much,” said Don, with a grin. 
4 4 But, I ’m glad they ’re not our kind. I would n’t 
care to go over to our old house and play with 
the usurpers. Let ’s shut ’em out, for good and 
all.” 

4 4 Oh, they ’ll shut us out, I s’pect,” remarked 
Becky, wiping her eyes on her gingham sleeve. 
4 4 You ought to have seen ’em stick up their noses 
at me till they found out I was a Daring. Then 
they put on so many airs it was disgust ’n’.” 

4 4 Seems to me,” said Sue, shaking away her 
troublesome curls and looking thoughtfully at 
her sprawling, ungainly sister, 4 4 they ’re ’zactly 
the sort we ought to ’sociate with. If you could 
rub a little culture olf’n ’em, dear, it would n’t 
hurt you a bit.” 

4 4 Nor you, either, Sue,” laughed Don. 4 4 If you 
pronounced English that way in Boston, they ’d 
jail you.” 


44 


The Daring Twins 


“Now who ’s a snob, Don?” asked Sue, in- 
dignantly. “No one ’s s ’posed to pernounce ev’ry 
measley letter the dicsh ’naries chuck into a word, 
is they?” 

“Oh, Sue!” said Becky; “your grammar is as 
bad as your pemunciation. I mus’ look afteh 
your education, myself. Those Randolph kids are 
a revelation to me ; and, honest injun, I ’m some- 
what ashamed of myself. We ’re going wrong, 
all of us, since mother died,” with a sigh and a 
catch in her voice, “an’ need to be jerked into 
line . 9 ’ 

She said this in sober earnestness, remember- 
ing the sweet, gentle mother who had labored so 
hard to keep her flock from straying, and whose 
loss had permitted them to wander as their 
natural, untamed instincts dictated. 

“Mother,” said Don in tender accents, “was 
a lady to her finger tips, and wanted her girls and 
boys to grow up to be ladies and gentlemen. I 
try to do as she ’d like to have me, whenever I 
think of it; but, that is n’t very often.” 

“You ’re a cross-patch,” asserted Sue; “and 
I ’ve heard teacher say that you ’re the worst 
scholar in the school. You don’t mind Phoebe 
any more ’n a fly minds sugar. 

“Phoebe is n’t my boss,” retorted Don, resent- 
fully. But, the next moment his frown softened, 


Bechy Gets Acquainted 


45 


and he added: “Anyhow, I try to be decent, and 
that ’s more than some of the family do.” 

“Meanin’ me?” asked Becky, defiantly. 

“You Ye fourteen, and almost a woman; yet 
you act like a kindergarten kid. I ’ll leave it to 
anyone if I ’m not more dignified ’n’ respectable 
than you are; and I won’t be thirteen ’til next 
month. ’ ’ 

“You ’re old for your years, Don; and it ’s 
lucky that you can find any good in yourself, for 
nobody else can!” remarked Becky, complacently. 


CHAPTER IV 


phcebe’s secret 

“Let ’s get some pails and go to the woods for 
blackberries, ’ ’ suggested Sue, posing as peace- 
maker. “P’raps Auntie ’ll make us a pie for 
dinner. ’ ’ 

“Can’t,” said Don. “I promised old Miss 
Halliday I’d make her a chicken coop. Another 
hen is hatching out and there ’s no coop to put 
her in.” 

“All right, I ’ll help you,” exclaimed Becky, 
jumping up. “You saw the boards, Don, and I ’ll 
hammer the nails.” 

“Can’t you saw?” 

“Not straight; but, I ’m game to try it.” 

A rush was made for the back yard, and Don 
searched the shed for some old boards to use in 
making the coop for the expected flock. When 
the saw and hammer began to be heard Miss 
Halliday came down from Gran ’pa Eliot’s room 
and stood watching them, her finger on her lips 
to caution them to be as quiet as possible. 

She was old and withered, lean and bent; but 


Phoebe's Secret 


47 


her small black eyes still twinkled brightly. Miss 
Halliday seldom spoke to the Daring children 
and had as little to do with them as possible. 
She was virtually the autocrat of the establish- 
ment, for old Mr. Eliot was paralyzed and almost 
speechless. It is true he could mumble a few 
words at times, but no one seemed able to under- 
stand them, except his constant nurse and 
attendant. 

Miss Halliday had been with the Eliots since 
she was a young woman. She was Gran’ma 
Eliot’s maid, at first, then the housekeeper, and 
after Mrs. Eliot’s death and her master’s par- 
alytic stroke, the sole manager of the establish- 
ment and a most devoted servant. In person 
she was exceedingly neat, although she dressed 
very simply. She was noted in Riverdale for her 
thrift and shrewd bargaining. They called her 
miserly until it came to be generally understood 
that Mr. Eliot’s money was gone; then the mer- 
chants respected her careful management of the 
old man’s finances. 

Why Elaine Halliday stuck to her post, under 
such unpleasant conditions, had puzzled more than 
one wise head in the village. Some said that 
Jonathan Eliot had willed her the homestead in 
return for her services; others, that the frugal 
stewardess was able to save more than her wages 


48 


The Daring Twins 


from the reputed wreck of the Eliot fortunes, 
which had once been considered of enormous ex- 
tent. Only a very few credited her with an un- 
selfish devotion to her old master. 

After the death of his daughter, Mrs. Daring, 
and just before his own paralytic stroke, Mr. 
Eliot had had a stormy interview with his son-in- 
law, Wallace Daring; but, no one except Elaine 
Halliday knew what it was about. Twenty-four 
hours later the irascible old man was helpless, 
and when Phoebe hurried over to assist him he 
refused to see her or any of his grandchildren. 
Mr. Daring, a kindly, warm-hearted man, had 
been so strongly incensed against his father-in- 
law that he held aloof in this crisis, knowing old 
Elaine would care for the stricken man’s wants. 
All this seemed to indicate that the rupture be- 
tween the two men could never be healed. 

After the Daring children had been left orphans 
and reduced to poverty, Judge Ferguson went to 
Miss Halliday and pleaded with her to intercede 
with Jonathan Eliot to give the outcasts a home. 
The big house was then closed except for a few 
rooms on the second floor, where the invalid lay 
awaiting his final summons. There was more 
than enough room for the Darings, without dis- 
turbing the invalid in the least. 

At first, the old woman declared such an ar- 


Phoebe's Secret 


49 


rangement impossible; but, Mr. Ferguson would 
not be denied. He had been Mr. Eliot’s lawyer, 
and was the guardian of the Darings. If anyone 
knew the inner history of this peculiar family it 
was Peter Ferguson. For some reason Miss 
Halliday had been forced to withdraw her objec- 
tions; she ev.en gained the morose invalid’s con- 
sent to 4 4 turn his house into an orphan asylum,” 
as she bitterly expressed it. The Darings were 
to be allowed the entire lower floor and the two 
front bedrooms upstairs ; but they were required 
to pay their own expenses. Elaine declared that 
it was all she could do to find money enough to 
feed Gran ’pa Eliot his gruel and pay the taxes 
on the place. 

A powerful antipathy, dating back many years, 
existed between Miss Halliday and the Darings’ 
black servant, Aunt Hyacinth. During the two 
months since the Darings had found refuge in 
the old house not a word had been exchanged be- 
tween them. But the black mammy, as much the 
protector of the orphans as Miss Halliday was 
of their grandsire, strove to avoid trouble and 
constantly cautioned her flock not to 4 4 raise a 
racket an’ ’sturb poeh gran ’pa.” As for the 
children, they stood so much in awe of the invalid 
that they obeyed the injunction with great care. 

It was not often that Miss Halliday asked the 


50 


The Daring Twins 


boys to assist her in any way; bnt, occasionally, 
Phil or Don would offer to do odd jobs about the 
place when they were not in school. 

“It seems like helping to pay the rent,” said 
Phil, with a laugh, “and as gran ’pa quarreled 
with father I hate to be under obligations to him. 
So, let ’s do all we can to help old Miss Halliday. 
She has enough to worry her, I ’m sure.” 

That was why Don set about making the 
chicken coop this Saturday morning, as he had 
promised to do, and why Becky and Sue were 
eager to assist him. The saw was dull, and that 
made the sawing the hard part of the work until 
Becky declared she could handle the tool much 
better than her brother — even if she could n’t 
manage to keep on the marked line. He let her 
try, and then scolded her — and jeered her at- 
tempts. A row started very promptly and a 
struggle began for the possession of the saw, end- 
ing by Don’s snatching it away and drawing the 
jagged teeth across the palm of Becky’s hand. 
She let go with a scream of pain and the blood 
spurted forth in a manner to frighten them all. 

Don tried to tie his handkerchief over the 
wound, but with a wail of anguish Becky turned 
and fled into the house and up the front stairway 
to the door of Phoebe’s room, lea\ing a red trail 
behind her as she went. 


Phoebe’s Secret 


51 


i ‘ Quick, Phoebe — I ’m murdered! Let me in 
before I die,” she shouted, kicking at the door as 
she squeezed the wounded hand with the other. 

A key turned in the lock and the door flew open. 

Phoebe stared a moment at her sister’s white 
face and noted the stream of blood. Then she 
drew Becky into the room without a word and 
led her to the washbasin. She bathed the wound 
freely with cold water, applied a healing lotion 
and bandaged the hand, neatly. It was a broad, 
jagged cut, but not deep. Phoebe knew that it 
was not a serious wound, but it would be very 
sore and lame for several days to come. 

Becky, trembling with nervousness and weak 
from fright and the sight of blood, tottered to a 
lounge and sank down among the cushions. 

4 ‘How did it happen, dear?” Phoebe now asked. 

Becky related the incident with dramatic de- 
tails until her eyes fell upon a table drawn be- 
fore the window and covered with papers, among 
which rested an imposing looking machine. 

“Jumpin’ jooks, Phoebe!” she exclaimed; “it ’s 
a typewriter. Where on earth did it come from?” 

Phoebe flushed and for a moment looked dis- 
tressed. 

“I rented it,” she replied. “It ’s a great se- 
cret, Becky, and you must promise not to tell any- 


52 


The Daring Twins 


“Can you run it? Have you had lessons ?” 
asked the younger girl, sitting up in her eager- 
ness and forgetting her affliction for a time. 

“I Ve taught myself, ’ ’ said Phoebe. “ It is not 
very hard to learn. At first, you know, I made 
lots of mistakes; but, now I do very well. I Ve 
had it almost six months, and every Saturday I 
typewrite all day.” 

“But why? What are you copying?” de- 
manded Becky, going to the table and looking 
down at the piles of manuscript. 

“It is a book of sermons that Doctor Huntley 
is preparing for a publisher. He is too busy to 
do it himself, so he gave me the job. I get ten 
cents a page, and I Ve copied nearly four hun- 
dred pages already. ’ 7 

“My!” cried Becky; “what a lot of money! 
Whatever will you do with it, dear?” 

Phoebe smiled a little sadly, but put her arm 
around her sister and kissed her, affectionately. 

“That ’s a part of my secret, dear, and you 
must n’t ask me. You ’ll not mention the type- 
writer, Becky — nor anything I Ve told you? I 
don ’t want Phil or the children to know . 9 7 

“Trust me!” returned Becky, delighted to 
share so important a secret with her elder. Then, 
she remembered her sore hand and lay down 
upon the couch again, while Phoebe, having once 
more locked the door, resumed her work. 


Phoebe’s Secret 


53 


It was dinner time when Don finished the 
chicken coop and helped Miss Halliday to move 
the hen and her newly hatched brood into it. 
There had been sundry quarrels between him and 
Sue, who accused him of “spilling Becky ’s heart’s 
blood,” but now the girl was so fascinated by the 
fuzzy chicks that she was loth to leave them, 
when Auntie called her to the midday meal. 

Phil came in, flushed with his exertions on the 
ball field, but unusually glum and serious. He 
found no time for his proposed talk with Phoebe 
then, for as soon as dinner was over he was 
obliged to put on his baseball uniform and hurry 
to the ground, where the important match game 
with the Exeter nine was to take place. 

“Any of you coming to the game?” he inquired. 

“We’re all coming,” declared Becky, who now 
posed as a heroine because of her hurt. But, 
Phoebe shook her head and smiled. 

“I shall be too busy at home, Phil,” she said; 
“but the others may go.” 

He gave her a quick, curious look, but said 
nothing more. 


CHAPTER V 


A MATCH GAME 

For a long time there had been great rivalry 
between the ball teams of Riverdale and Exeter; 
the latter, a small town lying five miles inland, 
where there was a boys’ preparatory school. 
This year each had won five games out of a 
series of ten, and the extra game to be played to- 
day was to decide the championship. The River- 
dale high school captain, A1 Hayden, the drug- 
gist’s son, had picked his team with great care 
for this important occasion, and Phil had been 
chosen pitcher. 

The ball grounds were just outside of the vil- 
lage, and not only were the people of Riverdale 
there in large numbers, but the crowd was aug- 
mented by farmers from the surrounding country 
who had come in for their Saturday trading and 
took advantage of the opportunity to see a good 
ball game. Several wagon loads of ‘ 4 fans” from 
Exeter also rode over in the wake of the buss that 
carried their ball players, to participate in the 
fun and excitement. 

All classes of people occupied the ‘ 4 bleachers. ” 
54 


A Match Game 


55 


Merchants, lawyers and even two liberal minded 
ministers of the gospel were among them, while 
Judge Ferguson strolled over as the game coim 
menced, accompanied by his pretty daughter, 
Janet, to see how Phil conducted himself. The 
Randolph children were plebeian enough to at- 
tend; the manager of the mill was there, and all 
the small Darings, except Phoebe, eagerly awaited 
the contest. 

There was a stand where red lemonade was 
sold, and boys carried around baskets of peanuts 
and popcorn to refresh the audience. Nearly 
every high school in town had thought it her 
duty to be present, and their bright ribbons and 
dresses added a picturesque element to the scene. 

Phil Daring appeared as composed as ever, 
when he entered the arena with his comrades ; but, 
never for a moment, since his interview with Mr. 
Ferguson had his mind been free from grief, 
humiliation and bitter disappointment. He 
nodded and smiled as the throng greeted him with 
hearty cheers; yet all the time he was thinking 
to himself: “My days of fun and freedom are 
nearly over now. I must give up college, for good 
and all, and settle down somewhere to make a 
living and help support the children. I don’t 
know what I can do, I ’m sure, that will earn the 
needed money. No one in Riverdale needs any 


56 


The Daring Twins 


help such as I can give, and I ’m not experienced 
enough to be of much service in a big city. It 
will be a hard fight, with all the chances against 
me; but I ’ve got to undertake it and make a go 
of it.” 

These and similar thoughts flooded his mind to 
the exclusion of all else. Mechanically, he tossed 
the ball in practice, and when time was called he 
took his position in the pitcher’s box with scarcely 
a realization of what he was doing. 

A sudden silence fell upon the throng as Phil 
pressed the new ball into his palm, drew back 
with his well-known easy swing and sent the 
sphere flying through the air. There followed a 
low murmur that sounded like a groan as the ball 
flew wide and smashed against the back-stop. 
Some of the Exeter people laughed. But Phil 
was unaware of either moans or laughter. He 
was thinking of something else more important. 
Getting the ball again, he made another toss and 
the batter caught it with a full blow and sent it 
flying into the field for a two-bagger. A1 Hayden 
looked grave at this but said nothing. Phil was 
Riverdale ’s crack pitcher, as a rule ; but, perhaps 
he had n’t his hand in yet. 

As the game progressed, however, it was evi- 
dent to all that Phil Daring had “fallen down” 
and was pitching a miserable game. The Exeters 


A Match Game 


57 


had six runs to the best of it at the end of the 
sixth inning and the prospects for the Riverdale 
nine ’s being able to even the score were decidedly 
gloomy. Phil had been equally unsuccessful at 
the bat, “fanning out” whenever his turn came. 

It was unwise to risk the winning of the game 
by allowing Daring to play any longer. A1 Hay- 
den hurriedly consulted with his mates and then 
called Phil aside. 

“I ’m sorry, old man,” he said; “but, you 
don’t seem fit, to-day, and we ’re bound to lose 
unless we make a desperate effort. Take the 
bench, and I ’ll put Eric in to pitch — and Jed 
Hopkins in Eric’s place.” 

Phil gave a sudden start and drew his hand 
across his forehead, as the full import of the 
words was understood. Retired? Retired and 
discredited at this important juncture ! Why, he 
never would be able to hold up his head in River- 
dale again, and all the honors he had formerly 
won on the field would be wiped away by this 
disgrace. 

“What ’s wrong with me, Al?” he asked, anx- 
iously. 

“I don’t know, Phil; but something ’s wrong. 
Look at that score — eight to two! — and only 
three more innings to play. You are usually our 
stand-by, old fellow; but, to-day you ’re the only 


58 


The Daring Twins 


one of the nine who has n’t been up to scratch, 
and fighting to win. I ’ve been watching you, 
and you seem dazed, somehow. Have the Exeter 
fellows scared you?” 

‘ ‘No,” was the reply. The score, now noticed 
for the first time, positively startled him. 
Aroused from his dreams at last he begged A1 to 
try him for another inning. 

“Just one,” he pleaded. “Eric can’t pitch as 
well as I can, I ’m sure, and if I don’t make good 
you can pull me out any time.” 

A1 hesitated, sighed, and then consented. He 
really despaired now of winning the game and 
was so fond of Phil that he hated to humiliate 
him. 

But the conference had been noted by the dis- 
contented Riverdale audience and people began to 
shout: “Take him out!” “Put Daring on the 
shelf!” “Phil ’s gone bad to-day!” and other 
similar remarks that made Phil straighten up 
and walk to his station with an air of resolve. 

Groans and hoots greeted him, but he never 
wavered. The first batter to face him, one of the 
crack Exeter players, struck out, and the crowd 
ceased their jibes. The next man made a “pop- 
up” which Phil cleverly caught, and a gentle 
murmur of applause, mostly from the women, re- 
warded him. The third man also struck out, and 


A Match Game 


59 


then the crowd forgot its grievance against the 
young pitcher and gave a hearty cheer. 

“Why did n’t he do that, before?” grumbled 
Judge Ferguson, who had been greatly annoyed 
at Phil’s poor showing. 

“He has n’t seemed himself, to-day,” replied 
Janet, with friendly generosity. “It occurred to 
me that he had heard bad news, or perhaps is not 
well. Really, papa, I ’m not sure that Phil knew 
he was playing ball, till just now.” 

The old lawyer nodded. He knew very well, 
now that Janet shrewdly called his attention to 
it, what had doubtless depressed his young friend, 
and occupied his mind. 

“He seems all right now,” he remarked with a 
sympathetic sigh. “That last inning he played 
all by himself.” 

Indeed, Phil’s record of three “put-outs” un- 
assisted, inspired his fellows with renewed con- 
fidence in him. A1 Hayden went to bat and made 
a two-bagger. Toby Clark, Mr. Ferguson’s office 
clerk, got first base on balls. The next batter 
struck out, but the one following stepped up to 
the plate and pounded out a clean hit that filled 
the bases. It was Phil’s turn now, and he real- 
ized the full importance of the crisis. Usually 
a pitcher is not a very good batter ; yet, until to- 
day Phil had been considered an exception to 


60 


The Daring Twins 


this rule. So far in the game, however, his bat 
had never once touched a ball. 

The spectators were thrilled by the excitement 
of the moment, but expected young Daring to 
strike out and let the next man, a reliable player, 
bring in some of the men on bases. 

But Phil ’s face was set and determined. He 
had not yet redeemed himself. Having well- 
nigh lost the game for his team by his poor show- 
ing, it now behooved him to save the day if he 
could. No thought now engaged his mind, but 
this; he was living in the present — not in the 
future. With watchful eye he followed the ap- 
proaching ball on its course, and at the proper 
time struck shrewdly with might and main. 

High in the air rose the sphere, describing a 
perfect arch. With one accord the spectators 
rose in their seats to watch the ball as it sailed 
over the back fence, giving the batter a home run 
and bringing in the three other men. 

When the mighty cheer that rent the air had 
subsided the score was six to eight, instead of 
eight to two. 

In the eighth and ninth innings Phil pitched so 
well that no runs were added by the Exeter team, 
while the Riverdales made one tally in each inning 
and tied the score. 

The excitement was now intense. Each team 


A Match Game 


61 


formerly had five games to its credit, and in the 
present decisive game each side had scored eight 
runs. An extra inning must be played to deter- 
mine the championship. 

The boys on both sides settled down to do their 
level best. Phil was perfectly calm and confident. 
He struck out two and A1 caught a long, high fly 
that retired Exeter with a “goose-egg.” Then 
the Riverdale team came to bat and the first two — 
poor A1 one of them — went out in short order. 
But when Phil again came to bat the opposing 
pitcher lost his nerve, remembering that famous 
home run. The result was a long drive that 
landed Daring on third, and the next batter, Jed 
Hopkins, brought him home, winning the game 
and the series. 

The Riverdale crowd was in an ecstasy of de- 
light and cheered until it was hoarse. Phil’s 
wonderful playing during the final three innings 
had fully redeemed him in the eyes of his friends 
and a dozen young fellows leaped into the arena 
and hoisted him upon their shoulders, carrying 
him from the field in triumph. Even the de- 
feated Exeters good-naturedly joined in the ap- 
plause, while Becky and Sue sobbed with joy at 
the honors being showered upon their big brother. 

“Was n’t Phil splendid?” exclaimed Janet, as 
she followed her father from the grand stand. 


62 


The Baring Twins 


The old lawyer nodded thoughtfully. 

“Yes,” said he, “the lad has a wonderful 
amount of reserve force, which makes him a good 
uphill fighter. He reminded me of his father, 
during that last rally. If Phil Daring has only 
half the pluck and backbone that Wallace Daring 
possessed, I predict he ’ll some day make his 
mark in the world.” 

“Yet Mr. Daring died poor,” suggested Janet. 

“True, my dear; and that was because he died. 
Had he lived, it would have been a different 
story.” 


CHAPTER VI 


HUNTING A JOB 

When Phil managed to shake off his enthusias- 
tic friends and return to his home, he found that 
Phoebe had gone out. Entering the kitchen to 
ask Aunt Hyacinth where his sister was, he found 
the black mammy preparing the supper. 

“Don’ know whar she am, Marse Phil, I ’se 
shuah,” she said. “But Miss Phoebe ’s sartin to 
be back To’ long.” 

Phil turned to go; then he paused, and after a 
moment’s thought inquired: 

“Auntie, who pays our grocery bills!” 

“I do, chile, ’ ’ she answered, giving him an odd 
look. 

“And where do you get the money!” he con- 
tinued. 

Auntie was beating eggs for a custard. She 
pretended not to hear him. Phil repeated the 
question. 

“Marse Ferg’son done gi’ me a lot,” said she, 
in a matter of course way. 

63 


64 The Daring Twins 

4 4 Forty dollars, I believe/ ’ the boy rejoined, 
rather bitterly. 

4 4 Mo’ hi dat, honey; lots mo’.” 

“When?” 

4 4 ’Fore we shifted oveh to dis yeah house. Den 
he done guv me fohty dollehs mo’, an’ said dat 
were all dere was left. But I guess it ’ll do, all 
right.” 

4 4 Auntie,” said Phil, taking both her hands and 
looking her squarely in the eyes, 4 4 tell me truly; 
is any of that last forty dollars left?” 

A look of genuine distress crossed her honest 
face. 

4 4 No, honey,” she admitted, in a low voice. 

4 4 Then, where does the money come from that 
we ’re living on now?” 

44 H — m. Miss Phoebe done guv it to me. ” 

4 4 Phoebe ! ’ ’ 

4 4 Miss Phoebe; shuah.” 

4 4 Where could Phoebe get any money?” he in- 
quired, wonderingly. 

44 Yo’ haf to ask heh, I guess, Marse Phil.” 

He reflected a moment. 

4 4 Auntie, you ’re keeping something from me; 
something I ought to know ; and it is n ’t right to 
treat me so,” he declared. 

She made no reply to this. 

4 4 Phoebe has n’t any money; or, if she ’s been 


Hunting a Job 


65 


trying to earn some, it must be mighty little. See 
here : I ’ll finish school next week, and then I ’m 
going to take care of the family myself, and look 
after things. Don’t you know I ’m the head of 
the Darings, Auntie, and entitled to know all 
about our aft airs ? So tell me, where does all the 
money come from to pay the grocer, and the 
butcher, and all the rest?” 

“'Miss Phoebe done guv me some,” she per- 
sisted, half frightened at his earnestness. 

“And the rest, Auntie?” 

She twisted her apron in her hands and cast an 
appealing glance into his stern face. 

“Tell me, Auntie!” 

“Well, yo’ see, Marse Phil,” she began, slowly, 
“I ’ve got a little money what useter b’long to 
yo’ dead papa.” 

“My father!” 

“Dat ’s a fac’, honey. OP Marse alius done 
pay me mo ’ wages ’n I could earn, nohow. I kep ’ 
sayin’ I did n’ want no money; but he insis’, 
chile; dat ol’ Marse Wallace insis’ I take all he 
guv me, Law sakes, I don’ neveh need no money, 
Marse Phil. What ’n a world I need money fo’ 
— now yo’ tell me, ef yo’ can! But I gotter take 
it, or make Marse Wallace mad. So, I put it in 
de bank fo’ safe keepin’, an’ jus’ bided mah time 
to git even. ’Twan’t mine, honey, shuah ’nuff; 
but I jes’ let it stay in de bank fo’ ’mehgencies. ” 


66 


The Daring Twins 


Phil’s face was a study. It grew red and white, 
stern and dismayed by turns. It was not that he 
resented accepting assistance from Aunt Hy; she 
seemed one of the family; but that the Darings 
should be so miserably poor as to be dependent 
upon the services of their black mammy for sup- 
port was so shameful that he could scarcely bear 
the thought. 

“I ’m an able-bodied young man,” said he to 
Phoebe a little later, when the girl had returned 
from her errand, “and, instead of wasting my 
muscles and energies on athletic games, all these 
months, I should have been at work for the 
family.” 

“You did n’t know, dear.” 

“I ought to have known, Phoebe. That ’s no 
excuse. ’ ’ 

“I ’m sure that everything has happened for 
the best, Phil,” she replied, tenderly. “We ’ve 
gone along, somehow, and I was anxious that we 
should both be able to complete our high school 
course. It ’s so near the end, now, that we ’d 
better stick it out.” 

“Do you know that Auntie has been spending 
her savings to buy food for us?” 

“Yes; but she does n’t need the money just 
now, and we will pay her back some time. ’ ’ 

1 1 She says that you have given her money, too. ’ ’ 


Hunting a Job 67 

1 ‘ Just a trifle, Phil,” she replied, after a brief 
hesitation. 

“Where did it come from, Phoebe ?” 

“I — I earned it.” 

“How?” 

She unclasped her hand and showed him a 
bright five-dollar gold piece. 

“That ’s my last week’s wage — as an amateur 
typist. I ’ve been copying manuscript for Rev- 
erend Doctor Huntley. ’ ’ 

Phil could n ’t help it ; he gathered his twin into 
his arms and cried like a baby, while Phoebe sobbed 
on his shoulder and was glad the secret was out 
at last. There were not many secrets between 
these two. 

Finally, when they had quieted down and could 
smile into each other’s eyes again, the girl ex- 
plained how she had found the work and how the 
kindly clergyman had secured a typewriter for 
her and been very patient with her mistakes until 
she had thoroughly mastered it. 

“He said, to-day, that it was the neatest and 
most correct copying he had ever seen,” she 
added, proudly. 

The discovery that Phoebe had been working 
while he played added fuel to Phil ’s remorse. He 
wanted to quit school at once and seek work, but 
Phoebe argued long and patiently and at last pre- 


68 


The Daring Twins 


vailed upon him to complete his course, It would 
only require a couple of weeks more to do this, 
and meantime he could be inquiring for work in 
the village. 

“I ’ll not be likely to find it, though,” he pre- 
dicted. ‘ 4 Riverdale is a dull place, and I ’m 
afraid I ’ll have to go to the city.” 

“Oh, no!” she exclaimed, for the twins had 
never been parted in their lives, and she could 
not endure the thought. “I ’m sure that some 
position may be found here, and although the 
pay will not be as liberal as in the city, your ex- 
penses will be much less. And, above all, we can 
then remain together.” 

“I ’ll see what can be done, ’ ’ he promised, kiss- 
ing her atf ectionately ; and then the younger ones 
came trooping in to end their conversation. 

For several days it seemed as if Phil’s predic- 
tion would be fulfilled. No position was offered 
him, although the entire village was canvassed. 
Many of the graduating class were sons of mer- 
chants, who intended taking them into their 
stores. For that reason it was a bad time of the 
year to seek for work. 

Phil went to Mr. Ferguson and asked if it 
would be right for him to apply at the sugar fac- 
tory for a job. He did not know his father’s suc- 
cessor, a stern looking man who had been sent 


Hunting a Job 


69 


by the syndicate to manage the plant, and who 
was a stranger to Riverdale. 

“I ’ll see him myself, lad,” decided the lawyer. 
“I Ve met Mr. Atkins in business ways, and be- 
lieve I would have more influence with him than 
you. Come and see me again to-morrow and I ’ll 
report results.” 

After school the next day Phil kept the ap- 
pointment, trying hard to hope that Mr. Fergu- 
son had succeeded. But the old lawyer shook his 
head, gravely. 

“Nothing there for you, Phil,” he said. “At- 
kins claims it ’s his dull season, but I know 
better. No doubt the man could give you employ- 
ment, if he chose, but he does n’t care to have a 
Daring in the office. An old prejudice against 
your father for fighting the trust so long.” 

“You have n’t thought of any other opening, 
sir, have you?” 

“Not just yet. But, I ’ll keep my eye open for 
you, Phil, and let you know if anything offers. 
Keep your courage, lad. There ’s something for 
everybody in this world.” 

This bit of philosophy fell upon deaf ears. 
Phil was quite discouraged as he went slowly 
down the stairs to the street. In the doorway he 
paused, for Ned Thurber had halted before him. 
Ned was the clerk in Spay the ’s Bank. 


70 


The Daring Twins 


“Congratulate me, Phil,” he said. “I ’ve an 
offer to go to St. Louis, at a big salary.” 

Phil shook his hand. 

“Are you going, Ned?” he asked eagerly. 

“Of course. I 11 be assistant teller in one of 
the biggest banks there.” 

“Who will take your place at Spavthe’s?” 

“I don’t know yet. Just got the offer this 
morning, you see; but I ’ve talked with Mr. 
Spaythe and promised him that I ’d stay until 
he can get someone to take my place. That won’t 
be easy, though — unless he imports someone.” 

“Could n’t I fill the place, Ned?” 

“You! I thought you were going to college.” 

“I — I ’ve decided not to,” replied Phil. 

“But you ’ve no experience in banking.” 

“No other young fellow in town has, for that 
matter. ’ ’ 

“That ’s true,” said the other, thoughtfully. 

“I ’d like the job, Ned,” pleaded Phil. 

“In that case I ’ll speak to the old man about 
you. I ’ve an idea you could fill Eric’s place, 
while Eric could climb to my position as head 
bookkeeper. His father ought not to object to 
that, and I ’m sure you could do Eric’s work 
easily. Another thing is in your favor, Phil. 
The Daring name is rather popular around here, 
especially with the farmers, and that counts with 


Hunting a Job 


71 


a man like Spaythe. The more I think of it, the 
more I believe we ’ve hit the right combination. 
Trust me to help work it out, for I want to get 
away as soon as possible.’ ’ 

Phil did not leave this unexpected chance 
wholly to Ned’s management, however. He went 
back and told Judge Ferguson about it, and then 
he met Eric, the banker’s only son and Phil’s 
friend. Eric was also employed at the bank and 
he was astonished and delighted when Phil pro- 
posed taking Eric’s place — thus advancing him 
to the more important post of bookkeeper, to be 
vacated by Ned Thurber. 

“I ’ll go and talk to father about it at once,” 
he said. 

That same day Mr. Spaythe was approached 
by no less than four people in the interests of 
Phil Daring. First, came his son Eric, who told 
him Phil was a prince of good fellows. Then Ned 
Thurber pointed out the fact that the popularity 
of the Darings would add prestige to the bank. 
Presently, Judge Ferguson walked in and vouched 
for Phil ’s character and ability, off ering to stand 
sponsor for the boy, if he was given the place. 
Finally, Phoebe Daring stole into the bank and 
timidly asked to see Mr. Spaythe. 

He looked at her curiously as she entered his 
private room; a pretty and modest young girl, 
he thought. 


72 


The Daring Twins 


“I met Mr. Thurber a little while ago, and he 
says that he is going away to St. Louis,’ ’ she be- 
gan. “So I thought I would come here and ask 
if you won’t take brother Phil in his place. I ’m 
Phoebe Daring, you know.” 

Mr. Spaythe nodded. 

“I know. You’ve often been here with your 
father, in the old days. But you ’re growing fast 
now, Miss Phoebe.” 

“I need to grow, sir, for I must mother the 
other children. Of course you know how poor 
we are. Father always banked here, I remember ; 
so you know, perhaps better than I do, our pres- 
ent circumstances.” 

“How old is Phil now?” 

“Sixteen, sir.” 

“H — m. That is rather young.” 

“But he is big for his age, Mr. Spaythe. He ’s 
nearly six feet tall, and as strong as anything.” 

“Do you think we bank by main strength, Miss 
Daring?” 

“Phil will graduate next week, at High. He 
hopes to be at the head of his class.” 

Mr. Spaythe drummed thoughtfully on the desk 
with his fingers. 

“I ’m going to consider your application, my 
dear,” he said, quite genially for him. “Ask 
your brother to come and see me.” 


Hunting a Job 


73 


Phoebe hurried away, overjoyed at her success. 
She astonished Phil that evening by saying that 
she had made an appointment for him to see Mr. 
Spaythe. He tore up the little note that he had 
intended to mail to the banker, then kissed his 
twin sister and thanked her for her assistance. 
Only Mr. Spaythe knew whose influence had in- 
duced him to consider giving the position to an 
inexperienced, untried youth, fresh from high 
school. Perhaps, after all, it was the remem- 
brance of his old friendship for the elder Daring. 

Anyhow, Phil had a long interview with the 
old banker and came away engaged to fill the 
vacancy made by Ned Thurber’s withdrawal. As 
soon as school closed he was to begin work. 

There was great rejoicing among the Darings 
that evening. Aunt Hyacinth made them one of 
her famous shortcakes for supper, to celebrate 
the occasion, and Phil became a hero to his 
younger brother and sisters, because he was about 
to step from youth to manhood and become a 
breadwinner. 


CHAPTER VII 


THE COMING OF COUSIN JUDITH 

Next morning while they were at breakfast, 
the doorbell rang and Auntie answered it. A 
moment later a comely young woman entered the 
room, gazed smilingly at the circle of young faces 
and advanced to kiss Phoebe, as the eldest, first 
of all. 

i i Don’t you remember me!” she asked. “I ’m 
your Cousin Judith.” 

“ Cousin Judith Eliot !” cried Phoebe, de- 
lightedly. And then there was a rush to greet 
this newly found relative, all the Darings crowd- 
ing around her in a mob. 

“I thought you were still in Europe, Cousin 
Judith/ ’ said Phil. ‘ 4 Have you been long in 
America ? ’ ’ 

‘ i Just four days,” she replied, throwing off her 
wrap and sitting down in the place Aunt Hyacinth 
had prepared for her. “I hurried here as soon 
after landing as possible.” 

“But what good fortune brought you to River- 
dale?” inquired Phoebe, looking with pleasure at 
74 


The Coming of Cousin Judith 75 

the beautiful, refined face of the elder woman and 
noting the daintiness of her attire — dainty and 
fresh, although she was just out of a sleeping 
coach, after a long journey. 

Cousin Judith, although almost the only rela- 
tive which the Darings possessed, and familiar to 
them by name since their infancy, was neverthe- 
less almost a stranger to them all. She was their 
mother ’s cousin and, although mVichyounger, had 
always been Mrs. Daring’s closestiknd warmest 
friend. For years past, however, shemad resided 
in some small European town, studying art while 
she painted portraits and copies of the Madonna 
on porcelain. She had never married; dimly, 
Phoebe remembered hearing of some tragedy in 
Cousin Judith’s life when her fiance had died on 
the eve of their approaching marriage. She was 
now but twenty-four; although, in the eyes of her 
young cousins, she appeared very mature indeed. 

“I came here,” said Cousin Judith, smilingly, 
yet with a serious ring in her sweet-toned voice, 
4 4 at the call of duty. I wanted to come to you the 
moment 1 heard of your dear father’s death, but 
it takes some little time to break up an establish- 
ment even as modest as mine, when it is in far- 
away Italy. But here I am, at last.” 

4 4 Going to stay?” asked Sue, softly. 

44 I think so. Is there any room for me, here?” 


76 


The Daring Twins 


“Plenty, Cousin Judith !” cried five voices. 

“Then, while I drink my coffee, tell me all the 
news about yourselves. How is Gran ’pa Eliot? 
— he ’s my uncle, you know — and who takes care 
of him?” 

Becky began the story, but talked so excitedly 
that she made a sad jumble of it. Then Phil 
picked up the narrative, telling the simple facts 
that Cousin Judith might be interested in, and 
Phoebe concluded the recital. 

“I remember Elaine Halliday,” said the new 
arrival, musingly. “She was Aunt Eliot’s maid 
when I was a young girl, and whenever I visited 
here I used to fight with the woman continually. 
She had a rather sour disposition, then.” 

“It ’s worse now,” declared Becky. “She ’s 
a reg’lar Tartar; and a — a — an autocrat, and an 
anarchist and traitor, and — ” 

“Afterward, she was housekeeper,” continued 
Judith. “I saw her more seldom, then, but she 
ran the household in an able manner while Aunt 
Eliot was so much of an invalid.” 

“She has been a faithful servant, I ’m sure,” 
said Phoebe, “and if she happens to be a bit 
cranky with us at times we ought to put up with 
it. I don’t know what gran ’pa would do without 
her. She ’s the only one who can understand him, 
and sh« attends to him and all his affairs — cooks 


The Coming of Cousin Judith 77 

the things he can eat — feeds him with a spoon, 
and all that.” 

4 ‘Don’t you all live together, then?” asked Miss 
Eliot. 

“No,” replied Phoebe. “We ’ve been given a 
certain part of the house, and run our own es- 
tablishment, while Miss Halliday runs her part. 
We are ordered not to go near gran ’pa’s rooms, 
or pick the fruit or berries — or steal the hen’s 
eggs. If we behave, she will let us stay here, 
rent free; but if we don’t mind her, or dare to 
intrude on gran ’pa, out we go, neck and crop.” 

Judith Eliot looked thoughtful. But she 
avoided carrying the conversation farther in the 
presence of the younger children. There was 
little time, indeed, to talk much with any of them, 
as they were obliged to run off to school. It was 
Friday, fortunately, and to-morrow would be a 
holiday, when they could “visit” to their hearts’ 
content. 

As they said good-by to their new cousin the 
drayman was carrying in two big trunks and 
some portmanteaus. 

“By jooks! I ’m glad she ’s come,” cried 
Becky. “It almost seems like having mother 
back. Don’t you think they look alike?” 

“She ’s a dandy, all right,” commented Don. 
“I ’m glad she ’s going to stay.” 


78 


The Daring Twins 


“Is n’t she beautiiv\°l” chimed in little Sue, 
tossing her curls ecstatically. “And only to 
think she ’s lived in Europe! Won’t she have 
some nibsy stories to tell us, though?” 

Meantime, Cousin Judith was sitting face to 
face with Aunt Hyacinth in the kitchen, and lis- 
tening to the story that the old mammy was tell- 
ing of the trials and tribulations her poor chil- 
dren had suffered. 

First, there was the mother ’s death. That was 
indeed a serious misfortune, for Mrs. Daring had 
looked after her young flock with tender care and 
taught them to adopt the manners of ladies and 
gentlemen. After her death there was only the 
old black mammy to cope with the situation. Mr. 
Daring proved a loving and devoted father to his 
motherless ones, but he was too indulgent to cor- 
rect their ways and manners and the younger 
ones, especially, soon lapsed into the wild and 
untamed ways of young savages. Mr. Daring 
realized this, and wrote an account of his doubts 
and fears for their future to Judith, asking her 
if she would not come back to America and make 
her future home with them. 

The young woman refused the invitation at 
that time. She could not leave her studies, or her 
work, without ruining all her plans. She wrote 
him to get a governess to look after the accom- 


The Coming of Cousin Judith 79 

plisliments of the children. Aunt Hyacinth would 
be sure to take care of their physical require- 
ments. And, having proffered this advice, she 
dismissed the subject from her mind. 

Last fall, when news of Mr. Daring’s death and 
his bankruptcy reached her, Judith had been 
much distressed. Duty called her to far away 
Riverdale, to look after Mollie Eliot’s orphaned 
little ones. She wrote to Lawyer Ferguson for 
particulars and he frankly informed her of the 
unfortunate condition of the young Darings. So 
she “broke camp,” as she said, and as soon as 
she could complete and deliver the miniatures 
which she had contracted to paint for a wealthy 
Englishman, the successful artist abandoned her 
brilliant career and departed, bag and baggage, 
for America. 

“So they ’re pretty wild, are they?” she asked 
Aunt Hy. 

“Wild ’s hawks, Miss Judy, I ’s sorrerful to 
remahk. Marse Phil an’ Miss Phoebe ain’t so 
bad, kase dey ’s old ’nuff to ’member what ther 
pore deah ma done tell ’em. But Miss Sue uses 
jus’ drea’fu’ grammer, an’ she dat stubbo’n 
’twould make a mule blush. Marse Don, he ’s 
got a good heart, but he can’t ’member jus’ whar 
it ’s locationed, an’ he plagues ever ’body mos’ 
alarmin’. As fer dat flyaway Becky, ’t ain’t jus’ 


80 


The Daring Twins 


no use triflin’ wid her; she kain’t be brung up 
proper, nohow.” 

“ Becky is at a difficult age, just now,” mused 
Judith, smiling at the eloquent old servant. 

“All her ages done ben ditf’cult, Miss Judy — 
shuah’s yo’ bohn. Miss Becky don’ seem like a 
Daring a’ tall. She ’s mo’ like dat Topsy in Unc’ 
Tom’s Cab’n; ’cept’ she ain’t black.” 

Then came the subject of finances, wherein 
Aunt Hyacinth was able to give definite and fairly 
lucid information. She had managed to feed her 
flock so far, but the future contained an alarming 
menace unless more money was forthcoming. 
When Aunt Hyacinth ’s savings were gone, starva- 
tion might stare the Darings in the face. It is 
true both Phil and Phoebe planned to make some 
money, “but what ’s dem helpless chill ’ns know 
’bout de expensiveness of livin’?” inquired the 
old mammy, hopelessly. 

Judith looked grave, but she was not greatly 
surprised. 

“Miss Phoebe’s ben workin’ right ’long, ev’ry 
minute she ’s out ’n school,” reported Auntie; 
“but it ain’t sech work as ’ll last long. An’ 
Marse Phil ’s goin’ take a place in de bank, when 
he ’s got his schoolin’ — ’twere all decided no 
more ’n yist’day. But ten dollahs a week ain’t 
no great ’mount to fill all dem moufs. Lucky 
we don ’ haf to pay rent. ’ ’ 


The Coming of Cousin Judith 81 

“I have always thought my uncle — their Grand- 
father Eliot — a rich man,” remarked Judith, 
more. to herself than to old Hyacinth. “In my 
girlhood days he was said to be the largest prop- 
erty owner in the county.’ ’ 

“So he were, Miss Judy. Don’ I ’member 
when Marse Daring fus’ brung me heah, how 
Misteh Jonat’n Eliot was de big rich man o’ 
Rivehdale? But he done sold off de hull estate, 
piece by piece, ’til nuthin ’s lef’ but dis yere ol’ 
house an’ de gahden.” 

“But what became of all the money he re- 
ceived for the land?” 

“Dunno, honey. Dat ’s what Marse Wallace 
done fight wid him about, years ago. He say ol’ 
Marse Eliot done sell his land an’ squander de 
money, what oughter go to Miss Molly an’ her 
chiluns; an’ ol’ Marse Eliot done tell him min’ 
his own business. Miss Molly were he on ’y chile, 
an’ she done fit wi’ de ol’ man, too; so we uns 
did n’t hev no truck wi’ dey uns fer a long time. 
When Miss Molly died, Marse Wallace try to 
patch up t’ings, but ol’ Marse Eliot got de stroke 
what mumbled him, an’ it turned out he ’s pore 
like Job’s turkey.” 

“How does he live, then?” asked Judith. 

“It don’ take much to feed his gruel to him, an’ 
ol’ Miss Halliday ’s dat pars’monius she don’ 


82 


The Daring Twins 


eat decent cookin’ herself. She sell de aigs ’n’ 
chickens, an’ de fruit an’ sich, an’ she bargains 
at de groc’ry fer de cheapes’ stuff dey got. So 
dey somehow gits along — don’ ask me how, 
honey. ’ ’ 

“Well,” said Judith, rising with a sigh, “I see 
that I ’m needed here, in more ways than one. 
Where may I locate my room, Aunt Hyacinth ? 9 9 

This puzzled Mammy for a time. The old 
mansion had been built on a queer plan. Upstairs 
there were four bedrooms in the front of the house 
and four in the rear. Of these last the two at 
the back end overlooked the mountains and the 
valleys and were the most pleasantly situated of 
any in the house. Mr. Eliot had therefore chosen 
them for his own, and now he sat in a chair all day 
looking out of a window over the broad stretch of 
land he had always loved. It was a peaceful, 
quiet scene. Behind the house the streets were 
merely green lanes, with a few scattered habita- 
tions here and there. A little to the right, but in 
plain sight of this second-floor window, stretched 
the old-fashioned country graveyard — not yet 
sufficiently dignified to be called a “cemetery” — 
and Mr. Eliot’s eyes might clearly see a white 
mausoleum, which he had built years before, to 
contain his body when he had passed from life. 

Everyone had thought this an eccentric thing 


The Coming of Cousin Judith 83 

for Jonathan Eliot to do; some of the neighbors 
shuddered at the idea of a live, healthy man pre- 
paring his own tomb. But there it was, scarcely 
a quarter of a mile distant from his dwelling; 
and, as he now sat paralyzed before the broad 
window, perhaps his glassy eyes rested more 
often upon that ghostly tomb than upon the 
charming landscape of hill and dale, that extended 
far into the distance toward Exeter. 

Opening from this room was a balcony with out- 
side stairs leading to the garden. Adjoining the 
two large rear rooms were a couple of small 
chambers opening into a hallway. The hall orig- 
inally ran to the front of the house, but directly 
in the center of the passage had been placed a 
stout door, separating the upper part of the house 
into two distinct parts, each containing four 
chambers. Miss Halliday, in reserving the four 
rear rooms, had fitted up one of the hall cham- 
bers as a kitchen and retained the other for her 
own sleeping apartment. Of the two more spa- 
cious rear rooms, one was old Mr. Eliot’s bed- 
room and the other his living room. These four 
rooms satisfied all the requirements of the para- 
lytic and his nurse, and so the balance of the house 
was turned over, somewhat grudgingly, to the 
orphaned Darings. 

But in this arrangement Elaine Halliday made 


84 


The Daring Twins 


one curious stipulation. The two hall rooms were 
never to be used by the Darings, for any purpose. 
They might occupy the front bedrooms, but un- 
der the plea that the children might disturb their 
invalid grandfather, the hall rooms must remain 
vacant. 

Phoebe had accordingly taken possession of one 
of the front chambers, and Phil and Don shared 
the other. Downstairs the house had a big par- 
lor, or drawing-room — a ghostly, primly fur- 
nished apartment that all the Darings abhorred — 
a large dining room with a side porch, an ample 
hall with a spiral staircase, pantries and kitchen 
and two small chambers opening out of the dining 
room. Becky and Sue together occupied one of 
these little rooms, while the other, which had a 
door into the kitchen and was little more than a 
* ‘ cubbyhole , 9 9 was Aunt Hyacinth’s own room. 

Unless Judith Eliot took possession of one of 
the forbidden hall bedrooms upstairs, there was 
really no place for her in all the big house. When 
this was explained to her she promptly started to 
visit her uncle and Miss Halliday. She mounted 
the outside stairway from the garden and at the 
top was confronted by the thin-visaged guardian 
of the place. 

“Go away!” said Miss Halliday, sternly. 
‘ 1 Don ’t you understand that no one is allowed on 
these premises'?” 


The Coming of Cousin Judith 85 

“I am Judith Eliot,” was the calm reply. 
“ Don’t you remember me, Elaine?” 

The stern face hardened still more. 

“What are you doing here, Judith Eliot?” de- 
manded the woman. 

“Why, Elaine, if you will move aside and allow 
me to sit down I shall be able to explain my pres- 
ence. Do you expect me to stand on this landing 
all day ? How is my uncle ? ’ ’ 

“He can’t see you,” said old Elaine, firmly. 
“Go back, and I ’ll come and talk to you pres- 
ently. ’ ’ 

Judith had learned self restraint in her years 
of buffeting with the big world, but never had 
she had such cause for indignation in all her ex- 
perience. The old woman ’s insulting attitude and 
words and her assumption of authority were not 
to be endured. With flashing eyes Miss Eliot ad- 
vanced and thrust the frail form from the door- 
way, entering the room before old Elaine was well 
aware of her purpose. 

Before a broad window her uncle was propped 
up in his chair, staring listlessly across the valley 
to the mountains beyond. She approached him 
and said softly: 

“Uncle! Here is Judith come to see you.” 

There was no reply, no movement to indicate 
that he had even heard her. She stooped to his 
ear and spoke louder. 


86 


The Daring Twins 


“ Uncle! Uncle Eliot! I am Judith — your 
niece. I have come to see you, Uncle! Do you 
not know me?” 

The withered, pallid countenance never 
changed. The expressionless gaze was fixed as 
ever. He might have been a dummy of a man ex- 
cept for the slight rise and fall of his chest as he 
breathed. 

Judith glanced around and found Miss Halli- 
day standing near with a sneering smile upon her 
face. 

“He ’s mighty glad to see you, is n’t he?” she 
asked. 

The girl did not reply. It was quite evident 
that Gran ’pa Eliot was entirely helpless ; that he 
was all unaware of her presence. She looked at 
the old man attentively, thinking he was far more 
dead than alive. His cheeks were hollow and 
sunken, his skin like ancient parchment. The 
hands that lay extended upon his knees were with- 
ered and bony; the wisp of white hair upon his 
head was carefully brushed ; he wore a neat dress- 
ing gown. Propped among his pillows he seemed 
to he as comfortable as was possible for one in 
his condition. 

Letting her eyes roam around the room, Judith 
saw that it was neat and well cared for. Elaine, 
always an excellent housekeeper, could not be 
criticised for any undue laxness. 


The Coming of Cousin Judith 87 

Judith turned to her. 

“I did not realize he was so helpless/ ’ she said. 

4 4 Does he recognize no one at all?” 

‘ 4 Only one, ’ ’ replied Elaine, grimly tri- 
umphant. 4 ‘But strangers are sure to make him 
nervous. He 11 have a had time, after your fool- 
ish intrusion. I can tell by his face that he knows 
something is wrong; that he ’s been disturbed. 
He don’t know you ’re here, perhaps; but he 
senses something different. I advise you to go 
before he is upset entirely — a shock of this sort 
might kill him. ’ ’ 

Judith looked at her uncle again. His dull, 
apathetic expression had not altered a particle, 
so far as she could discover. The idea of disturb- 
ing this half-dead man seemed absurd. Yet the 
old woman who attended him constantly might be 
right, after all, and certainly there was no pros- 
pect of being able to arouse him sufficiently to 
recognize his niece. 

“Follow me, Elaine,” she commanded, with a 
trace of haughtiness due to the servant’s defiant 
attitude. 

At the foot of the stairs stood an old garden 
bench. Judith seated herself and waited until 
the old woman joined her. Then she said: 

“How long do you expect my uncle to live?” 

Elaine started to sit down beside her. 


88 


The Daring Twins 


“You may stand, if you please,’ ’ said Judith; 
and old Miss Halliday stood, although her eyes 
had a resentful look in them at thus being as- 
signed to her true station. In the old days she 
had been considered a privileged servant, it is 
true ; yet, even then, she would not have dared to 
seat herself in the presence of an Eliot. 

“I don’t know,” she returned. “He has been 
like this for three years. He may live a dozen 
more — if I can manage to keep his body and soul 
together. ’ ’ 

“What do you mean by that?” 

“Why, there isn’t much to eat here, if you 
want the truth; and so it ’s lucky Mr. Eliot 
does n’t require much food. The wine is the hard- 
est thing to get. It ’s mighty expensive; but he 
must have it, Dr. Jenkins says.” 

“Is the doctor attending him?” 

“Not now; we can’t pay the bills. But there ’s 
nothing a doctor can do more than I am doing my- 
self.” 

“What has become of my uncle’s money, 
Elaine?” she asked, regarding the woman atten- 
tively. 

Elaine flushed, but shook her head. 

“I don’t know,” she said. 

“He was never a spendthrift, nor a gambler,” 
continued Judith. “On the contrary, I knew him 


The Coming of Cousin Judith 89 

as a wealthy man who was so penurious that he 
guarded every expenditure with great care.” 

The woman made no reply. 

‘ 4 What do you suppose became of the money?” 
Judith pointedly inquired. “He sold off his 
property at fair prices. I ’m sure that he did n’t 
speculate. Then what has become of it?” 

4 ‘ I only know, ’ ’ said Elaine, ‘ ‘ that when he was 
took with this stroke there was n’t a dollar to be 
found anywhere. He was n’t a miser, for I ’ve 
ransacked every corner of this house. There 
was n’t anything in the bank, either, for I inquired 
there. I ’ve looked over all of his papers — with 
Judge Ferguson to help me — and Mr. Eliot had 
n’t any investments or stocks. His money was 
gone, somehow, and we don’t know where because 
he can’t tell.” 

Judith thought it over. It was a perplexing 
thing, indeed. 

“Why do you stay here?” she asked. “You 
are not obligated to devote your life to my bank- 
rupt uncle — a helpless invalid who does not ap- 
preciate your services.” 

Elaine hesitated, clasping her thin hands and 
looking down as if endeavoring to find proper 
words in which to express herself. 

“I ’m old, Miss Judith; too old to find work 
elsewhere. And I ’m as poor as Mr. Eliot is. All 


90 


The Daring Twins 


I can expect at my age is a home, and the work is 
very little, now that the Darings have most of the 
house. Besides, I ’ve been with the Eliot family 
so long— forty odd years — that my place seems 
here, now. I won’t say anything about duty, or 
my affection for my old master. He was a hard 
man with others, I know ; but I always understood 
him better than anyone else, and he liked me. 
When he was taken with paralysis, just after his 
daughter’s death, there was no one in the world 
to care for him but me. Even Wallace Daring 
had quarreled with Mr. Eliot and insulted him. 
Not a single neighbor offered any assistance, or 
came near my stricken master. So I stayed.” 

It was a fair explanation, Judith considered, 
and betokened more heart in the old woman than 
she had been credited with. 

“That reminds me, Elaine,” she said, turning 
the subject abruptly; “I am going to live with the 
Darings hereafter, and take care of Cousin 
Molly’s children. I must have one of those va- 
cant rooms off the hall which you have reserved. ’ ’ 

A look of anger and fear swept over old 
Elaine’s face. 

“It won’t do, Miss Judith,” she said positively; 
“it won’t do at all. I can’t have Mr. Eliot dis- 
turbed. I allowed the Darings to live here if 
they ’d promise to keep quiet, but — ” 


The Coming of Cousin Judith 91 

i( You allowed !” interrupted Judith, mean- 
ingly. “Is n’t that rather impertinent, Elaine ?” 

i ‘ There ’s no one to run your uncle’s affairs, 
but me, ’ 9 she retorted, unabashed. 4 ‘ I ’ve got to 
protect him in his helpless condition, and I ’m go- 
ing to do it, too ! ’ 9 

1 ‘ This is nonsense,” returned Judith impa- 
tiently. “Nothing that occurs in that part of the 
house can disturb Uncle Eliot, as you very well 
know. I shall occupy one of those rooms.” 

“I forbid it,” said the woman, her eyes cold 
and hard, her jaws set and determined. 

“Has it ever occurred to you,” suggested 
Judith quietly, “that there is such a thing as law, 
and that the law will take the conduct of my 
uncle’s affairs out of your hands, if I appeal to 
it? If you really wish a home in your old age, 
Elaine, you must give up your autocratic ideas. 
The Darings are the natural inheritors of this 
homestead, and you have no personal rights here 
except as a servant.” 

“I ’m entitled to my wages, then,” snapped 
Elaine. “They have n’t been paid for years.” 

Judith regarded her thoughtfully. In spite of 
the peculiar temperament of this poor creature 
she was doubtless of inestimable worth to Mr. 
Eliot at this juncture. No one else could or 
would care for the helpless invalid, half so well. 


92 


The Daring Twins 


And there was little to advance against that argu- 
ment of unpaid wages. Perhaps, after all, it 
might be better to compromise with Elaine Hal- 
liday. 

“I am willing to admit your responsible posi- 
tion here,” she said, “provided you do not at- 
tempt to dictate too far. Live your life in your 
own way, but do not attempt to interfere with us. 
I am now going to establish myself in one of those 
hall rooms. ’ ’ 

She rose. 

“Take the west room, then,” suggested Elaine, 
eagerly. “It ’s bigger, and the east room is clut- 
tered with old furniture. ’ ’ 

Judith walked away without reply, content with 
her victory but filled with many perplexing 
thoughts. The interview had somewhat aston- 
ished her. 

Elaine watched her go, and when Judith had 
turned the corner of the house the old woman 
stamped her foot furiously. 

“Drat the law!” she muttered. “Ferguson 
swore he ’d turn me out if I did n’t let the Dar- 
ings in, and now this girl threatens the law if I 
won’t let her have that room. Law! What mis- 
chief-makers invented the law, I ’d like to know — 
to rob a poor woman and beat her out of her just 
dues ? But there ’s two kinds of law in this world 


The Coming of Cousin Judith 93 

—the laws others make, and the laws we make, 
ourselves. I guess the law of Elaine Halliday 
will win out in the long run, because my law ’s 
my secret, and they Ve only got their own to go 
by.” 

With this somewhat ambiguous tirade she 
turned and slowly mounted the stairs. Gran ’pa 
Eliot sat exactly as he had before, staring va- 
cantly through the window. 


CHAPTER VIII 


THE ** ARTICLES OF ADOPTION” 

Judith Eliot had been accustomed to act upon 
her judgment; and to act quickly, and with de- 
cision. Aunt Hyacinth was half frightened when 
the young lady returned and said that Elaine had 
attempted to bar her out of the vacant rooms, 
but she was going to occupy one of them, never- 
theless. The black mammy was a Daring ser- 
vant, having followed her nursling Wallace when 
he married and set up housekeeping at Riverdale. 
She had nursed, in turn, each of the Daring chil- 
dren and, therefore, was devoted to them and their 
interests. But Auntie could never understand the 
favored servant of the Eliots, and through all the 
years she had known Elaine had seldom ex- 
changed a word with the white woman. Why a 
housekeeper should be called ‘ 1 Miss” Halliday 
and allowed to assume airs of superiority was far 
beyond old Hyacinth’s comprehension. But the 
fact impressed her with a sense of awe of Elaine 
which time had never dissipated. 

Since the Darings had come to this house to live 
94 


The “Articles of Adoption” 


95 


the two serving women had held aloof from one 
another as before, and the aggressive, dominant 
attitude of Miss Halliday held Auntie in sure sub- 
jection to her will. She never doubted that Elaine 
had the power to turn her precious flock out in 
the cold world, if she chose, and therefore took 
great care not to annoy her in any way. 

It was not clear to her, at this juncture, whether 
she ought to applaud or deplore Miss Judith’s de- 
fiance of the hitherto supreme power of “ol’ Miss 
Hall’day,” but she willingly followed the ener- 
getic young lady up the spiral staircase to show 
her the vacant rooms. 

The east room was sunny and bright, but poorly 
furnished. In one corner stood several decrepit 
and damaged chairs, a few old pictures and some 
bundles of matting. A door, closed and locked, 
communicated with the room back of it — the room 
Miss Halliday herself occupied. Aunt Hyacinth, 
in a whisper, called Judith’s attention to this 
door. 

Perhaps that accounted for the desire of the 
old woman that Miss Eliot take the west room, 
which was not nearly so pleasantly situated; but 
the young lady promptly decided that the east 
room suited her best. She was accustomed to do- 
ing things for herself, and with Auntie’s help 
dragged the cast-off chairs and other lumber into 


96 


The Daring Twins 


the west room and made a selection of the best 
furniture from the two. 

Also, she robbed the stately parlor downstairs 
of a comfortable rocker and the hall of a small 
stand. When the east room had been swept, 
dusted and cleaned, it appeared to be quite liv- 
able, although Aunt Hy shook her head gravely 
and declared that it was not nearly as good as the 
front rooms. In fact, she confided to Judith that 
the east room “was n’t fit fo’ ’spectible com- 
ply.” 

“When Phil and Don come home to lunch,” said 
Judith, “I ’ll get them to help me up with the 
trunks and bags, and then I ’ll unpack and settle.” 

At noontime, however, when the children came 
home from school, Phoebe vetoed the entire care- 
fully planned arrangement. Cousin Judith must 
n’t be tucked into that cheerless east room on any 
account, but should have Phoebe’s own pretty 
room at the front, with its balcony overlooking 
the village and the river. 

“I ’m seldom in my room,” said the girl, 
“while you, Cousin Judith, will often shut your- 
self up to paint or write. So, I ’ll move into the 
east room in a jiffy, and rid up the front room so 
you can take possession.” 

Miss Eliot protested against this change, but 
Phoebe had a will of her own and moreover, was 


The “Articles of Adoption” 


97 


right in her argument. Everyone energetically 
assisted in transferring Phoebe’s “ traps” across 
the hall, and before school time arrived Cousin 
Judith’s baggage had all been carried to the big 
front room and deposited there. 

That afternoon Phoebe ‘ ‘ settled ’ ’ her new quar- 
ters in five minutes’ time, for she was not very 
particular about appearances and had the true 
Southern disposition to leave any article where- 
ever it happened to be. Order was not one of her 
characteristics, but Phoebe always claimed she 
could find anything she wanted, just as quickly 
as those who put them properly away. 

Cousin Judith, although an artist, had an in- 
herent aversion to disorder. She wanted her sur- 
roundings to look pretty at all times, and a taste- 
ful arrangement of her possessions meant a place 
for everything and everything in its place. Phoebe 
was astonished when she came home that after- 
noon at the transformation effected in her old 
room. A hundred pretty knickknacks and ar- 
ticles of virtu, brought from foreign parts, had 
been arranged most effectively. Some choice 
prints from Paris and Dresden were on the walls ; 
a small bust of Psyche in pure Carrara stood on 
the mantel. Judith’s well-worn easel was in- 
scribed on every inch of its wooden surface with 
autographs of more or less famous artists and 
litterateurs who had visited her studio. 


98 


The Daring Twins 


With all this the place looked as cosy and home- 
like as it was attractive, and thereafter the great- 
est joy of a Daring, big or little, was to pass an 
hour in Cousin Judith’s room. 

Phoebe’s sleep in the east hall room was as 
sound and peaceful that night, as it had been be- 
fore she moved from her more commodious quar- 
ters. She glanced more than once at the connect- 
ing door, as she undressed, but no sound came 
from old Miss Halliday’s room on the other side. 
There was a transom over the door, but probably 
the glass had long since been broken or removed, 
for a thin board now covered it, tacked to the 
frame from Phoebe’s side. There was no ready 
communication to be had between the two sides of 
the house, and as far as Phoebe was concerned she 
was well pleased that this was so. 

That Saturday was a great day for the Darings. 

“We ’re going to have a good long talk to- 
gether,” announced Cousin Judith at breakfast. 
4 i Just as soon as I get my room in order and 
Phoebe makes your beds we will get together in 
the parlor and begin to get acquainted.” 

“Oh, not the parlor, please,” protested Don. 
“It ’s so gloomy there.” 

‘ 4 The pahlah will spoil all our fun, ’ ’ added Sue. 

“Then you must come to my own room,” de- 
cided Cousin Judith. 


The “Articles of Adoption” 99 

Becky went out on the porch while the prepara- 
tions were pending and saw the Randolph chil- 
dren, faultlessly attired, standing hand in hand 
just across the street. 

“ Hello, Becky !” shouted Allerton. “Come on 
over. ’ ’ 

Doris turned to him reprovingly. Then she 
raised her voice to Becky and said : 

“My brother wishes to invite you to join us.” 

“Can’t go you,” returned Becky, carelessly. 
“My Cousin Judith ’s come, an’ we ’re goin’ to 
have some chin music. ’ ’ 

“May I inquire what sort of an entertainment 
you refer to?” asked Doris, coming a little 
nearer. 

“You may,” said Becky, graciously. 

Doris waited, still holding her brother’s hand. 
To Becky it seemed absurd that such a big boy 
and girl should act so much like infants. So far, 
her acquaintance with the Randolphs had only 
interested her because she could “guy them” un- 
mercifully, without their discovering it. 

Allerton ’s patience was not equal to that of his 
demure sister. 

“Please tell us,” he pleaded. 

‘ 4 If you had a good chance, Al, you ’d soon blos- 
som into a boy — quite a decent boy,” remarked 
Becky, reflectively. “The trouble is, you ’ll 


100 


The Daring Twins 


never get a chance in that stuck-up crowd you 
train with. Why don’t you run away and be a 
man!” 

“I am scarcely old enough, I fear,” he sighed. 

‘ 4 Then be a bootblack, or a chimney sweep, or 
a robber, or — or — any thing!” 

“Oh, Rebecca!” wailed Doris, greatly shocked. 
“How sadly the lightness of your mind is re- 
flected in your words!” 

“By cracky, you ’ve got me going,” returned 
Becky, despondently. “What does it, Doris; re- 
ligion, or Boston kindergartens?” 

“You have not yet told us what ‘chin music’ 
means,” suggested Allerton, with much interest. 
“It is a new term to us.” 

“It means a confab, that ’s all.” 

“You must pardon our ignorance,” Doris ob- 
served, in her most proper manner. “Our vo- 
cabulary, you know, is limited to authorized 
words; yet with you the English language seems 
to have been amplified, and the grammatical con- 
struction of many sentences altered. Is it an 
idiom peculiar to this section of the country, or 
have you authority for the use of such unusual 
expressions?” 

Somehow, Becky felt distinctly abashed. She 
might laugh at the proper speech of Doris Ran- 
dolph and regard it in the light of a good joke; 


The “Articles of Adoption 99 101 

but, after all, she experienced a humiliating sense 
of her own crudeness and lack of refinement when- 
ever the new neighbors engaged her in conversa- 
tion. 

Of course she resented this feeling, which in- 
truded itself, unasked. The Darings were as good 
as the Randolphs, any day, she mentally declared, 
knowing all the time the thought was an admis- 
sion of inferiority. Becky had had careful train- 
ing once upon a time, and her dead mother’s in- 
junction never to forget her personal dignity, nor 
give to others an opportunity to disparage it, was 
not wholly forgotten by the girl. She well knew 
that she had cultivated the slang of the streets 
and their rabble because some of her village 
associates considered it amusing and had encour- 
aged her by their laughter. So, although the 
reproaches of the carefully trained Randolph chil- 
dren were only implied, through their complete 
ignorance of such phrases, the girl felt them 
nevertheless, and this made her bitter and more 
reckless than ever. 

Fortunately, Phoebe called to her just then and 
with a shout of “So long, bully Bostoners!” she 
ran in to attend the gathering in Cousin Judith’s 
room. 

Now it chanced that Miss Eliot had overheard, 
through her open window, the conversation ex- 


102 


The Daring Twins 


changed across the street by Becky and her neigh- 
bors, and her sweet face flushed painfully while 
she listened. That a daughter of gentle, refined 
Molly Eliot should exhibit coarseness and vul- 
garity amazed and annoyed her. More than once 
during the brief day since her arrival she had 
winced at the rude sallies of Becky and Don, and 
even little Sue had sometimes offended her sen- 
sitive ears. 

“There are many difficulties to be surmounted 
and plenty of hard work ahead of me, I fear,” 
she thought, with a sigh of regret. 4 ‘ But my duty 
to these waifs is plain, and I must pray for 
strength and wisdom to accomplish it.” 

Then she turned and showed a smiling face as 
the Darings trooped in, an eager group. Many 
were their exclamations of pleasure as they ex- 
amined Cousin Judith’s “pretty things,” and 
even Becky was so thoroughly delighted and 
turned her clear hazel eyes so adoringly upon her 
cousin that her recent rudeness was almost con- 
doned. 

Judith began with a relation of her own history, 
including many incidents of her life abroad and 
the hard struggle she had faced to win recogni- 
tion as an artist. Then she told them of the deep 
affection that had always existed between her 
and “Cousin Molly,” the mother of the absorbed 


The “Articles of Adoption” 


103 


audience. She had been deeply pained at Molly’s 
death, and when, three years later, Molly’s chil- 
dren lost their father — their only natural pro- 
tector — Judith had remembered that she was their 
nearest relative, next to Gran ’pa Eliot, and it 
seemed her duty to go to them and help them to 
face the world and become the noble men and 
women their dear mother so fondly wished them 
to be. 

The Darings were duly impressed and affected. 
Sue and Phoebe sobbed a little, and Phil wiped his 
eyes more than once. Donald was not so emo- 
tional but looked grave and thoughtful, while 
Becky’s face was white and set as she realized 
how little credit she had thus far reflected on the 
sweet, gentle mother who had been prematurely 
taken from them. 

“What I wish,” said Judith, wistfully, “is to 
become a second mother to dear Molly’s children; 
to do for them what I think Molly would have 
done, had she lived. But I cannot acquire such a 
proud position, my dears, without your full and 
free consent. You must talk this over among 
yourselves and decide if you are willing to adopt 
me. ’ ’ 

Phoebe wrapped her arms around the speaker 
and kissed her cheek, while tears trembled on her 
dark lashes. 


104 


The Daring Twins 


“Oh, Cousin Judith!” she said; “we ’re so 
happy, and so grateful!” 

Becky knelt at Judith’s feet and buried her 
head in her lap. Sue came like a dainty fairy to 
find a refuge in Judith’s embrace. 

“I ’d like another mamma — awful well!” she 
whispered; “and I could n’t find a lovelier one 
than you, Cousin Judith.” 

“You ’ve given up a good deal for us,” Phil 
remarked in a husky voice, “and I ’m afraid 
we ’re not worth it, at all. But the — the young- 
sters need some sort of a mother, Cousin, and 
Phoebe and I need some one to advise us and help 
us in our times of trouble and worry. So we — we 
have n’t the courage to refuse your generous 
offer.” 

“It won’t need a vote,” asserted Don, scowl- 
ing darkly to keep from crying. “You ’re elected 
unanimous, Little Mother; an’ that settles it.” 

Judith smiled and kissed them all in turn, big 
and little. Then she said, very seriously : 

“This alliance, my dears, means a good deal to 
all of us, and must not be undertaken lightly. We 
must have a fair and square agreement, on both 
sides, setting forth and defining what we have 
undertaken. ’ ’ 

They were very attentive, at this. 

* 1 First, ’ ’ she continued, ‘ 4 1 want to tell you that 


The “Articles of Adoption ” 105 

I am going to love each one of you, dearly, and I 
want you to promise you will try to love me in re- 
turn.” 

“Why, we do already!” exclaimed Sue, and 
Judith felt that she answered for all. 

“The duty of a mother,” she explained, “is 
not only to love her children, but to train them 
properly. She must correct their faults, direct 
their amusements, attend to their deportment, 
laugh when they are glad and grieve over their 
sorrows. And they, in turn, must he content to 
be guided by her larger experience in life and 
willing to obey her in everything.” 

“Of course,” said Becky, nodding. “We ’ll 
agree to all that, Cousin Judith.” 

4 4 1 long to have you grow up to be admired and 
respected by all you meet, as your father and 
mother were. Do you realize how proud a thing 
it is to be a Daring? You bear an honored name, 
my dears — a name that has always stood for no- 
bility, truth, generosity and culture. You must 
guard that name, jealously, so as not only to re- 
flect credit upon your parentage, but to win for 
yourselves the approval of the world.” 

The awed silence that greeted this speech was 
broken by Donald. Perhaps he was really more 
affected than any of the others ; I think his very 
soul was stirred by a desire to be a credit to his 


106 


The Daring Twins 


name and to himself. But he said bluntly and 
with a mischievous grin: 

“You girls need n’t worry. You ’ll change 
your names some day — if you ’re lucky!” 

It relieved the tense situation and they all 
laughed, including Judith. But she meant the 
lesson to be impressive and not easily forgotten, 
so she hailed a suggestion from Becky, which was 
perhaps intended to be as flippant as Donald’s 
remark. 

‘ ‘ Let ’s draw up an agreement, and all sign it, ’ ’ 
cried the girl. “Phoebe has a typewriter, and we 
won ’t need any lawyer. ’ ’ 

“A good idea,” said Miss Eliot. “Phoebe and 
I will go to her room and draw up the Articles of 
Adoption. ’ ’ 

This was done, and the others waited restlessly 
enough for a full hour for them to return, al- 
though Phil took occasion to point out how for- 
tunate they all were to secure a friend and pro- 
tector in this, their hour of greatest need. 

After all, the Articles of Adoption proved quite 
simple and brief, although they had taken so long 
to prepare. Most of the paper was devoted to 
Cousin Judith’s agreement to love and watch 
over the five Darings, to correct their errors, pro- 
mote their happiness and fill the place of a real 
mother to them, so far as she was able. The Dar- 


The “Articles of Adoption” 107 

ings, for their part, merely agreed to obey her as 
they would have done their natural parents. But 
at the last was a little clause that was destined to 
prove very important — more important than it 
then seemed. It stipulated that if any of the 
signers revolted from the letter or spirit of the 
agreement, or in other words broke the contract, 
the culprit should submit the case to any two of 
the others he or she might select ; and, if they de- 
cided the offender was wrong, then he or she must 
either accept proper punishment, or become di- 
vorced from these Articles of Adoption. 

The Darings signed the papers with enthusi- 
astic glee; Phoebe first, because she was five min- 
utes older than her twin; then Phil and Becky, 
and Don and Sue. Two copies had been made, 
one for Phoebe to keep and one for Cousin Judith ; 
and to make it appear more legal and binding, 
Aunt Hyacinth was called in as a witness and 
made an inky impression of her thumb on both 
documents by way of signature. 

By this time dinner was ready, for the Darings 
ate their heartiest meal in the middle of the day, 
in good Southern fashion. 

While they dined, Cousin Judith said she would 
devote the afternoon to long private talks with 
each of her adopted children. She wanted them 
to tell her all about themselves, their hopes and 


108 


The Daring Twins 


trials and longings, and then she would be able to 
help them, individually, to better advantage. 

Sue was closeted with the Little Mother first, 
because she was the youngest and most impatient. 
She emerged from Cousin Judith’s room bright- 
eyed and smiling, and then Don went in. One by 
one they had heart to heart talks with their newly 
adopted counsellor, the sessions of Phil and 
Phoebe being much the longest because they were 
older and had more to explain. When the con- 
ferences finally ended, Judith had gleaned much 
valuable information concerning the Daring 
household, and was prepared to assume her new 
duties with proper intelligence. 


CHAPTER IX 


PHCEBE HAS AN ADVENTURE 

Perhaps no one was so greatly relieved by the 
advent of Cousin Judith as Phoebe Daring. The 
girl had keenly felt her responsibilities during 
the troubled months since her father’s death, and 
her days and nights had been filled with anxieties. 
Now, however, she could cast all worry to the 
winds, for the new head of the household, albeit 
gentle of demeanor, low voiced and cheery, had 
nevertheless a reserve force and power of com- 
mand that inspired confidence, being in sharp 
contrast to Phoebe ’s own inexperience and lack of 
self reliance. 

Aunt Hyacinth also felt relief. She had not 
worried much, at any time; it was n’t her way. 
But Phoebe’s girlish responsibilities were as 
nothing compared to those of the black mammy 
whose tenderly reared brood seemed, in these ad- 
verse times, to have become neglected and for- 
saken by all the world. She hailed Miss Eliot’s 
coming with joy and unfeigned gratitude, and 
when she understood that “Miss Judy,” as she 
109 


110 


The Daring Twins 


called her in the old days, was to take charge of 
the household, she felt a great weight lifted from 
her brave old shoulders. 

“I knows dem chilPns ben runnin , wild, Miss 
Judy,” she said earnestly, 4 4 but I ain’t got de 
eddication, ner de arg ’mentation to keep ’em 
toein’ de chalk mark. It needs mo’ brains ner 
Aunt Hy’cinth ’s got.” 

One night, when Phoebe had been asleep for 
some time, she was roused by a peculiar sound in 
the next room — the room back of her own — occu- 
pied by old Miss Halliday. It was a faint but per- 
sistent sound, as of something sliding softly over 
a wooden surface, and now and then it was accom- 
panied by the crooning voice of the housekeeper. 
She did not speak, at these times, but droned a 
long, sighing “m-m-m-m-m” that denoted both 
ecstasy and intense excitement. The sounds were 
all subdued and stealthy, but in the dead of night 
they were clearly heard by the girl, who became 
half frightened, wondering if old Elaine had gone 
mad. 

While she lay in her bed listening, a sudden 
silence fell, followed by several gentle thumps 
which she could not explain. Then a chair was 
pushed back ; Miss Halliday pattered softly 
across the floor — and perfect silence ensued. 

Phoebe lay a long time afterward listening for 


Phcebe Has An Adventure 


111 


a recurrence of the mysterious sounds, but they 
did not mature and presently the girl fell asleep 
again. 

Next morning the recollection of the occurrence 
was rather dim in her mind. She remembered 
her midnight fears and considered them rather 
soberly while dressing; but afterward, when she 
saw Miss Halliday feeding her chickens and look- 
ing after the garden in her accustomed manner, 
alert, composed and engrossed in her work, Phcebe 
dismissed any idea of the old woman’s being in- 
sane and soon forgot all about the incident. 

This was commencement week, and Phil and 
Phcebe both graduated. The twins were not on a 
par as far as scholarship was concerned, for the 
girl barely passed her examinations. Phil was 
at the head of his class, as he had hoped to be, but 
he was obliged to share that honor with one other. 
Janet Ferguson had pressed him hard for first 
place all the term, and at last she stood equal to 
Phil in all classes. With manly generosity he was 
the first to congratulate her, for he liked Janet. 
She was a modest, quiet girl who had a smile and 
a pleasant word for everyone. 

Old Judge Ferguson was mightily pleased. He 
slapped Phil on the back and said approvingly: 
“If you can keep step with my Janet, Phil, you ’ve 
something to be proud of, I assure you.” 


112 


The Daring Twins 


Phil was proud, and so was Phoebe. She had 
not expected honors, herself, but that her twin 
should do so well was certainly a source of pride 
to her. She fairly reveled in her brother’s re- 
flected glory. 

Cousin Judith gave Phil a scarf pin from Paris 
and Phoebe an oriental bracelet of unique design. 
Nor did she forget the daughter of her old friend 
Judge Ferguson, for Janet received from her, as 
a graduation gift, a silver brooch brought from 
Venice. 

That evening was a joyous one in the Daring 
household. The younger children realized that a 
long vacation was ahead of them. Phoebe was now 
at liberty to begin life in earnest, and Phil was 
about to take his place in Spay the ’s Bank. Aunt 
Hy, well knowing this to be a festive occasion, 
prepared an elaborate supper, and afterward 
they all gathered in an end of the big parlor, 
which Judith’s deft hand had by this time ren- 
dered more cosy, and spent the evening listening 
to their Little Mother’s fascinating stories of 
Italian life. 

It was late when they retired for the night, and 
Phoebe was tired. She was soon in bed, but the 
day’s excitement was yet upon her and she could 
not readily compose herself to sleep. Thoughts 
of the future and her ambitious plans for it ob- 


Phoebe Has An Adventure 


113 


truded themselves persistently, and she was wide- 
eyed when the ormolu clock, in Cousin Judith’s 
room opposite, chimed the hour of midnight. 

Soon after her ear caught another sound — the 
gentle, stealthy sliding — sliding — sliding of some 
hard substance across a table-top. It came from 
Miss Halliday’s room, and was exactly the same 
sound she had heard several nights before. 

Presently the old woman began her droning 
again : 4 4 M-m-m-m-m ! ’ ’ — a croon of the most bea- 
tific joy and exaltation. She evidently desired 
to suppress the murmur, for fear of being over- 
heard, so that at first it barely reached Phoebe’s 
listening ears. But now and then her ecstasy led 
her to forget caution and raise the croon to a 
higher key. 

It was all so uncanny, so strange and inexpli- 
cable, that the girl was more startled than she had 
been before. Yet she did not feel so alarmed, this 
time, as she was curious. 

Softly throwing back the coverlet she tiptoed 
to the connecting door and crouched down to look 
through the keyhole. Only blackness rewarded 
the attempt. Then she placed her ear to the 
panel, but found she could not hear much more 
distinctly than when lying in bed. Shivering a 
little in the night air Phoebe was about to retreat 
when suddenly the thumps began, and between 
them Elaine spoke. 


114 


The Daring Twins 


i ‘ Mine ! ’ ’ she said, muttered low but quite dis- 
tinct. Then came a thump. “Mine!” she re- 
peated. Another thump. “Mine!” she said, 
again; and so the word and the thump followed 
each other several times. Afterward, a brief si- 
lence and shuffle of the woman’s feet across the 
room. Then, as before, all sounds ceased. 

Phoebe went back to bed thoughtful and per- 
plexed. Surely there was some mystery about 
this queer performance. She remembered how 
unwilling Miss Halliday had been to have any of 
the Darings occupy the hall bedrooms, and it 
seemed there must be some connection between 
this reluctance and the strange sounds she had 
twice heard. 

For some indefinite reason which she could not 
have explained Phoebe said nothing about these 
experiences, either to the Little Mother or to her 
brothers or sisters. The girl was inclined, at 
times, to dream wonderful daydreams when those 
about her thought her absorbed in humble occu- 
pations. Looking upon the world witli clear, calm 
eyes, Phoebe found it essentially practical and 
commonplace, and accepted it as she found it, 
striving to do her duty at all times. But the 
fascinating dreams would not be denied, and one 
of her secret pleasures was to allow them full 
play in her mind when her hands were engaged in 


Phoebe Has An Adventure 115 

some unimportant matter. She never confided 
them even to her beloved twin ; they were sacred 
to herself alone, and any exposure of them would 
have shamed her terribly. 

They were healthy dreams, if inherently ro- 
mantic and unreal. There was nothing morbid 
about Phoebe, although it must be admitted she 
had some queer characteristics that might be 
called faults. Cousin Judith thought she was 
more like her mother than any of the other chil- 
dren, yet her shrewd eyes marked the girPs fre- 
quent abstraction and knew her thoughts were 
often far away from her material surroundings. 

Phoebe scented a mystery. That old Miss Halli- 
day possessed some secret which she dreaded to 
have revealed was quite evident to her, judging 
from what she had overheard. It would be dif- 
ficult to explain to others, those peculiar sounds. 
Perhaps, she would be laughed at if she attempted 
it She resolved, therefore, to keep her own coun- 
sel and watch Elaine carefully. If she discovered 
the secret it would then be time enough to make it 
known; meantime, she could enjoy the suggestion 
of a mystery without interference. * 

Practical, everyday life is apt to dispel vision- 
ary dreams. Phoebe leaned from her window the 
next morning and watched Cousin Judith bar- 
gaining with Miss Halliday for a dozen of fresh 
eggs. 


116 


The Daring Twins 


‘ ‘ The Randolphs, across the road, pay me 
twenty cents a dozen, ’ ’ said Elaine, gruffly. “You 
can buy eggs from the grocer for eighteen. 
There ’s no need to waste your money on me.” 

“Do the Randolphs take all you have?” asked 
Judith. 

“Yes; and cry for more.” 

‘ ‘ Then I will not urge you, ’ ’ replied Miss Eliot, 
“although I would be willing to pay you twenty 
cents, myself. I know your eggs are quite fresh, 
which is not always the case with those obtained 
from the grocer.” 

“I don’t want your money,” observed the 
woman, in a disagreeable tone. “I won’t touch 
your money. Mr. Eliot allows you house room out 
of charity, but he desires no communication, of 
any sort, between the two families.” 

“How do you know that?” inquired Judith, 
looking at the old servant, steadily. 

“He has told me so.” 

“You know very well that he is incapable of 
speech.” 

“Do I? That shows your ignorance, Judith 
Eliot. Your uncle can speak when he wants to, 
and speak to some purpose. His mind is n’t para- 
lyzed, I assure you, and he is competent to direct 
his own affairs. ” 

“I cannot believe it,” persisted Judith. 


Phoebe Has An Adventure 117 

The woman looked at her defiantly. 

‘ 4 Call in the law, if you want to,” she said; 
“I ’d be glad to have you do it. Mr. Eliot can 
prove his mental condition in court, and his right 
to manage his own property. But if you put him 
to that trouble he ’ll turn out the whole tribe of 
you, as sure as my name ’s Elaine Halliday!” 

Judith turned away without further remark. 
The shrewdness of the woman astonished and per- 
plexed her. Possibly old Elaine was right, and 
could, if she chose, induce Uncle Eliot to speak. 
Otherwise she would scarcely have dared to thus 
defy all interference with her autocratic whims. 
It was also possible that the paralytic old man 
was so completely under Elaine’s influence that 
he would readily follow her suggestions. 

Jonathan Eliot had always been a hard, stub- 
born man, even to his sweet, beautiful daughter 
Molly. As Judith remembered him, sitting stol- 
idly in his chair that morning when she had forced 
herself upon his presence, he appeared a living 
mummy, lost to all recognition of his surround- 
ings. Yet, if Elaine could arouse him at will, and 
his mind retained its natural poise, there was 
really danger that he might turn the Darings out 
of their refuge. Judith would not employ the 
law; she dared not; but she resolved to consult 
Judge Ferguson. 


118 


The Daring Twins 


Acting upon this determination she at once put 
on her hat and started for the lawyer’s office. 

Phoebe, seeing Miss Halliday busy in the hen- 
house, left her window and turned to examine the 
mysterious connecting door between her room and 
that of the housekeeper. In broad daylight it 
did not appear especially interesting. It was a 
heavy, old-fashioned door with a big keyhole in 
the lock. But when Phoebe stooped down she dis- 
covered a thick cloth had been placed on the op- 
posite side, which effectually prevented her from 
examining the next room. She pushed a long hat- 
pin through the hole but failed to dislodge the 
cloth. 

Next, she turned her attention to the transom 
above the door. It had once been made to swing 
open, but was now tightly nailed shut. Over the 
glass had been nailed a thin board, which fully 
covered it; but it was nailed to Phoebe’s side of 
the transom and the girl at once decided that here 
might be a way to discover what those mysterious 
midnight sounds meant. 

She went into Phil’s room and searched in his 
tool chest for some instrument with which to re- 
move the board from the transom. Just then 
Cousin Judith passed out of the front gate on her 
way down town, and Phoebe was all alone in the 
upper part of the house — except, of course, 
gran ’pa, who could not interfere. 


Phoebe Has An Adventure 


119 


She selected a chisel and a hammer, and re- 
turned to her room. She drew her stand before 
the door and by means of a chair mounted to its 
top. From this elevation her head almost reached 
the ceiling, and she was able to work comfortably. 
Quickly prying the nails from the board with the 
chisel, Phoebe removed it and found a pane of 
clear glass behind. It was dingy with dust; but 
by rubbing clear one corner she found herself 
looking into Elaine’s room. 

It was much like her own room, yet even more 
poorly furnished. A big, broad oaken table stood 
in the center — a heavily constructed affair that 
seemed out of place in a bedchamber. It was bare 
of even a cloth. A small dresser stood at one side ; 
a bed was in the opposite corner; two stiff chairs 
and a rag carpet completed the furniture of the 
room, which denoted extreme neatness and clean- 
liness. Really, there was nothing here pertaining 
to the mysterious or unusual. 

But Phoebe was not satisfied. Those sliding 
sounds, the old woman’s ecstatic murmurings, 
must be explained. After a moment’s thought, 
the girl climbed down from the table and with the 
chisel managed to cut a square corner out of the 
thin board. Then she replaced it as it had been 
before, putting one nail loosely into the corner 
she had removed, so that while the board over the 


120 


The Daring Twins 


transom appeared to be intact and undisturbed 
she could easily slide the corner from its place 
and so obtain a 4 ‘ peephole.” 

Observing her work critically from the floor she 
decided no one would ever notice that the board 
had been tampered with. So she returned the 
tools to PhiPs chest, rearranged her room, and 
with the complacent idea that she had accom- 
plished a clever feat awaited the moment when 
she might make an important discovery. 


CHAPTER X 


A DEPRESSING INTERVIEW 

Judith found Mr. Ferguson alone in his office. 
With an air of much pride she produced the 
Articles of Adoption and asked him to read the 
document. 

4 4 Don’t pick flaws in its legality, please,” she 
said with twinkling eyes. 

The lawyer read the agreement through very 
soberly. Then he reached out both his hands and 
took those of Judith in their firm clasp. 

4 4 My dear, you are a noble woman,” he said. 
“I am almost as grateful to you as if the Darings 
were my own children. They need a mother, 
Judith, and the poor things could n’t have fallen 
into greater luck than being adopted by you. ’ ’ 

She was a little embarrassed by this praise. 

“Tell me what you know about Uncle Jona- 
than,” she asked, to change the subject. 

He gave her an amused glance from beneath 
his bushy eyebrows. 

“Of course the old man would interest you,” he 
121 


122 


The Daring Twins 


replied. “Curious situation, is n’t it, Judith? 
Have you seen him?” 

“Yes; for a moment.” 

“It ’s a wonder his grim guardian allowed it.” 

“I forced myself into his room, in spite of 
Elaine.” 

“Did you? And found your uncle deaf, dumb 
and blind, I suppose. ’ ’ 

“ Yes, ” she returned. “ Is he always like that ? 9 9 

“Always. Unless Elaine Halliday chooses to 
waken him. Then he comes to life.” 

“I did not believe it possible!” 

“Nor I,” agreed the lawyer, “until I had ex- 
perience with the fact. You Ve no idea, Judith, 
what a time I had to obtain a refuge for the Dar- 
ings in that household. Elaine stubbornly re- 
fused to admit them, claiming that Mr. Eliot was 
oblivious to all the world and she had received 
positive instructions never to permit a Daring to 
enter the house while he lived. I told her frankly 
that in such a case it was my duty to apply to the 
law and have a legal guardian appointed to look 
after her master and his property. This threat 
alone prevailed upon her. She decided to grant 
me an interview, and in some way I cannot under- 
stand, she whispered into the old man’s ear until 
he quickened to life far enough to speak. The 
words were not very distinct and were slowly 


A Depressing Interview 


123 


muttered, for his tongue is partially paralyzed; 
but I found his intellect was as keen as ever. I 
explained the unhappy situation of his grand- 
children and asked him to help them. He told me 
he had n’t a penny to give them, that his money 
was gone and his fortunes practically ruined.’ ’ 

“Do you believe that?” asked Judith. 

“Yes; I think it is true, my dear. I told him 
that I did not ask for money for the Darings; I 
only demanded a shelter for them in his big, un- 
occupied house ; and, although Elaine tried to in- 
duce him not to consent, the old fellow silenced 
her and told me the Darings might occupy all the 
house, except the four rooms reserved for his own 
use and that of his servant. So I won the battle, 
after all.” 

Judith considered this thoughtfully. 

“What became of his money?” she asked. 

“Years ago,” replied Mr. Ferguson, slowly, “I 
was employed as Jonathan Eliot’s trusted ad- 
visor. That was when he owned a large estate and 
commanded ample means. He was not a generous 
man, in those days, but grudged every necessary 
expenditure his family made. After his wife’s 
death and Molly’s marriage, he came to me one 
day and said that all his money had been swept 
away in an unlucky speculation, and he would no 
longer be able to employ me. He refused to an- 


124 


The Daring Twins 


swer any questions as to the manner of his loss. 
Mr. Spaythe told me, about that time, that Mr. 
Eliot had drawn all his money from the bank, 
taking it in gold coin. Your uncle discharged all 
the servants except Elaine, shut up most of the 
house, and offered his estate for sale. He lived 
quite frugally, I learned, and was doubtless very 
poor. Bit by bit he sold off the lands, until only 
the house and its garden remained. There is no 
mortgage on the place, however. Wallace Daring 
offered to assist his father-in-law, but Eliot irri- 
tably refused. They quarrelled soon afterward, 
as you perhaps know.” 

“But I don’t quite understand,” said Judith. 
“Even if he lost all his ready money, the land 
must have brought a large sum. What became 
of that!” 

“It squared his debts, I suppose. The old man 
confided his affairs to no one. He was suspicious 
of even his own daughter. Then suddenly he be- 
came paralyzed, and I went to see if I could be of 
any help to my old client. Elaine told me she 
had searched everywhere, without finding a dol- 
lar. Until then I had harbored the thought that 
your uncle had become a miser, for his nature in- 
clined that way; so I examined the house myself, 
looking high and low in every possible place for 
any secreted cash or securities, or even for papers 


A Depressing Interview 


125 


that would explain what had become of his money, 
or account for his impoverished condition. But 
there was nothing of the sort to be discovered. 
I am thoroughly satisfied that Jonathan Eliot is 
as poor as he claims to be.” 

Judith sighed. 

“The house and lot must be worth consider- 
able,” she said, hesitatingly. 

“It might bring a fair price if offered for sale,” 
said he, 4 4 but it would not be advisable to dispose 
of the place until the Darings grow to maturity. 
Before that time arrives it is probable old Jona- 
than Eliot will have passed away and be laid in 
that ridiculous big white mausoleum he once con- 
structed. Then his grandchildren will inherit the 
property. While he lives, moreover, we could not 
sell the place if we desired to, unless we managed 
to prove Mr. Eliot mentally deficient.” 

“Is n’t he?” 

“No; not in the eye of the law. Elaine can 
arouse him whenever she pleases. Indeed, we 
must consider it fortunate, Judith, that this 
strange woman is content to care for him. I am 
sure she makes him as comfortable as is possible.” 

“That is true,” admitted the girl. 

“By the way,” said the lawyer, “how are you 
going to manage about money?” 

“I have, as you know, an income of fifty dollars 


126 


The Daring Twins 


a month, ” she replied. “With this, added to 
what Phil earns, we shall be rich. I have also 
saved, from the sales of my pictures, about two 
hundred dollars, a part of which I am going to 
expend at once for new clothing for the children. 
The poor things need it badly, for Sue, Donald 
and Becky are growing rapidly and have scarcely 
a decent garment to put on.’ ’ 

“You ’re a fairy godmother, Judith,” he ob- 
served, regarding her with evident approval. 4 4 1 
feel easier about the Darings now; but there ’s a 
fight ahead, my dear, for all of you. Don’t fail 
to come to me if you need advice or assistance, 
for I ’m the legal guardian of the young brood, 
remember, and I ’m willing to do my duty by 
them. ’ ’ 

Judith went away feeling much depressed in 
spirit. The lawyer’s explanation had been so 
clear that it destroyed all her suspicions of both 
Elaine and her paralyzed uncle. The matter 
proved to be very simple, after all, and contained 
no element of mystery. 


CHAPTER XI 


GETTING KEGULATED 

Monday morning Phil went to work at the bank. 
As Riverdale was a small town, Spay the ’s Bank 
might be expected to be a small institution, but 
it was more important than the size of the town 
really warranted. The beet sugar factory drew 
many farmers to Riverdale, who deposited the 
money received for their beets with Mr. Spay the. 
The factory itself had large deposits in the bank 
and the town merchants did a thriving business. 
Aside from this there were many prosperous 
plantations and wealthy country gentlemen in the 
neighborhood, all of which contributed to the im- 
portance and prosperity of Spaythe’s Bank. 

Three assistants, or clerks, were employed, and 
Mr. Spay the directed them in person. The cash- 
ier and paying teller was an elderly, quiet man 
named Boothe. Eric Spaythe told Phil that 
Boothe was a mere machine, and had not a single 
thought or idea beyond his duties at the bank. 
Ned Thurber had held the position of head book- 
keeper, but on his withdrawal Eric was promoted 
127 


128 The Daring Twins 

to that important position and Phil became his 
assistant. 

Eric was Mr. Spaythe ’s only child and it was 
the banker’s earnest hope that the boy would, one 
day, succeed him. As is often the case, however, 
father and son were totally unlike in disposition 
and character, and those who knew them best were 
disposed to doubt Eric’s ability to step into his 
father’s shoes. He was a jolly, pleasure loving 
young fellow, now in his twentieth year, and Phil 
liked him and had always found him to be a con- 
genial companion. Short and stout, with a round 
pink face and merry blue eyes, Eric Spaythe was 
a general favorite at Riverdale, especially with 
the women and girls. His one defect seemed to 
be that he was wholly irresponsible, and never 
serious. At school he had proved a bad scholar, 
although the boy was bright enough in other ways, 
and two years ago his father had taken him from 
High and placed him in the bank to learn the 
business. 

The most important point of difference between 
Eric and his father was that the young man was 
a natural spendthrift, whereas Mr. Spaythe had 
always been frugal with his money. We may well 
suppose that this characteristic of Eric was a 
thorn in the banker’s flesh; but he realized that 
the boy was young and so did not despair of being 


Getting Regulated 


129 


able to instill in him a knowledge of the import- 
ance of husbanding his means. For this reason he 
allowed Eric a very small salary, and wondered 
how the boy could purchase so many fine clothes 
and articles of fashionable attire with so little 
money. The tradesmen knew, of course, but con- 
sidered the banker’s son well entitled to credit. 

Phil was accorded a kindly reception at the 
bank. Mr. Boothe turned his expressionless eyes 
full upon the new clerk and shook his hand auto- 
matically. Eric was delighted to have his old 
friend associated with him, and elated, as well, 
by his own promotion to be head bookkeeper. Mr. 
Spaythe, keenly interested in the important 
changes in his force of employees, left his private 
office to overlook the counting room and satisfy 
himself that the boys understood their duties. 
Eric protested that he was quite competent to fill 
Ned Thurber’s place, having been his assistant 
for the past two years; and, indeed, the banker’s 
son seemed adequately able in business ways, if 
he could be induced to keep his mind on his work. 
After inspecting his entries now and then Mr. 
Spaythe seemed satisfied with his son ’s ability and 
turned his attention to Phil, who really needed a 
guiding hand. His extra course in bookkeeping 
at the high school now stood him in good stead, 
and he was intelligent enough to quickly grasp his 
instructions. 


130 


The Daring Twins 


i ‘ If at any time you are in doubt, Eric will post 
you,” said the banker; but for several days he 
made it a point to frequently examine the ledgers 
and assure himself that the work was progressing 
satisfactorily. Afterward, so well did both Eric 
and Phil accomplish their tasks, that Mr. Spay the 
left them much to their own devices and kept him- 
self shut up in his private office, as formerly. 

The mechanical cashier was not an especially 
companionable man. Mr. Boothe began each day 
with a “good morning” to his fellow employees 
and ended it with a brief “good night.” During 
the day he said nothing, unless required to an- 
swer the questions of the bank’s customers. His 
accounts were always absolutely accurate, and Mr. 
Spay the knew he was justified in relying implicitly 
upon his cashier to do his duty. 

That was a happy Saturday afternoon for Phil 
when he brought home his first week ’s wages and 
deposited the new ten dollar gold-piece in Cousin 
Judith’s hand. 

“That will help some, won’t it?” he inquired, 
anxiously. 

“It will help a great deal,” was the reply. 

About this time Marion Eandolph came home 
from college for the long vacation. She was the 
eldest daughter of the house, and about the same 
age as Phil and Phoebe. Judith, looking from her 


Getting Regulated 


131 


window, saw Marion on the lawn the morning 
after her arrival and noted her slender, angular 
form, her delicate, refined face and well-bred poise. 
She at once decided Marion would be a valuable 
acquaintance for Phcebe, and decided to bring the 
two girls together. 

“Let us call on the Randolphs this afternoon,” 
she suggested to Phcebe. “Since they are recent 
arrivals at Riverdale it is really our duty to call 
upon them formally. They are likely to prove 
pleasant acquaintances. ’ ’ 

“I ’ve really nothing fit to wear, Cousin 
Judith,” replied the girl. 

The Little Mother examined Phcebe ’s wardrobe 
and selected a simple, white gown. It needed 
mending in places, but Judith caught up the rents 
with her deft needle and added some pretty rib- 
bons of her own to the costume. A season of 
dressmaking had already begun in the house, but 
Sue and Becky were most in need of respectable 
raiment, and so Phcebe ’s turn had not yet arrived. 

When, late in the afternoon, Miss Eliot and 
Phoebe Daring set out to make their call, there 
was nothing that the most critical could find fault 
with in their personal appearance. Phoebe had 
the reputation of being “the prettiest girl in 
Riverdale,” and seemed justly entitled to it that 
day, while Cousin Judith’s sweet face was sure 
to win approval anywhere. 


132 


The Daring Twins 


Mrs. Randolph and her daughter Marion re- 
ceived their neighbors very graciously. The for- 
mer was a languid, weary looking woman who had 
secluded herself in this little village in order to 
escape the demands of society and organized 
charities, which had nearly reduced her to a state 
of nervous prostration. Marion was an intelli- 
gent, active girl, with none of her younger sister’s 
assumption of airs and graces. She seemed to 
Phoebe to be perfectly frank and natural in her 
ways, possessing ideas that were healthy, broad 
and progressive. During the interview, Marion 
developed a liking for Phoebe that pleased Miss 
Eliot greatly. 

4 1 Come and see me,” said Phoebe, shyly, when 
about to depart. “We are such near neighbors 
that you can run in at any time . 9 9 

“I will, indeed,” was the ready promise, and 
Marion kept it faithfully. 

Thereafter, there was seldom a day when the 
two girls were not together. Marion came most 
frequently to see Phoebe, for there was a certain 
air of conventional stiffness about the great house 
that both the girls felt and objected to. Some- 
times, Doris came with her sister, and was turned 
over to the tender mercies of mischievous Becky, 
who teased her visitor in a shameful manner. 
Usually Doris was all unaware that she was being 


Getting Regulated 


133 


ridiculed for her primness and stilted expressions, 
but Cousin Judith was quick to comprehend the 
situation and took Becky to task for her impolite- 
ness. With all her graceless ways the child was 
warm-hearted and easily influenced, for good as 
well as for evil, and she promised the Little 
Mother to treat Doris nicely and avoid offending 
her ears by using slangy expressions. Becky in- 
tended to keep her word thus given, but at times 
lapsed irrepressibly into the old ways, so that she 
was a source of constant anxiety to Judith. 

Since Phoebe had chosen to make a friend of 
Marion, her twin was bound to follow her lead. 
Phil found the college girl a delightful comrade. 
He did not care much for girls, as a rule, excepting 
of course his own sisters, but Marion proved as 
frank and as keenly intelligent as any boy. She 
knew all about modern athletics, although too frail 
of physique to indulge in such sports herself. 
Likewise she had a fairly practical knowledge of 
business methods, politics, public institutions and 
reform movements, and talked well and interest- 
ingly upon all subjects of the day. Aspiring to 
become a poet, she read bits of original verse to 
her new friends which they considered so remark- 
able that it was a marvel to them she was not 
already famous. 

4 ‘There is only one thing lacking about Marion,” 


134 


The Daring Twins 


Phil confided to his twin; “she lacks any sense 
of humor. Seems to me she can ’t appreciate any- 
thing funny, at all. The only things she laughs 
at are the mistakes of other people. Is n’t it 
queer, when she ’s so bright in all other ways?” 

“I think,” returned Phoebe, musingly, “that is 
a characteristic of all the Randolphs. Doris and 
Allerton are the same way, and I Ve wondered if 
Mrs. Randolph w^as ever in her life amused 
enough to laugh aloud. ’ ’ 

“Marion is good company, though,” added Phil, 
‘ ‘ and I like her. ’ ’ 

“She ’s splendid!” agreed Phoebe; “and her 
poetry reminds me so much of Mrs. Browning.” 

“Me too,” he said, laughing. “I never can 
understand a word of it. ’ 9 

Others called on Marion and she soon became 
a popular favorite in the village. Especially, was 
she attracted to Janet Ferguson, and as Janet 
was a warm friend of the Darings, this made it 
pleasant for all the young people. When the 
famous lawn party was given at the Randolph 
residence the occasion was one long remembered, 
for no such elaborate entertainment was ever be- 
fore known in Riverdale. 

The festivity was designed to celebrate Marion’s 
birthday, as well as to introduce her socially to 
the young folks of the town. 


Getting Regulated 


135 


“Of course it cannot be very exclusive,’ ’ ob- 
served ber mother, when the invitation list was 
being prepared; “otherwise you would have but 
a mere handful.” 

“I do not wish to be exclusive here,” returned 
Marion, gravely. “My desire is to study char- 
acter and human nature, to assist me in my liter- 
ary work. One cannot write of humanity without 
knowing something of the rank and file, you see ; 
and there are many respectable, if humble, fami- 
lies in Riverdale.” 

Mrs. Randolph scanned the list critically. 

“Is it possible that you intend to ask the entire 
family of Darings?” she inquired. 

“Yes, dear. I am inviting Rebecca and Donald 
for Doris and Allerton, you see, and I cannot well 
leave out that little fairy elf, Sue. So they must 
all come.” 

“Do you know, Marion, those Darings — the 
younger ones, I refer to — are very ill-bred chil- 
dren ? ’ ’ 

“Their manners are not strictly conventional, 
I believe.” 

“And their language is that of the slums.” 

“But they have had no mother to guide them, 
poor things,” explained Marion. “At times they 
are very winning and companionable, and I am 
sure they will behave nicely at my lawn fete.” 


136 


The Daring Twin , 


4 4 Very well, dear,” sighed the lady; 4 4 invite 
them if you wish to. This was once their home, 
you remember. After all, it would not be quite 
right to exclude the Darings from your little 
affair.” 

It may have seemed a 4 4 little affair” in the eyes 
of the blase society woman, but it was not so to 
the people of Riverdale, by any means. A brass 
band of fifteen pieces came from the city by the 
noon train, and their uniforms were so gorgeous 
as to create tremendous excitement. Tents had 
been erected upon tbe lawn and a force of extra 
servants employed to prepare and serve the re- 
freshments. The ample grounds were crossed in 
every direction by strings of unique Japanese 
lanterns, and in the early evening there was to be 
dancing to the music of the band. 

It was but natural that every young person in 
town who had received an invitation was filled 
with joyful anticipation. 4 4 From five until nine,” 
the cards read, and it was hard work for Cousin 
Judith to control the younger Darings until the 
hour arrived. Sue insisted upon being dressed 
directly after dinner, and when arrayed in her 
new muslin with the cherry ribbons she found such 
difficulty in keeping still that Judith was fearful 
Sue would ruin the frock before five o’clock. 
Rebecca had a new gown, too, and Donald a new 


Getting Regulated 


137 


suit of clothes. When, finally, the children ob- 
served several arrivals at the reception tent on 
the lawn opposite, which they had carefully 
watched all afternoon from the dining room win- 
dow, Miss Eliot felt that she could restrain tneir 
impatience no longer and away they trooped 
across the road. 

Marion had asked Phoebe and Janet to assist 
her to receive, for she did not know personally all 
whom she had invited, while the other girls were 
of course familiar with every young person in 
the village. There were no 4 4 regrets ’ y that day, 
you may be sure, for the unusual occasion could 
not well be disregarded. Eric Spaythe came early, 
in an elaborate costume fresh from the tailor, and 
he paid especial attention to Marion whenever her 
duties left her disengaged. A1 Hayden, Toby 
Clarke, Jed Hopkins and, in fact, every eligible 
youth in the village, assembled in bashful groups 
and looked nervously at the bevies of girls and 
upon their bewildering surroundings. In order 
to help Marion, Phil tried to 4 4 break the ice,” as 
he said, by bringing the boys and girls together, 
and when the band struck up a spirited twostep it 
relieved the strain to a wonderful degree. 

Mrs. Randolph kept out of sight, indulgently 
viewing the scene from a window. Mr. Randolph 
had not appeared in Riverdale since he brought 


138 


The Daring Twins 


his family there and settled them in their new 
home. He was a busy man, with many extensive 
financial interests, and could not be away from 
Boston for very long at a time. 

Donald, Becky and Sue had promptly joined 
Doris and Allerton, and as they were a little 
younger than the majority of Marion’s guests 
they formed a group of their own. 

4 4 It distresses me,” said Doris, plaintively, “to 
realize how many poor people are suffering, while 
we revel at this fete; and I cannot help thinking 
how many deserving families might be relieved 
from want by means of the money we are squan- 
dering to-day upon useless luxuries.” 

“Aw, cut it out!” cried Becky, indignantly. 
‘ ‘ Do you want to spoil all our fun ? ’ ’ 

“My sister is religiously inclined,” observed 
Allerton; “yet there is a place for everything, 
and this is not a funeral.” 

“Oh, Allerton — how shocking!” exclaimed the 
girl. 

“I don’t believe,” said Don, “you Randolphs 
would have spent a penny on the poor if you 
had n’t given this party; so what ’s the odds?” 

It suddenly occurred to Becky that this was n ’t 
a proper topic of conversation under the circum- 
stances, and might lead to a quarrel ; so she turned 
the subject by asking: 


Getting Regulated 


139 


“What ’s in that red-and- white striped tent?” 

“Lemonade and ices,” said Allerton. “Will 
you have some?” 

“Sure thing!” was the reply, and away they 
went, to be served by a maid in a white cap and 
apron. 

“Does n’t it cost us anything?” inquired Sue, 
who found the lemonade extremely good. 

“Course not,” returned Becky, helping herself 
again from the big bowl when the maid was not 
looking. 1 ‘ But if Doris had her way they ’d col- 
lect a nickel a glass for charity, — the kind of 
charity that does n ’t help the poor a bit. ’ ’ 

“Let us go to the long tent, over there,” said 
Allerton, with eager patronage. “I ’ll show you 
the big birthday cake and the tables all laid with 
favors and things. If we go in the back way no 
one will see us.” 

Doris was not sure they were doing right to 
peep at the tables in advance, but as none of the 
others hesitated to follow her brother she decided 
to trail along after them. 

It was, indeed, a pretty sight, and the Darings 
were awe-struck. 

“When do we feed?” asked Don, hungrily. 

“The collation is at half past six, I believe.” 

“The what?” 


“The collation.” 


140 


The Daring Twins 


i ‘ Can’t you speak United States ?” asked Don, 
indignantly; “or are you trying to poke fun at 
me!” 

“If you are too ignorant to understand simple 
language,” retorted Allerton angrily, “you be- 
come an object of derision.” 

Don glared at him. 

“Take that back, you mollycoddle!” he cried, 
“ or I ’ll punch your head. ’ ’ 

‘ ‘ Better not, ’ ’ warned Becky, composedly. ‘ 4 It 
is n’t polite at a party.” 

“Take back your own words!” shouted Aller- 
ton, white with rage. “I ’m no mollycoddle, and 
I ’ll fight you now, or any time. ’ ’ 

But Doris, startled and dismayed at this dis- 
graceful scene, put her hand on her brother’s arm 
and drew him away. 

“Come, Allerton,” she said, with such dignity 
as she could command. “You forget yourself.” 

“7 won’t forget him, if he does,” promised Don. 

“Don’t,” answered Allerton, moving away but 
still furious; “I ’ll settle this with you some other 
time, when you are not my sister’s guest.” 

Becky laughed and followed Doris, but outside 
the tent Allerton broke away from the group and 
went to nurse his grievances alone. Don was try- 
ing to think of a way to apologize to Doris when 
the girl gave him such a look of mingled scorn and 


Getting Regulated 


141 


reproach that he turned away, thrust his hands in 
his pockets and walked across the lawn whistling 
softly to himself. 

‘ 4 Never mind,” said Becky, with cheerfulness, 
* ‘ they ’ll get over it in a minute. It is n’t any of 
our bread-and-cheese, anyhow.” 

The incident, however, had disturbed gentle 
Doris greatly, and she was so silent and reserved 
that Becky and Sue soon left her to her own de- 
vices and set out to amuse themselves in any man- 
ner that might offer. 

The band played stirring marches and gavottes. 
Laughter and merriment were everywhere. All 
stiffness among the guests seemed to have disap- 
peared, for there were games of archery, lawn 
ten-pins, quoits and various other devices for the 
amusement of those assembled. Some of the girls 
had their fortunes told in the tent of a gypsy, 
while others watched a big paper balloon that was 
being sent up. 

It was nearly seven o ’clock when Marion 
gathered her guests in the banquet tent, and nearly 
all had found their places and were seated when 
in rushed Sue Daring, her white gown streaming 
all down the front with a sticky pink compound, 
and gasping with horror and despair she flew to 
her sister Phoebe, who stared in amazement. 

“Keep off, Sue — keep off! Good gracious, 
what has happened to you?” Phoebe asked. 


142 


The Daring Twins 


“I w-w-was helping myself to some 1-1-1-lemon- 
ade, when the b-bowl tipped over an’ ducked me,” 
was the wailing reply, while Phoebe held her sister 
at arms’ length to protect her own dress. 

There was a shout of laughter, at this, and poor 
Sue broke down and began to cry. 

“I ’ll take her home,” whispered Phoebe to 
Marion. 

‘ 4 Come straight back, then,” pleaded the host- 
ess; “and have Sue come, too, as soon as she has 
changed her gown. There has been no harm done, 
except to the poor thing’s own clothing.” 

“Yes, there has,” sobbed Sue. “I b-b-broke 
the bowl!” 

Phoebe led her away, and soon Judith was ex- 
claiming at the child’s dreadful plight. It was 
useless to think of her rejoining the party, how- 
ever, for there was not another dress in her limited 
wardrobe that was proper for the occasion. 

“Run back, dear,” said Cousin Judith to 
Phoebe; “your pleasure must not be spoiled, and 
I ’ll look after Sue and comfort her.” 

That was not so easy, for Sue’s disappointment 
was very poignant indeed. She knew it was her 
own fault, but that did not comfort her for missing 
the supper and the dance. However, Judith as- 
sisted her to exchange her sticky costume for a 
common gingham, and to wash all traces of the 


Getting Regulated 


143 


deluge of lemonade from her face and hands. 
Then she sat in the Little Mother’s window and 
listened to the shouts of laughter and the music 
of the band and gazed at the myriad of twinkling 
lanterns — and was more miserable than she had 
ever been before in all her life. 

Phoebe had soon rejoined the company and was 
now participating in the fun. Sue’s accident had 
rather tended to increase the jollity than other- 
wise, and was soon forgotten. There were pretty 
favors for each guest, and as a finale to the de- 
licious supper they all ate some of Marion ’s birth- 
day cake and wished her many happy returns of 
the day. Eric made a little speech which was 
witty enough to set them all laughing, and Marion 
thanked the company very modestly for their kind 
expressions of good will. 

Donald sat opposite Allerton at the feast, and 
the two glared at one another viciously, to Becky ’s 
secret delight. 

“A1 ’s getting to be quite decent,” she whis- 
pered to her brother. “I would n’t be s ’prised if 
he ’d really fight.” 

After the banquet came the dancing, and when 
the guests left the tent to indulge in this amuse- 
ment they found themselves in a veritable fairy- 
land. For the lanterns had all been lighted while 
they feasted, and the scene was beautiful beyond 
anything they had ever before witnessed. 


144 


The Daring Twins 


The cards had said: 4 ‘ until nine,” but it was 
quite ten o ’clock when the Darings returned home, 
eager and excited, and breathlessly recited their 
experiences to their smiling Little Mother. Sue 
had insisted on sitting up to hear all about the 
affair, and the glowing reports made her more 
miserable than ever. 

“Did you have a good time, Don?” she asked, 
wistfully. 

“Oh, so-so,” he replied. “It was a pretty fair 
show after I got rid of the mollycoddle. ’ 9 

“That ’s the biggest word Don knows,” laughed 
Becky; but neither she nor Sue betrayed the boy’s 
quarrel with Allerton. 


CHAPTER XII 


A BATTLE ROYAL 

That night was another wakeful one for Phoebe. 
She had thoroughly enjoyed the lawn fete, but it 
left her too nervous for peaceful slumber until 
her pulses had calmed down and she was enabled 
to regain her accustomed composure. She went 
to bed, but not to sleep, and after the house be- 
came quiet she lay thinking over the incidents of 
the evening. 

Gradually peace came to her. She was really 
tired, and the somnolent thrall of midnight was 
making her drowsy when she was roused by the 
movements of old Elaine in the next room. 

It had been nearly a week since she had re- 
moved the board over the transom and prepared 
her peephole, but during that time the housekeeper 
had remained quiet, or at least Phoebe had not 
heard her. To-night the stealthy sounds began 
again, and after listening a few moments the girl 
softly arose, drew the table to a position before 
the door and mounted upon it. 

She tried to be quiet, but probably she made 
145 


146 


The Daring Twins 


some sound in these preparations, for scarcely 
had she slid the corner of the board away, to look 
into the next room, when the light which faintly 
illumined it was suddenly extinguished. 

Phoebe stood motionless, waiting. Elaine, 
doubtless alarmed, did not stir for a long time. 
The old woman may have scented danger without 
realizing in what manner it threatened her, but 
her caution was excessive. At last, Phoebe heard 
her breathe a low sigh and then patter softly 
across the room to her bed and lie down. 

The seance was over for to-night, without doubt. 
Exercising great care, the girl noiselessly de- 
scended from her perch and, tiptoeing to bed, com- 
posed herself to slumber. 

Next morning, in considering the night’s occur- 
rence, she decided to leave the table where it 
stood — before the door — and to place a chair be- 
side it so she could mount noiselessly at any 
moment. It was several days, however, before 
Elaine recovered from her fright or suspicions, 
and during that time no unusual sounds came from 
her room. 

It rained the morning after Marion ’s party, and 
Phoebe was curious to know if all the pretty lan- 
terns had been wetted and destroyed. But, on 
looking across at the lawn she discovered that 
every trace of last night’s festivities had been re- 


A Battle Royal 


147 


moved by the servants. Tents, lanterns, band 
stand, all had been taken away as soon as the 
guests had departed, and the Randolph grounds 
were as trim and orderly as before. 

The children resented the rain, for it kept all of 
them except Phil, who was at work, cooped up in 
the house until after dinner. Judith found time, 
during the dreary forenoon, to tell them some 
stories and to talk over with them once again the 
adventures of the lawn fete, which still occupied 
their minds. 

When, at last, the rain ceased and the bright 
July sun came out of the clouds, they greeted it 
with genuine relief and joyously scattered in all 
directions. 

Don, deserted by Becky, who had to go to Miss 
Gray’s for her music lesson, walked out to the 
street and found Allerton promenading up and 
down the opposite sidewalk, his head bowed and 
his hands clasped behind his back — as an old man 
might have strutted. The sight awakened Don’s 
slumbering wrath and he called out : 

“ Hello, mollycoddle! What are you up to?” 

Allerton straightened up and glanced across 
the street. 

“Oh, it ’s you,” he said. “Are you ready for 
your thrashing?” 

“Yes. I dare you to come over here,” re-, 
sponded Don, promptly. 


148 The Daring Twins 

‘ ‘If you want your punishment, come and get 
it!” 

“You ’re afraid,” sneered Don. 

“It is n’t that,” replied Allerton. “I have n’t 
my gloves here, and I dislike to soil my hands.” 

Don glared at his neighbor’s spick and span 
apparel, and the sight of the “dandy” made him 
still more combative. Allerton was the biggest 
and strongest, perhaps ; but he was nearly a year 
younger than Don, who had no thought of his own 
disadvantage. In that mood he would willingly 
have fought a giant. 

“I dare you to come half way,” he challenged, 
and as the other boy hesitated, Don advanced 
along the muddy crossing at the corner until he 
was at about the middle of it. It was an old board 
crosswalk, and just beyond where Don stood it 
was so low that the thin mud of the street had 
spread a layer over it. 

This it was that caused Allerton to hesitate. 
He had a natural regard for his polished shoes 
and carefully brushed clothes and, while fully as 
eager for the fray as Donald, he would have pre- 
ferred a more suitable place to fight. 

The taunts of young Daring, however, were not 
to be endured. It was really necessary to teach 
impolite Donald a lesson he would remember. So 
Allerton attempted the crossing. 


A Battle Royal 


149 


When he came to the muddy section he halted. 

‘ ‘ Come on, then ! ’ ’ he exclaimed. 

“This is half way,” said Don. “Come on your- 
self.” 

“You back down, do you?” 

“No, I don’t back down. You ’re the coward, 
Al.” 

“Coward!” 

“That ’s what I said.” 

It was too great an insult for Allerton to brook. 
With doubled fists he advanced upon the eager, 
slender boy awaiting him. Don staggered under 
a heavy blow received full upon the chin, and then 
his own fist shot out and struck Allerton ’s chest. 

To his amazement it was “a knockdown.” 
Young Randolph’s feet slipped on the slimy cross- 
ing and he fell backward full length in the soft 
mud of the road. 

With a roar of rage and chagrin he scrambled 
to his feet, and Don planted another blow that 
sent him to the mud again. It was not a hard 
blow, by any means. It seemed as though a mere 
touch was sufficient, for Allerton ’s feet were now 
so covered with mud that he could scarcely stand 
upon them. A push from Don sufficed to upset 
him, and observing the ease of the operation Don 
repeated his blow each time that Allerton arose, 
laughing gleefully at the result of his own prow- 


150 


The Daring Twins 


ess. In the heat of the encounter, however, he 
neglected to keep his own footing on the cleaner 
and safer portion of the boards, so that in one of 
Allerton ’s falls his arm struck Don and sent him 
likewise sprawling in the sticky mud. 

They sat up and looked at each other in be- 
wilderment. Allerton had never been so aston- 
ished in his life as at his present misadventure, 
and now, as he saw one side of Don’s head 
plastered with mud, which filled an ear and an 
eye, he burst into a hearty laugh. 

Don scraped the mud out of his eye, blinked at 
his antagonist, and laughed too. 

“ Guess honors are about even, Al,” he said. 
“I ’ve had enough. Have you?” 

“ Plenty,” declared Allerton, making an effort 
to rise from the puddle. Don managed to find his 
feet after a severe struggle. 

i ‘ My, but you ’re a sight ! ” he exclaimed. 

“So are you,” replied Allerton, cheerfully. 
“We both ought to be ashamed of ourselves.” 

“I — I ’m afraid Cousin Judith will scold.” 

“Well, I ’m certain to catch it, all right. So 
long, Don.” 

“So long, Al. Let ’s go down town, after we ’ve 
dressed.” 

“All right.” 

Thus the fight resulted in amity; but Don was 


A Battle Royal 


151 


dreadfully humiliated when he had to face the 
Little Mother in all that mess. He took off his 
shoes on the porch and humbly made his way up 
stairs to knock at Judith’s door. 

“I — I ’ve fallen down in the mud,” he called to 
her. 4 4 May I put on my best suit ? 9 9 

Miss Eliot had been a witness of the entire 
scrimmage from her window, and had even over- 
heard the words that had preceded and provoked 
the fight. She had decided not to interfere, but 
now she answered in a frigid voice through the 
closed door: 

4 4 No, Donald. I cannot have your best suit 
ruined . 9 9 

4 4 But what shall I do, Cousin Judith?” 

4 4 You must go to bed until the mud on your 
clothes dries and they can be properly cleaned.” 

Donald stood silently in the hall, his face flushed 
red with humiliation. He waited a long while for 
Cousin Judith to speak again, but she remained 
silent. At last he crept away to his own room, re- 
moved the disreputable garments and examined 
them dolefully. Coat, trousers, shirt, stockings — 
all were alike plastered with thick layers of fresh 
mud. It would take them a long time to dry, he 
feared. 

With a sinking heart he put on his pajamas, 
having first washed himself clean, and then sat 
down to consider his dismal fate. 


152 


The Daring Twins 


“It was a pretty good fight,’ ’ he mused; “but 
fighting don’t seem to pay, somehow. I wish I 
had let A1 alone. He is n’t so much of a molly- 
coddle, after all.” 

Finally, he thought of Aunt Hyacinth, and re- 
solving to appeal to that faithful friend he 
crept down into the kitchen and begged her to 
help him. Aunty looked the clothes over in dis- 
may, saying : 

“ ’T ain’t no use, Marse Don. Dat ’ar mud 
won’t dry ’fore mawnin’, nohow. I ’ll do mah 
bes’, honey; but I neveh seen sich a mess in all 
mah bohn days ! ’ ’ 

With this verdict Don was forced to be content. 
He had a notion to appeal to Cousin Judith again, 
but could not muster the courage. So he got a 
book, lay down upon his bed and passed the rest 
of the afternoon in abject misery. 


CHAPTER XIII 


PHIL MAKES A DISCOVERY 

Eric came to the bank a little late on the morn- 
ing following the party, but as soon as he had 
joined Phil at the high desk which they used in 
common he began to sing the praises of Marion 
Randolph. 

“She is n’t a raving beauty, Phil,” he said, 
4 ‘ and until now I ’ve always hated the sight of any 
girl that wears glasses; but Marion ’s a cracker- 
jack in some ways. She ’s got a wad of money, 
for one thing — or her old man has, and that *s 
just the same.” 

“I suppose Mr. Randolph is a very wealthy 
man,” remarked Phil, who disliked to discuss 
Marion with his friend. 

“Wealthy!” cried Eric; “why, Randolph ’s 
the head of the big Boston bond syndicate. He ’s 
one of the slickest financiers in this country. Look 
here, Phil,” turning to a page in the ledger; “just 
notice this entry. When Mr. Randolph came here 
with the family, he deposited in our bank ten thou- 
sand in cold cash. He and Mrs. Randolph may 
153 


154 


The Daring Twins 


both check against the account, but you see she ’s 
only drawn a little over a thousand dollars, so 
far. That ’s the sort of a customer we like, and 
if Mr. Randolph can let ten thousand lie idle in a 
country bank he must have scads of money.’ ’ 

Then Eric discussed the elaborate entertain- 
ment of yesterday and dwelt perpetually upon the 
money the Randolphs must be possessed of, until 
Phil was thoroughly annoyed. 

“What does it matter, Eric?” he said. “Money 
can’t buy everything, in this world.” 

“What can’t it buy?” demanded Eric, as- 
tonished. 

“It can’t buy happiness, or health, or — ” 

1 ‘ That ’s rubbish, Phil. Give a fellow plenty of 
money and he ’s bound to be happy; he can’t help 
it. And as for health, money gets the best and 
most skillful doctors and surgeons in the land, and 
they ’ll cure a rich man where a poor man will 
die. There is n’t anything, old man, that money 
won’t do.” 

“Then you ought to be satisfied, Eric. Your 
father is the richest man in Riverdale, except per- 
haps Mr. Randolph, and you are his only child.” 

“Oh, it ’ll come to me in time, I guess,” re- 
turned Eric, carelessly ; “but just now the gov ’nor 
holds me in pretty tight lines. How in blazes can 
he expect a young fellow to live on my salary? 
Why, it ’s preposterous!” 


Phil Makes a Discovery 155 

Phil did not reply to this. It was none of his 
business. 

In some ways this association with Eric was not 
of the most pleasant description. The two boys 
had grown up together in the village and had al- 
ways been friends in a way; but now that Phil 
was thrown more closely into Eric’s companion- 
ship he discovered many traits in his nature that 
did not seem wholly admirable. 

The older boy was a persistent cigarette smoker, 
and laughed at Phil for refusing to imitate him. 

“I ’ve tried it,” said Phil, quietly, “but I don’t 
like the things. To me there ’s no fun in 
smoking. ’ ’ 

After office hours Eric often pleaded with Phil 
to go to the hotel and play pool with him. Mr. 
Daring had always had a pool and billiard table 
in a large room in the attic of his house, and he 
had taught all his children to play. None of them, 
however, cared especially for the amusement, and 
his father’s wisdom was evident when Phil now 
revolted from a game at the hotel. 

“I ’m not a good player, Eric,” he said, “and 
I can’t imagine anyone loafing in that grimy, 
smoky room just to play a game of pool. What ’s 
the fun in it?” 

Mr. Spaythe strongly objected to billiards and 
pool. He had even reproved Wallace Daring, at 


156 


The Daring Twins 


times, for having a table in his house. Eric had 
been sternly forbidden to play, and for that rea- 
son those stealthy games at the hotel possessed 
for the young man the attraction of forbidden 
fruit. 

4 4 Fun ! ’ ’ he retorted ; 4 4 why, there ’s lots of fun 
in pool. We play for the drinks, you know, and 
I can beat nearly every fellow in the village. When 
the farmers’ sons come in, they ’re dead easy; 
there are always some of them around the hotel, 
and they ’re proud to play with me because I ’m 
the banker’s son.” 

4 4 Then play with them, ’ ’ advised Phil. 4 4 1 don ’t 
drink, as you know, and I ’d be poor company 
for you.” 

Eric shook his head sadly. 

4 4 You ’ll never amount to much in the world, 
Phil, with those namby-pamby ideas of yours.” 

44 I don’t consider them namby-pamby ideas, 
Eric; I simply don’t care for the things you do.” 

4 4 The good die young.” 

4 4 Oh, I ’m not so good as to be in any danger,” 
laughed Phil. 44 I imagine I ’m pretty full of 
faults, Eric, and you must n’t quarrel with me 
because my faults are not the same as your own. ’ ’ 

After a time young Spay the refrained from urg- 
ing Phil to join in his amusements ; but he seemed 
not to be offended and proved genial enough as 


Phil Makes a Discovery 


157 


they worked together at the bank. The two young 
men occupied a large room at the rear of the neat, 
one-story brick building. They worked perched 
upon high stools at a big double desk, where the 
books were spread out. Behind them was the 
grim, austere safe which was the repository of so 
much specie that Phil's brain sometimes whirled 
at sight of the heaps of gold and bank notes. Mr. 
Spay the ’s private office was in front, and beside 
it was the brass-railed coop where Mr. Boothe sat 
all day dispensing or receiving money according 
to the requirements of the customers. 

The cashier could not overhear their conversa- 
tion, if the boys spoke moderately low, and he 
paid no attention to them, anyway, and seldom 
even glanced toward them. 

“I We invited Marion to the boat race,” said 
Eric one day, soon after the party. “Are you 
going to pull stroke for our crew, Phil ? ’ 9 

“I suppose so.” 

“Do your best, then, old man. I ’m going to 
bet heavily on our crew.” 

“I would n’t, Eric.” 

“Why not?” 

“The least little accident decides a boat race.” 

“I ’ll risk it. We ’ve defeated Bayport two 
years running, and we ’re due for a third victory. 
As a matter of fact, I ’m just forced to tie to this 


158 


The Daring Twins 


race, Phil, and win some necessary money. I owe 
about everybody in the town, and some of them 
are getting impatient to see the color of my 
money. ’ ’ 

Phil knew this was true, and did not care to 
reply. After working silently for a time be said : 

“Eric, did n’t Samuel P. Martin deposit $380 
yesterday ? ’ ’ 

“No. It was $280/ ’ 

i i Where ’s the slip f ’ ’ 

“Put away, somewhere.” 

“But, I ’m sure it was three-eighty. I heard 
him say he wanted four hundred for his team, and 
threw off twenty dollars in order to make the 
deal.” 

Eric looked a little annoyed. 

“I entered two-eighty on the books, did n’t I?” 
he asked, scowling. 

“Yes; that ’s what surprised me.” 

“Well, then the entry must be correct.” 

“I ’ll ask Mr. Boothe.” 

“Let him alone. It ’s my affair.” 

Phil said no more, but was still puzzled. When 
he came back to the bank after dinner he saw that 
Eric had laid a deposit slip on his desk. It showed 
that Samuel P. Martin had deposited $280 in 
Spaythe’s Bank. Phil thought the ink appeared 
to be quite fresh. 


Phil Makes a Discovery 


159 


4 'You see I was right, after all,” observed Eric, 
glancing at Phil a little anxiously. "After you 
left I hunted up the deposit slip. Old Martin may 
have sold his team for three-eighty, but he only 
put two-eighty in the bank. ’ ’ 

A few days later Phil had occasion to ask : 

"Where is the check for two hundred, drawn 
by Mrs. Randolph?” 

"When did she draw it?” inquired Eric. 

"This morning, according to the entry. And 
just now she has presented another check for fifty. 
I ’ve just taken it from Mr. Boothe’s spindle.” 

"Probably she did n’t get enough the first 
time,” remarked Eric, lazily puffing his cigarette, 
for his father was away from the office just then 
and he could stealthily indulge in his pet vice. 

"I must have that check to file — the one for two 
hundred — and it is n’t here,” persisted Phil, who 
had no intention of neglecting any part of his 
duty. 

Eric stared at him, a moment. 

"Hand me that bunch of canceled checks,” he 
said ; "I ’ll find it. ’ ’ 

Phil passed the bundle across the desk, and 
while Eric slowly turned over the paid checks and 
seemed to examine them carefully the other bent 
his eyes upon the books and continued his work. 
After a time, the banker’s son handed back the 
checks. 


160 


The Daring Tivins 


‘ 1 There it is, Phil. I ’ve placed it on top.” 

Yes, there it was, sure enough, although Phil 
was positive it had not been in the lot before. He 
did not refer to the subject again, but went on 
with his task, feeling miserable and dispirited at 
the thoughts that intruded themselves upon his 
mind. 

Eric left early that afternoon, when Phil took 
occasion to carefully compare the two checks is- 
sued by Mrs. Randolph. That for two hundred 
was not numbered and seemed to have been very 
hastily written. 

There was a dull ache in young Daring’s heart 
as he put away the books and papers and pre- 
pared to go home. An odd suspicion had forced 
itself upon him — a suspicion so cruel and deplor- 
able that the boy reproached himself for harbor- 
ing it for even a moment. 

That evening he had a long talk with Phoebe, his 
only confidant. After relating to his twin the 
circumstances of Martin’s deposit and Mrs. Ran- 
dolph’s curious check he said: 

“I know I am wrong to be mistrustful, for Eric 
is Mr. Spaythe’s only son, and would not, of 
course, attempt to rob his father. But when Mar- 
tin pushed his money over the counter to Mr. 
Boothe he said in a loud voice: ‘ There ’s three 
hundred and eighty dollars more toward my sav- 


Phil Makes a Discovery 


161 


ings ’ ; so, in spite of that deposit slip, I am almost 
sure he banked the entire amount.’ ’ 

‘‘Can Eric get into the safe, where the money 
is kept?” asked Phoebe, after some thought. 

‘ ‘ Of course. He has to put away the books, and 
often we are not through with our work upon 
them until after Mr. Boothe has gone. They both 
have the combination of the safe and the keys to 
the bank. Naturally, I have not been entrusted 
with either, as yet.” 

Phoebe took time to consider this. 

“I suppose,” she finally said, “it would be 
quite possible for Eric to take a hundred dollars 
from the safe and then make the entry of Mr. 
Martin’s deposit a hundred dollars less than it 
actually was.” 

“Yes.” 

“Then no one would suspect what Eric had 
done. ’ ’ 

“Why, the books would not show the theft, of 
course; but in time Mr. Martin will be sure to 
discover that he has not been credited with that 
hundred dollars, and that will lead to an investiga- 
tion. It ’s the same way with Mrs. Randolph’s 
check, ’ ’ added Phil, regretfully. “She has a large 
amount on deposit, and may not discover for a 
long time that her account is two hundred dollars 
short.” 


• 162 The Daring Twins 

“Are you sure she did not sign that check ? ’ ’ 
asked Phoebe. 

“No; I cannot be positive. Mrs. Randolph is 
in the habit of drawing money from the bank but 
once a week. She writes neatly and numbers all 
her checks. To-day I found an entry that Eric 
had made in the book showing she had drawn two 
hundred, and the check itself, which should have 
been among those Mr. Boothe had cashed and 
turned over to me, was missing. Almost imme- 
diately came in the usual check for fifty, made out 
in Mrs. Randolph’s neat and careful way. 
Naturally, I was puzzled. When Eric finally 
found the two hundred dollar check, it was not 
like Mrs. Randolph’s checks at all, although the 
handwriting was similar. ’ ’ 

“Have you noticed any other suspicious 
things?” the girl inquired. 

“Several,” replied Phil, after a brief hesita- 
tion. “Put, I ’ve never even dared to suspect 
Eric before. I hope I ’m wrong; indeed, I must 
be wrong!” 

They were walking along a country lane in the 
twilight. Phil’s arm was around his twin’s waist; 
the scent of new mown hay came to them from the 
neighboring fields. 

“I do not think you are justified in accusing 
Eric to his father,” said Phoebe, musingly. “It 
will be better to keep your suspicions to yourself. ’ ’ 


Phil Makes a Discovery 


163 


4 4 That is my idea. I ’m not hired as a detect- 
ive ; I ’m merely a bookkeeper. ’ ’ 

4 4 Still,’ ’ she said, 4 4 you owe a certain loyalty to 
Mr. Spaythe. If an employee discovers the bank 
being robbed it is bis duty to speak; unless — ” 

4 4 Unless the robber is the banker’s own son,” 
added Phil ; 4 4 in which case it would be a kindness 
to keep the knowledge from him.” 

Phoebe sighed. 

4 4 Eric has a good heart,” she observed, 4 4 and 
I ’m sure be ’d never think of taking money from 
anyone but his father. He is n’t robbing the 
customers of the bank by these acts, you know.” 

4 4 That is true, for the false entries are certain 
to be discovered, when the bank will be obliged to 
make good the deficiencies. Eric realizes this, I 
suppose. He has been very extravagant lately, 
and his father keeps him on a very small salary. 
So, it seems to me, he has been tempted to take 
what does n’t belong to him.” 

44 I ’m awfully sorry,” said the girl. 4 4 It ’s a 
dreadful thing, Phil, any way you look at it. But 
I do not think it is your place to interfere. Fate 
will take care of the problem, and Eric’s final 
downfall is certain.” 

4 4 Would you advise me to have a private talk 
with him, and tell him what I know?” asked Phil. 

4 4 What ’s the use? He cannot put back the 


164 


The Daring Twins 


money he has taken. Better let the thing run its 
course, Phil, and keep out of it yourself in every 
way. ’ ’ 

“I will,” said Phil, with decision. 

But Eric was not long in discovering a change 
in PhiPs attitude toward him. The young man 
did not mean to alter his manner toward his old 
friend, but their former congenial relations were 
rather abruptly broken off, much to Eric’s sur- 
prise. Then the latter became suspicious, and 
while he spoke to his colleague as cheerfully as of 
old, Phil frequently caught Eric watching him 
with a sly, searching glance that had a trace of 
fear in it. This mistrust gradually wore away 
when the banker’s son found he had not been be- 
trayed, or even questioned. If Phil found any 
entries in the books that did not look exactly right 
to him, he passed them over and said nothing. 
This served to restore Eric’s confidence in him, 
and the two boys continued to work together in 
perfect harmony. 

Phoebe was very miserable over Phil ’s discovery 
of Eric’s irregularities. It was the first time any 
disgraceful or criminal act had been brought close 
to her knowledge, and she became nervous for fear 
her twin might, in some way, become implicated in 
the terrible affair. The girl was sorry for Eric, 
and grieved over him with all her kindly heart. 


Phil Makes a Discovery 


165 


It seemed so sad that a bright young fellow with 
such splendid prospects should go wrong and 
foolishly ruin all his future life. She knew Mr. 
Spaythe well enough to believe he would cast off 
Eric without mercy when he learned the fact that 
his son was a thief. For this reason she sincerely 
hoped the banker would never make the discovery. 


CHAPTER XIV 


THE FOLLY OF GRANDPA ELIOT 

That night Phoebe was again aroused by the 
peculiar sliding noise in the next room. She had 
been awaiting it for so long that she was alert to 
the slightest sound Elaine made, and now she lost 
no time in silently mounting upon the table and 
opening the peephole she had prepared. Her own 
room was shrouded in gloom, but the housekeeper 
had placed a lighted candle upon her table, before 
which she was seated in her white nightrobe. 

When Phoebe first observed her, old Elaine was 
tying the mouth of a stout canvas bag that was 
full of some irregular, lumpy material. Then she 
drew another bag toward her — there were several 
standing upon the broad table — and unfastened 
the cord that bound it while it was lying upon its 
side. At once a shower of gold burst forth, and 
with her long bony fingers the woman slid each 
piece of money across the table, at the same time 
eagerly counting it in the low, mumbling tone 
Phoebe had so often heard but could not before 
explain. 


166 



She Eagekly Counted the Gold. 









































































































































The Folly of Gran' pa Eliot 


167 


From her perch of observation the girl counted 
them with her. There were exactly two hundred 
and fifty twenty-dollar gold pieces in the bag — a 
sum amounting to five thousand dollars. 

Elaine cautiously replaced the hoard and firmly 
secured the mouth of the sack. Another bag was 
opened. It contained smaller coins, ten-dollar 
pieces, and there were three hundred of them. 

The woman did not hurry, although her every 
movement denoted fervent excitement. Bending 
over the table, she slowly slid piece after piece 
from one pile to another until all had been counted. 
The sacks were old and soiled. How many times, 
Phoebe wondered, had their contents been counted 
and gloated over? Five separate sacks old Elaine 
unfastened, counted, and tied up again, and all 
were filled with yellow gold. Then she twined her 
arms around the bulging bags and began kissing 
them ecstatically. “Mine!” she said in a hoarse 
whisper. “Mine — mine!” Then she reached 
down and raised a trap in the floor, disclosing a 
cavity between the joists into which she lowered a 
sack. It was a familiar “thump” to Phoebe’s 
ears, the puzzling mystery of which was now ex- 
plained. With each sack she deposited she re- 
peated: “Mine!” in so weird a tone that it sent 
the chills coursing down the back of the startled 
and amazed girl. 


168 


The Baring Twins 


Now Elaine replaced the trap, drew the rag 
carpet over it and stood upright. She cast an un- 
decided glance around and walked to the old-fash- 
ioned mantel that stood against the opposite wall. 
It was made of some dark wood, and had been 
quite cleverly carved. Nearly every bed chamber 
in the house had a similar mantel and fireplace. 

Elaine put her hand to one corner and the en- 
tire woodwork swung outward on hinges, show- 
ing a deep cavity which was lined with narrow 
shelves. Except as the woman herself obstructed 
the view, Phoebe could clearly see the whole of 
this secret cupboard, which had been ingeniously 
built into the chimney. The shelves were covered 
with stacks of silver coins and thick packages of 
bills. The silver Elaine merely glanced at, but 
the packets of paper money she piled into her 
loose robe, gathered into a sack, and carried it 
to the table, where she proceeded methodically to 
count it. The eagerness she had displayed while 
counting the gold was now lacking in her manner. 
She was intent enough upon her task, and handled 
each bill with loving care; but only the hard 
yellow gold had seemed to enrapture her. 

Phoebe ’s limbs were getting numb and her knees 
knocked together tremblingly; but she stuck ob- 
stinately to her post of observation until Elaine 
had finished her self imposed task and replaced 


The Folly of Gran’ pa Eliot 


169 


the money. This accomplished, the woman swung 
the mantel into place and with a leer of cunning 
and contentment still lingering upon her wrinkled 
features blew out her candle and went to bed. 

Phoebe closed the slide and managed to climb 
down and creep into her own bed, without making 
a noise. Then she lay shivering with nervous 
chills, induced by the astonishing discovery she 
had made. 

There was no sleep for the girl that night. At 
first, a supreme bewilderment prevented her from 
thinking clearly ; but, after a time, she grew more 
composed and began to marshall her thoughts 
into some sort of order. 

It was not Elaine’s money, this secret hoard; 
that was certain. Therefore it must belong to 
Gran ’pa Eliot. Phoebe remembered that always 
while he was in health and able to be around he 
had personally occupied these rooms — the one 
Elaine now slept in, and the big front room open- 
ing out of it, where he now sat propped up in 
helpless oblivion of all earthly treasure. 

There was no longer any doubt that Gran ’pa 
Eliot had long been a miser and cunningly secreted 
his wealth. He had caused the trap to be made 
in the floor and the cupboard built behind the 
mantel. With years the passion for saving had 
grown upon him, and after his wife’s death and 


170 


The Daring Twins 


his daughter’s marriage he gave free rein to his 
hobby and converted all his land into ready money. 
To avoid suspicion he had spread the report of 
his financial failure and claimed he was reduced 
to poverty. 

So much Phoebe had no difficulty in compre- 
hending. In what way the old housekeeper had 
discovered her master’s secret was not clear, but 
Elaine’s resolve not to desert Mr. Eliot was 
obviously due to her knowledge of his vast hoard. 
When he became paralyzed and helpless she real- 
ized that the fortune, unsuspected by all others, 
was now safely within her own grasp. Phoebe 
decided, shuddering the while, that the woman was 
a greater slave to that secret hoard than ever her 
grandfather had been. 

When daybreak came the girl arose and quietly 
dressed herself. Then she softly slipped out of 
the house and started for a walk through the val- 
ley, hoping the morning air would cool her throb- 
bing brain. Here, amid a silence scarcely broken 
by the low mooing of the cows and the crowing of 
the distant cocks, she began to doubt the evidence 
of her own senses. It was all so wonderful and 
unreal that she could barely admit the truth of it ; 
and yet — and yet — . Often before she had heard 
the sound of the gold being slid across the table ; 
so often, indeed, that she well knew her eyes had 


The Folly of Gran' p a Eliot 


171 


not deceived her when, at last, they revealed to her 
the explanation of the puzzling sounds. 

And now the question arose, what should she 
do? How should she act, now that she had dis- 
covered this terrible secret? The knowledge of 
her grandfather’s wealth in no way elated her; 
rather did she feel scorn and resentment at his 
despicable weakness. It hurt her to think that 
her mother’s father could be guilty of such folly 
and pitiful sordidness. It was too soon for her 
to reflect that this money might easily affect the 
fortunes of her brothers and sisters and herself ; 
all she thought of was the shame of the thing, 
that her grandfather could become a miser and 
gloat in secret over the dross of gold and silver — 
and soiled bank notes. What an abominable, in- 
human passion it was — a passion shared by old 
Elaine Halliday, a creature Phoebe had always 
despised intuitively. 

During an hour’s brisk walk she became sorry 
that her curiosity had led her to discover this 
horrid secret. But she resolved to keep her own 
counsel and tell no one what she had seen. Even 
Phil must be spared this humiliation, for the poor 
boy had quite enough to worry him already. 

Phoebe returned to the house with glowing 
cheeks and bright eyes, in spite of her sleepless 
night and mental perturbation. She greeted the 


172 


The Daring Twins 


family cheerfully and took her seat at the break- 
fast table with her native composure fully re- 
gained. 

“When is the boat race, Phil?” asked Miss 
Eliot. 

“A week from Saturday,” he said. “I Ve got 
to practice with the boys every evening, from now 
on. I wanted them to let me out, this year, but 
they foolishly insist on my pulling stroke.” 

“Why foolishly?” inquired Becky. 

“Because, I ’m working for a living, now, and 
can’t devote much time to getting into condition. 
Those Bayport fellows are out every day, and 
mean to win if they can . 9 ’ 

“I must see that boat race,” said Cousin Judith. 
“Boating has always been one of my favorite 
sports. I hope you ’ll do well, Phil ; but, of course, 
you can’t neglect business for pleasure.” 


I 


CHAPTER XY 


SUE GETS A DIVORCE 

After breakfast Sue wandered out and found 
Doris upon the lawn. The youngest of the Dar- 
ings was now nearly twelve years old and had 
associated so constantly with her elders that she 
considered herself quite 4 4 grown up” and in no 
way inferior to Doris Randolph, who, having an 
advantage in years, assumed toward Sue the airs 
of a young lady. 

Since she had tipped over the punch bowl and 
taken a lemonade bath a good deal of fun had been 
poked at poor Sue, which she deeply resented. 
It was bad enough to have lost all the joy of the 
party, without being twitted afterward about her 
misfortune. 

Doris was surely too sedate and practical 
minded to wish to tease Sue, so her greeting was 
wholly innocent when she said: 

“Good morning. Is that the lemonade dress 
which you are wearing?” 

“No,” retorted Sue, flushing; “is that the hypo- 
crite’s dress which you are wearing, Miss 
Religion ? ’ ' 

173 

* 


174 


The Daring Twins 


Doris was provoked, and with good reason, for 
she was sincere enough in her religious senti- 
ments. Also, she was still worldly minded to the 
extent of becoming angry. After a cold, stony 
look at Sue, she said : 

“I have submitted to the insolence of you Dar- 
ings long enough, and hereafter I forbid you to 
address me, for I shall not recognize you as an 
acquaintance. ’ ’ 

At this instant Cousin Judith appeared upon 
the scene and hearing Doris ’ speech stopped short 
in surprise. 

4 ‘Why, what is the trouble, my dears V 9 she 
asked. 

“This child, madam,” returned Doris, stiffly, 
“is still a barbarian, and unfit to associate with 
civilized beings . 9 9 

“I called her a hypocrite,” flashed Sue, de- 
fiantly ; ‘ ‘ and she is one . 9 9 

Miss Eliot was shocked. 

“I am surprised, Sue dear; surprised and 
grieved. You have treated Doris very badly, and 
I want you to apologize to her for your rudeness. ’ ’ 

“I won’t!” said Sue, stamping her foot. “I ’ll 
die rather than beg pardon of Miss Nancy Hypo- 
crite ! ” 

Judith looked at her in amazement. 

“Go into the house, my dear,” she said, rather 
sternly; “I ’ll join you there presently.” 


Sue Gets a Divorce 


175 


Sue raised her long lashes and swept one rebel- 
lious look at the Little Mother. Doris’ face had a 
slight sneer upon it, and the angry child noted it. 
Turning squarely about she ignored Cousin 
Judith’s command and marched down the street 
toward the village. 

Doris gave a little laugh. 

“A pleasant mannered young lady, I must say, 
Miss Elliot,” she tittered. “But, I assure you I 
meant what I said. I shall never speak to her 
again, unless she apologizes.” 

“An apology is your due, I think,” Miss Eliot 
said soberly, and then without further remark she 
continued on her way to the Randolph house to 
see Marion, with whom she had an engagement. 

At noon Sue did not return to dinner. She had 
called upon Nannette Bennett, who was about her 
own age, and driven with her to a farm out on the 
Exeter road. 

‘ 4 Can you stay here to dinner ? ’ ’ asked Nannette. 

“Of course,” replied Sue, readily. “There ’s 
no one at home who has the right to give me 
orders. ’ ’ 

Nannette did not understand this strange- 
speech, but let it pass without remark. The two> 
girls spent all day at the farm, although I am 
not sure Sue was enjoying herself for a single 
moment. She did not reach home until the family 
was seated at the supper table. 


176 


The Daring Twins 


Phil had inquired anxiously for his sister, and 
Judith quietly explained that Sue had called Doris 
bad names and refused to apologize. 

4 4 When I asked her to return to the house, 
where I hoped to be able to reason with her, ’ ’ she 
added, 4 4 Sue refused to obey my request and 
walked down the street instead. I do not know 
where she is, now.” 

Phil was worried, and even Don looked grave. 

44 I had intended to practice this evening with 
the boat crew,” said the elder brother, 4 4 but I 
think I ought to hunt for Sue instead. She has 
been bad and rebellious, I know; but she ’s our 
little sister, just the same, and I ’m afraid some- 
thing has happened to her.” 

Cousin Judith made no reply and the meal was 
progressing in gloomy silence when Sue walked 
in, threw down her hat and quietly took her seat 
at the table. She did not look at the Little 
Mother, nor at anyone else directly, but helped 
herself to food and with an assumption of com- 
posure began to eat. 

No one spoke. The others had glanced inquir- 
ingly at Cousin Judith, whose face was pale and 
unrelenting. She did not ask Sue where she had 
been, nor chide her for disobedience; but she 
passed the plate of cold meat to her and asked 
Auntie to bring in Miss Sue’s chocolate. 


Sue Gets a Divorce 


177 


This condition of affairs was so unusual with 
the Darings that they were uncertain how to act. 
Even Becky looked askance at her small sister, as 
if she were some strange, untamed animal, and 
Don told himself this escapade deserved a worse 
punishment than fighting in the mud. He had 
“taken his own medicine’ ’ with frank courage, 
knowing he deserved the Little Mother’s rebuke 
and telling her he was truly sorry he had hurt her 
feelings. But here was little Sue developing a 
spirit of defiance hitherto unknown in the Daring 
family circle. Phil was hurt and Phoebe dis- 
tressed, but both voluntarily left the matter in 
Miss Eliot’s hands for adjustment. 

After supper Cousin Judith said to the culprit 
in a kindly tone: “Come to my room, Sue. I 
wish to have a little talk with you.” 

i i I ’ve nothing to talk about, ’ ’ replied Sue, sul- 
lenly. 

Phil went away to his practice on the river and 
Sue followed her sisters out upon the porch. 
Cousin Judith, perhaps hoping the girl would 
change her mind, had gone directly to her room. 

“You ’re acting like a little fool, Sue,” observed 
Becky. “I ’m surprised at you.” 

Sue colored, but did not reply. Presently she 
went to her room and shut herself in until bed- 
time. 


178 


The Daring Twins 


At breakfast next morning Cousin J udith said, 
addressing all the five Darings, impartially: 

‘ ‘ Our contract, the Articles of Adoption, states 
that if any one of you proves rebellious to my 
authority the rebel is to be tried by a committee 
of two, and must abide by the committee’s de- 
cision. Is it not so?” 

“That ’s a fact, Little Mother,” replied Phil, 
seriously. 

“In the case we have now to consider, Sue has 
disobeyed me more than once,” continued Miss 
Eliot. “I, therefore charge her with rebellion, 
and it becomes proper for her to select two of you 
to try her case. If I am found to be wrong I will 
ask her pardon and try to make amends. If she 
is wrong she must ask my pardon and submit to 
any penalty I may impose.” 

Sue paled and then flushed. She cast a furtive 
glance around the table and then said, in a hard, 
unyielding tone : 

“I ’m willing. I choose Phoebe and Don.” 

“Very well,” returned Cousin Judith. “The 
trial shall take place at once.” 

None of them saw anything humorous in the 
situation. As a rule the Darings were merry 
hearted boys and girls, full of fun and good 
spirits; but, these Articles of Adoption were re- 
garded by them all as sacred. Each realized to 


Sue Gets a Divorce 


179 


an extent what a blessing the Little* Mother had 
already been to them, and was determined to up- 
hold her authority. For her coming had virtually 
revolutionized the household and given them a 
happy home and a sympathetic, generous friend. 

Sue, however, marched into the parlor with her 
stubborn spirit unconquered by any feeling of 
gratitude, and Phoebe and Donald gravely fol- 
lowed her. 

4 ‘ Tell us the beginning of the trouble, dear,” 
urged the elder sister. 

Sue related her conversation with Doris. 

“I Ve put up with her slurs ’n ’ sarcasms long 
enough,” she said. “If she ’s so blessed religious 
as she tries to make out, why does she pick on me 
ev ’ry minute ? I ’m glad I called her a hypocrite, 
an’ I won’t take it back — not for a second!” 

“Perhaps she did not mean to offend you by 
speaking of the 4 lemonade dress’,” suggested 
Phoebe. “I Ve always found her a good-hearted 
girl and quite ladylike.” 

“That ’s what I object to,” was the answer. 
“I won’t stand for her ladylike airs, Phoebe, an’ 
that ’s all there is to it.” 

“Sometimes our judgment proves to be 
wrong,” said Phoebe. “Anyhow, Cousin Judith 
knows best.” 

“There ’s another thing that makes me mad,” 


180 


The Daring Twins 


cried Sue. “ Cousin Judith takes Doris’ part 
against me. Is n’t she supposed to stand up for 
her own adopted children!” 

“Not when they ’re wrong, sis,” said Don 
stoutly. 

“Who ’s to say whether they ’re wrong or 
not ! ’ ’ Sue demanded. 

“She is, of course. She ’s older, and knows 
more.” 

“Cousin Judith,” added Phoebe, “tries to be 
always right and just. She thought you were im- 
pudent to Doris, who is our neighbor and has 
been kind to us all, and so she asked you to 
apologize. ’ ’ 

“I won’t apologize to that stuck-up thing — 
anyhow, not till she apologizes for speaking of my 
lemonade dress.” 

“Now, that ’s the real question before the 
board,” asserted Don. “You ’re under trial, 
Sue, and if we decide you ’re in the wrong, and 
you don’t apologize to Doris and do as Cousin 
Judith says, you ’ll be divorced from our Articles 
of Adoption.” 

Sue was white and frightened, but she held her 
ground. 

“All right,” she said. “It ’s up to you. I 
don’t want any adoption by anyone who won’t 
stand by me in a fight. And I ’ll never — never — 
beg Doris ’ pardon ! ’ ’ 


Sue Gets a Divorce 


181 


They tried to argue with her, and explained 
the disgrace of being divorced and having no Lit- 
tle Mother. The divorce would separate her not 
only from association with Cousin Judith, but 
from that of her brothers and sisters, who would 
all hold strictly to the letter of the agreement 
they had signed. 

Sue listened to it all and remained obstinate. 

“It ’s for you to say whether I ’m right or 
wrong,’ ’ she avowed at the last, “and if I ’m di- 
vorced I don’t care a rap. I won’t stand for any 
adoption that makes me apologize to a silly fool 
like Doris Randolph.” 

Donald and Phoebe withdrew from the confer- 
ence and talked it over between themselves. 
They decided that Sue, having defied Cousin 
Judith’s authority and broken the signed agree- 
ment, must submit to the penalty of divorce. 

Phoebe drew up the paper and made an impos- 
ing looking copy on her typewriter. It read as 
follows : 

“Whereas Sue Daring signed, under date of 
June 14th, 1908, a document known as the Arti- 
cles of Adoption, whereby she promised and cove- 
nanted to support and acknowledge the authority 
of Miss Judith Eliot and to Adopt her as a 
Mother, and Whereas the said Sue Daring has 
broken that covenant and agreement and refuses 


182 


The Daring Twins 


longer to abide by it, Therefore the undersigned, 
chosen by her as a Committee to decide her case, 
hereby declares the said Sue Daring has been 
guilty of a violation of the terms of the said signed 
agreement and is therefore released from all its 
pledges and Divorced from any further participa- 
tion in its benefits. Signed this 12th day of July, 
1908. 

Phcebe Daring, 
Donald Daring, 
Committee 

This paper was made out in duplicate and a 
copy given to Sue and one to Cousin Judith. Sue 
promptly tore up her paper and scattered the 
pieces over the hall floor. Then she left the house 
and went away to play with some of her girl 
friends. 

Cousin Judith asked the others not to taunt or 
reproach the girl, but to treat her as pleasantly 
and cordially as before. After supper that even- 
ing, they all strolled down to the river to watch 
the boat crew practice; but Sue was not asked to 
accompany them. On their return Don told the 
divorced one of the jolly time they had had, and 
how Cousin Judith bought them each an ice cream 
soda at the drug store; but Sue made no reply. 
When she went to bed she did not, like the others, 


Sue Gets a Divorce 


183 


go to the Little Mother for a good night kiss. In 
her room she noticed that the covers of her bed 
had not been turned down, as usual, or her night 
robe laid out. Becky ’s bed, across the room, had 
been remembered with loving care by Judith, but 
Sue was no longer her adopted daughter. 

This little lack of attention sent the first real 
pang to the girl ’s heart. Silently, she got down her 
gown from the closet and turned back the covers 
of her own bed. In the morning she was about to 
call to Cousin Judith to ask what dress to put on, 
but remembered in time that she must now choose 
for herself. 

The dressmaker still came to the house every 
day to sew busily for the needy family. Judith 
was paying for all the new things with her own 
money, which she had saved from the sale of her 
pictures, and therefore Sue was not surprised 
when her pretty pink challis was laid aside and 
put into a drawer unfinished, while a gown of 
Becky’s was brought out and given the dress- 
maker to work upon. Sue told herself she must 
expect such things to happen under the new order 
of things; only — only she would have liked that 
pink dress ; it was so soft and pretty. 

The divorced one made no complaint, however 
she might feel the difference between her position 
and that of her brothers and sisters. Sue was old 


184 


The Daring Twins 


enough to understand that she must pay the pen- 
alty for her rebellion, and if at times she repented 
her stubbornness it was in secret and no word of 
regret passed her lips. Judith spoke to her with 
uniform kindliness and so did the other members 
of the family ; yet Sue realized she was an outcast, 
and no longer entitled to a place in the inner 
circle. 

This ostracism was more acutely defined when 
the Little Mother one morning called her flock 
into her room for a conference. Sue stayed away, 
being an outsider, and listened to the merry laugh- 
ter that at times penetrated the closed doors and 
saluted her ears. Undoubtedly it was a trial to 
the younger girl to he debarred from such good 
fellowship, and as she sat in her lonely corner she 
sadly recalled the jolly times she had once had in 
Cousin Judith’s pleasant room. 

“So you ’s a orfin ag’in, is yo’?” remarked 
Aunt Hyacinth, coming upon her as Sue sat nurs- 
ing her gloomy thoughts. i 4 Ain ’t yo ’ got no sense 
a’ tall, Miss Sue, to go a-flyin’ in de face o’ Prov’- 
dence dis a-way?” 

“You mind your own business, Aunt Hy.” 

“Dat ’s what I ’m doin’, honey. Mah bus ’ness 
is to see you all happy, an’ here yo’ goes an’ 
makes yo’se’f a outcast an’ a orfin, when yo’ had 
a good Li’l Motheh to tek care o’ yo’. Ain’ dere 


Sue Gets a Divorce 


185 


no way to divohce dat divohce, an’ git back in de 
sunshine ag’in’?” 

Sue sulked and did not reply. That suggestion 
of getting back into the fold again had already oc- 
curred to her, but the Articles of Adoption had 
made no provision for such a thing. Much of the 
child’s stubborn mood had vanished by this time, 
but there seemed no way of retreat open. She be- 
gan to wonder if she must pass all her life an 
“outcast an’ a orfin,” as Aunty had tersely de- 
scribed it. 

Judith, who had a shrewd idea of what was 
passing in the girl’s mind, was content to let mat- 
ters take their course. Often she longed to take 
Sue in her arms and comfort her, but dared not. 
Judith Eliot was only a young girl herself, loving 
and tender hearted, but she was rarely sagacious 
in her understanding of human nature and be- 
lieved that Sue ’s divorce would tend to benefit all 
her charges, and finally strengthen her own posi- 
tion. One gains experience not only personally, 
but from the experiences of others, and it was 
noticeable that both Becky and Don had been un- 
usually meek and circumspect since Sue’s rebel- 
lion 

Becky, indeed, did a queer thing. Going to the 
Little Mother privately she said in her earnest 
way: 


186 


The Daring Twins 


“I ’d like to get lialter-broke, Cousin Judith, 
and I wish you ’d help me. Whenever I buck the 
rules of propriety and cease to be a lady, you just 
step on my corns an’ yell 4 time. ’ I know I ’m 
awful slangy sometimes, hut by jooks I ’ll cure 
myself of the habit if I bu’st a surcingle!” 

Judith smiled and kissed her. 

“I wonder where you pick up such expres- 
sions,” she said. “But I assure you, Becky dear, 
it won’t be at all difficult to cultivate a choicer 
language, if you make the attempt. Pay attention 
to the conversation of Phoebe and Marion, and lis- 
ten to your Little Mother’s mode of speech. I as- 
sure you there is nothing either winning or clever 
in the use of slang phrases. A street gamin is 
able to employ them as readily as you do, yet may 
never aspire to refined speech. To cast your lot 
with the ignorant and uncultured, rather than 
with those of your own class, is to abandon the 
advantages of birth and refined associations.” 

‘ ‘ I used to think it was smart, ’ ’ admitted Becky, 
gloomily; “but now I see I was off my base and 
shinning up the wrong tree. But I ’ll be careful, 
after this, Cousin Judith; see if I ’m not. And I 
hope you ’ll call me down if I forget I ’m a lady 
and talk like a female she.” 

It was well-nigh impossible to cure herself of 
vulgar expressions all at once; but Becky sin- 


Sue Gets a Divorce 


187 


cerely tried to improve,’ and met with a measure 
of success. Judith never reproached her if at 
times she lapsed unwittingly into slang, for Becky 
was quick to realize her fault and a sudden flush 
of shame would often suffuse her face before the 
unseemly words were well out of her mouth. 

Don and Allerton had now become fast friends, 
being together much of the time. Don, as well as 
Becky, had softened perceptibly since the advent 
of Cousin Judith, and having acquired a hearty 
respect for Allerton, wi had proved no 4 4 molly- 
coddle,’ J the boys became congenial associates. 

The coming boat race had by this time begun 
to excite the good people of Riverdale and was a 
general topic of conversation among the villagers. 
Nearly every town on the river bank had a boat 
crew, and a sharp rivalry had for some years been 
maintained between Bayport, nine miles away, 
and Riverdale. For many seasons Bayport had 
won the prize, being practically invincible, but 
for the last two years fortune had deserted them 
and their crew lost to Riverdale. Bayport was 
naturally eager to regain its lost prestige, and its 
adversary was equally anxious to retain the hon- 
ors so hardily won. Therefore, an exciting race 
was in prospect. 


CHAPTER XVI 


THE BOAT RACE 

Phil had pulled an oar with the winning crew 
the year before, and was to be stroke oar this 
year, a position requiring nice judgment as well 
as consummate skill. Although he had now been 
working at the bank for more than three weeks, 
the young fellow was in prime physical condition, 
and the week’s practice with the crew renewed 
the hopes of the ardent admirers of the Riverdale 
boys. 

Eric came down nearly every evening to see 
them pull the scull over the smooth stretch of wa- 
ter above the bridge, and he told Phil several 
times that he had “laid some pretty stiff wagers” 
on his crew. 

Young Daring did not approve of this, and 
frankly said so. 

“We ’ve three new men in our eight,” he said, 
“and the Bayport crew is almost entirely new 
blood. No one can judge our respective merits 
till we get together, and while I hope we shall win 
I would not risk a dollar on such a doubtful 
chance . 9 ’ 


188 


The Boat Race 


189 


Eric was unconvinced, and merely laughed at 
him ; yet Phil felt that he had done his duty and 
said all that was required. Thereafter he held 
his peace. 

The race was held at Bayport this year, which 
was in that crew’s favor, although Phil and most 
of his eight were nearly as familiar with the Bay- 
port course as with their own. When Saturday 
arrived there was a general exodus from River- 
dale to the scene of the race. 

Judith had engaged a three-seated wagon to 
convey the Darings and herself. With all the talk 
about the race not a word had been said to Sue 
about her going to Bayport with them. Silently 
the “ outcast’ ’ listened to the plans for the ex- 
cursion, believing she was destined to remain at 
home. She had a great longing to go, for such 
diversions were few in their quiet lives, but by her 
own act she had withdrawn from the inner circle 
and with stolid resolve she determined none should 
guess her disappointment or remorse. 

There was an early dinner this Saturday noon, 
and when the wagon drew up at the door and the 
Darings were hurrying to get their hats and 
wraps, Cousin Judith said to Sue, who sat soberly 
in a corner : 

“Won’t you go with us, dear? There is plenty 
of room.” 


190 


The Daring Twins 


Sue gave a gasp of amazement. 

4 4 But, I — I ’m out of it, you know, Cousin Ju- 
dith. I — I ’m not one of your children,’ ’ she 
stammered. 

4 4 Come as my guest, then. Do you suppose I 
have ceased to love you, Sue ? I ’m not your Lit- 
tle Mother any more — more ’s the pity — but I shall 
always remain your affectionate Cousin Judith. 
It would please me to have you come with us to- 
day, and enjoy yourself.” 

Sue’s eyes were sparkling. Without a word, 
except a murmured 4 4 thank you, Cousin Judith!” 
she rushed for her hat and joined the others in 
the wagon. 

It was a great day for the Darings and proved 
a delightful outing, although alas, the Riverdale 
crew went down to defeat. 

An accident caused it, of course ; otherwise, the 
race was surely Riverdale ’s. 

Phil led his crew over the course with masterful 
generalship, starting with slow, steady strokes, 
without regard for the lead of Bayport, and then 
gradually increasing the count until near the end 
Riverdale overtook their opponents and shot ir- 
resistibly into the lead. They were two boat 
lengths ahead and still gaining when one of the 
new men 4 4 caught a crab” and threw the entire 
crew into confusion. The scull swung half around 


The Boat Race 


191 


and before headway could be recovered Bayport 
passed them and won the race. 

Riverdale people had been lustily cheering 
when they saw their boat surely forging to the 
front and a certain winner, as they thought; but 
now a groan of dismay went up that was drowned 
by the cheers of the exultant Bayporters. 

Phoebe was nearly ready to cry, while Becky and 
Don were savage with grief. 

“ Never mind, my dears,’ ’ said Cousin Judith, 
cheerfully. “ There is no dishonor in such a de- 
feat and Phil certainly did his part splendidly.” 

That was the general verdict, and Riverdale 
spectators crowded around Phil and congratulated 
him on the fine showing he had made. 

In a shiny top-buggy Eric Spaythe had sat be- 
side Marion Randolph, at a point overlooking the 
entire river. He had proved very agreeable com- 
pany up to the finish of the race, laughing and jok- 
ing in his cheery way and assuring Marion time 
and again that Riverdale was sure to win. At the 
final catastrophy he seemed overcome by horror. 
His eyes bulged; his lips trembled; he fell silent 
and moody. 

“Come; let’s get home!” he suddenly ex- 
claimed, and without awaiting reply he whipped 
up the nag and dashed away at a break-neck speed 
that made everyone who saw him wonder what 


192 


The Daring Twins 


was the matter. Marion, greatly annoyed by this 
churlish proceeding on the part of her escort, re- 
fused to make any comment. Eric scarcely spoke 
a pleasant word to her all the way back to River- 
dale. However, as they drove up the street to her 
house he suddenly seemed to remember that he 
had acted like a boor and said apologetically: 

4 ‘ Don ’t think me rude, please. My whole heart 
was set on Riverdale winning that race, and I 
guess my disappointment made me forget myself. 
You won’t bear any grudge against me, will 
you?” he continued, a little anxiously. 

“Most certainly not,” answered Marion coldly. 
“I thank you for the courtesy shown me — before 
you forgot yourself.” 

Then she hurried into the house, leaving Eric 
staring agape and wondering if he had made a 
fool of himself and lost more than his bets on the 
race. 

Cousin Judith did not hurry her brood home, 
for it was still early. She carried the Darings to 
a cool little restaurant where they feasted on ice 
cream and cakes to their hearts ’ content and soon 
forgot the humiliation of their brother’s defeat. 

Judith placed little Sue by her side and saw 
she was as liberally served as the others. The 
girl was unusually silent, however, and once Miss 
Eliot noticed that her dark eyes were flooded with 
tears. 


The Boat Race 


193 


On her way home Sue laid her head on the Lit- 
tle Mother’s lap and began to sob, gently at first 
but with increasing bitterness, while her brothers 
and sisters regarded her with unfeigned amaze- 
ment. 

Judith stroked the soft hair and let the burst 
of grief exhaust itself. 

“You — you Ve been so kind to me,” whispered 
Sue, raising her tear-stained face to look appeal- 
ingly into the gentle countenance above her, ‘ ‘ that 
I — I — I ’m drea ’fully ’shamed of myself! Don’t 
you s’pose you — could — adopt me again?” 

* ‘ I think so, ’ ’ said the Little Mother gravely. 

The clouds cleared then and Sue was presently 
smiling again. As soon as they reached home 
she marched directly over to the Randolph man- 
sion and found Doris. When she returned she 
said shyly, in the presence of the entire family : 

“I ’ve ’pologized to Doris an’ told her she is n’t 
a hypocrite; and I ’m sorry — drea ’fully sorry — I 
disobeyed Cousin Judith and acted so naughty.” 

“Good for you, Puss !” cried Phil, who had just 
come in. “Why, this consoles me for the loss of 
the race!” 

Sue beamed with pleasure and J udith gathered 
the girl in her arms and kissed her. 

“I call you all to witness,” she said, “that this 
is the child of my adoption. We won’t need to sign 


194 


The Daring Twins 


papers this time, because you will all know that 
Sue and I belong to each other hereafter and can 
never be divorced. Is it not so, my dear?” 

“Yes, indeed, Little Mother!” replied Sue, 
smiling happily. 


CHAPTER XVII 


IN THE TOILS 

When Eric and Phil met at their desks on Mon- 
day morning the banker’s son was “savage as a 
meat-ax/ ’ He scowled and muttered over his 
work and slammed the big books here and there 
as if he owed them a grudge. 

Phil paid no attention to this exhibition of tem- 
per, which he believed due to the failure of River- 
dale to win the boat race. He knew that Eric had 
been betting heavily with his cronies and the Bay- 
port people, and since the young man was already 
deeply in debt these added losses might affect 
him, seriously. So Phil devoted himself quietly 
to work and let Eric rave. 

Gradually the young fellow quieted down. He 
was in no mood for work that day, and paid little 
attention to the books. But he smoked so many 
cigarettes, one after another, that the air was 
blue, and Mr. Boothe left his coop long enough to 
request Eric to desist from choking him with the 
offensive fumes. 

“I am not well, ,, added the cashier; “so I ask 
you to be considerate.” 


195 


196 


The Baring Twins 


Eric tossed his cigarette away and Mr. Boothe 
returned to his coop. 

“Phil,” said Eric, abruptly, “do you know 
where I can borrow some money ? ’ ’ 

“Perhaps your father will let you have it,” 
was the reply. 

“The gov ’nor! Never. He ’d haul me over 
the coals if he knew I was hard up on my princely 
salary of eighteen a week. ’ ’ 

Phil made no comment. Said Eric, after a 
period of thought: 

“I ’m told the loan-sharks in St. Louis will ad- 
vance a fellow money on his prospects. I wonder 
if they ’d help me out of this hole. I ’m the only 
son of a well-to-do banker, and will inherit a re- 
spectable lump of money, some day. Do you sup- 
pose they ’d help me, Phil?” 

“I don’t know, Eric. Such money lenders 
would be sure to demand a heavy interest.” 

“That ’s all right. It ’s worth something to 
get my fist on the money when I want it. ’ ’ 

“What is it for?” asked Daring. “Why do 
you need this money?” 

“To pay some of those infernal debts.” 

“How much better off will you be afterward, 
Eric? Would n’t you contract more debts right 
away?” 

“That ’s w business,” growled the other. 


In the Toils 


197 


“Don’t you begin preaching to me, Phil Daring, 
for I won’t stand for it,” he added, glaring 
angrily at his fellow clerk. 

Phil said no more, but he was sad and ill at 
ease. Eric was no longer the genial, winning fel- 
low of former days. Since he had begun to spend 
money so recklessly and to run into debt, his char- 
acter and disposition seemed to have altered for 
the worse. The thing Phil dreaded more than 
anything else was another raid on the bank 
money, with more of those audacious false rec- 
ords to cover up the defalcations: He was help- 
less to interfere, but none the less was he 
sincerely sorry for both Eric and his father, 
knowing that exposure was bound to follow 
sooner or later. 

Singularly enough, Mr. Spaythe seemed blind 
to his son’s reckless extravagance. A thoughtful 
man, intent upon the intricate details of his bank- 
ing business and absorbed in loans, notes and dis- 
counts, interests and important matters of a like 
character, the banker seemed not to notice Eric’s 
elaborate costumes or the fact that he passed 
much of his spare time in association with the 
fast set of the village, whose rendezvous was the 
hotel bar. On the contrary, Mr. Spaythe seemed 
contented with the thought that his son and heir 
was connected with his business and apparently 
doing his work faithfully and well. 


198 


The Daring Twins 


On Wednesday Mr. Bootlie was suffering from 
a bad headache when he came to work. It soon 
became so much worse that Phil had to assist him 
to reach his home — a little cottage not far away — 
where the cashier lived with a maiden sister. 

When Phil came back he went into the private 
office and reported the matter to Mr. Spaythe. 
The banker at once telephoned Dr. Jenkins to at- 
tend Mr. Boothe, and then in person took his 
cashier’s place in the teller’s “cage.” 

Next day Mr. Boothe was still too ill to appear 
at the bank. Dr. Jenkins said it would be lucky 
if he managed to break up the fever, but in any 
event his patient could not resume his duties be- 
fore the following Monday morning. 

While his father was taking the cashier’s place 
Eric was silent and attentive to his work. But, 
Mr. Spaythe could ill afford to devote his entire 
time to the counting room, so he often called his 
son to assist in cashing checks and receiving de- 
posits. Eric attended to these details so intelli- 
gently that on Friday Mr. Spaythe gave him com- 
plete charge of that important department, thus 
gaining for himself the liberty of devoting his at- 
tention to other pressing matters that had ac- 
cumulated on his own desk. 

That same afternoon, when the banker stepped 
into the counting room to secure a memorandum, 
Eric said to him: 


In the Toils 


199 


4 ‘ Would n’t it be a good idea, sir, to give Phil 
the combination of the safe! We ’re behind with 
the books, and he ’ll have to come down nights 
and catch up with the work — at least until Boothe 
gets back into harness.” 

“Yes,” said Mr. Spaythe; “you may give Dar- 
ing the combination. Here is an extra key to the 
side door, also. ’ ’ Then, he turned to his youthful 
clerk and nodded kindly. “I ’m sorry to force 
this extra work upon you, Phil, but Mr. Boothe’s 
illness leaves us very short-handed, and you may 
expect compensation for your extra hours.” 

Phil was not only annoyed at this, but posi- 
tively frightened. He had surprised a curious 
look upon Eric’s face when he asked his father to 
give Phil the secret combination of the safe. In 
a small establishment like Spaythe ’s Bank both 
the books and the supply of currency were kept 
in the one big safe. At this juncture, when many 
uncomfortable suspicions were rife in his brain, 
Phil much preferred not to have such responsibil- 
ity thrust upon him. 

“I ’d rather not know the combination, sir,” 
he ventured to say, knowing he appeared con- 
fused and embarrassed. 

Mr. Spaythe was plainly surprised and gave 
him a hard look. 

“Why not!” he asked. 


200 


The Baring Twins 


“It is a — a — great responsibility, sir,” the 
young man explained. 

“Nonsense, Daring. I trust you, fully. As 
fully as I do Eric or Mr. Boothe.” 

“Can’t I make up the work on the books some 
other way — during the noon hour?” 

“You ’re silly, Phil,” declared Eric, sharply. 
“Better come down here quietly after supper 
and do the work in an easy and proper way. It 
is n ’t likely to last but a night or two. ’ ’ 

“I think Mr. Boothe will be able to resume his 
duties by Monday morning, ’ ’ added Mr. Spaythe ; 
and then, as if the matter was settled, he walked 
into his room. 

Phil resumed his work with an uneasy sense 
of impending misfortune. After banking hours 
Eric made up the teller’s account of receipts and 
disbursements and gave Phil a copy that he might 
enter the items on the books in detail. Then he 
counted the cash and put it away in the safe, ^ex- 
plaining to his unwilling colleague the way to 
work the combination. After this Eric departed, 
leaving Phil alone in the bank, where he worked 
steadily until time for supper. 

When he went home he confided to Phoebe this 
new complication that had arisen. 

“I ’m almost certain that Eric has some des- 
perate scheme in his head,” said he. “He needs 


In the Toils 


201 


money badly to pay his gambling debts, and I ’m 
afraid he will try to get it in such a way as to im- 
plicate me and divert suspicion from himself.’ ’ 

“Why do you imagine that?” inquired his twin. 

1 ‘ Because he was so anxious that I should know 
the combination and have a key to the bank. 
What ought I to do, dear?” 

“Your simple duty,” said Phoebe positively. 
“Why, Phil, no harm can possibly come to an 
honest fellow who does his duty! Don’t worry 
about Eric and his deeds. He could not injure 
you if he tried, and really, I don’t believe he will 
try. Eric has a kindly heart, and his main fault 
is that he has become a bit wild and reckless. ’ ’ 

“He ’s changed a good deal lately, Phoebe,” 
was the quiet answer. 

Phil promptly returned to the bank, let himself 
in by the side door, opened the safe and took out 
the books. For two hours he worked under the 
glare of the electric light, before his task was 
finished. No one came near to interrupt him. As 
he slid the big books into the compartment of the 
safe reserved for them he glanced at the neat 
piles of bills and bags of gold and an involuntary 
shiver of fear swept over him. 

Saturday morning the bank was very busy. 
Eric sat in Mr. Boothe ’s cage and waited upon the 
customers in a very business-like manner. He 


202 


The Daring Twins 


was so quick and accurate in handling the money, 
with a pleasant word for each one who ap- 
proached his wicket, that when Mr. Spaythe came 
in now and then to see that everything was pro- 
gressing properly the boy won his father’s grati- 
fied praise. 

At one o’clock they closed the doors, as was 
usual on Saturdays, and it did not take Eric long 
to arrange his cash, pile it away in the safe and 
turn his statement of the day’s transactions over 
to Phil. 

“What, through already?” asked his father, 
coming in at that moment. 

“Yes, sir. Here ’s the balance sheet you asked 
for, all made out correctly. I ’m in a bit of a 
hurry, as I ’ve arranged to go to St. Louis for 
over Sunday.” 

Mr. Spaythe frowned. 

“I did not know of this plan,” he said curtly. 
“Why are you making the trip, Eric?” 

“To visit Ned Thurber. He has invited me to 
stay with him, so it will only cost me railroad 
fares. I ’ll be back in time for work on Monday, 
sir,” he added carelessly. 

Mr. Spaythe stood regarding his son silently 
for a moment. He reflected that the boy had be- 
haved admirably these past few days, filling Mr. 
Boothe’s place quite effectively. The banker was 


In the Toils 


203 


also engaged with other matters that required his 
immediate attention. So he said: 

4 ‘Very well. Go, if you wish to.” 

Eric accompanied his father into the private 
office, merely bestowing upon Phil a nod of fare- 
well. It was rather mean of him to take a vaca- 
tion and throw all the work of bookkeeping upon 
young Daring, but Eric was not noted for his con- 
sideration to others. 

Pausing before his father’s desk he said in a 
hesitating way : 

“I suppose it ’s all right to leave Phil in charge 
of the cash?” 

Mr. Spaythe turned upon him, sharply. 

“Why not?” he said. “The Darings are hon- 
est enough. I would have trusted his father with 
every penny I owned, at any time. ’ ’ 

“Oh, I suppose Phil ’s safe,” returned Eric, 
carelessly. “But he ’s a new clerk, and there ’s 
a lot of currency on hand to carry over Sunday. 
So the thought struck me — ” 

He paused, for his father was paying no atten- 
tion to what he said. Instead, his practiced eye 
was shrewdly scanning the balance sheet. It told 
the amount of cash on hand in bills, gold and sil- 
ver, and recorded all checks, drafts and notes de- 
posited during the day. Finding the tally correct 
Mr. Spaythe laid down the paper and turned 
again to his son. 


204 


The Daring Twins 


“I ’ll trust Phil,” he said. 

Eric went away, smiling to himself. 1 ‘Just 
what I wanted,” he muttered. “The gov ’nor 
will remember this conversation afterward.” 

Passing down the street he told every acquaint- 
ance he met that he was off for St. Louis by the 
four o’clock train. At the station he made his 
journey known to the group of loungers and 
shouted a rather boisterous good-by when the 
train drew in and he boarded it. He even waved 
his hat from the back platform until he had passed 
out of sight. Among those who thus watched 
Eric’s departure was Donald Daring, who an- 
nounced the fact at supper that Eric Spaythe had 
gone to St. Louis by the four o’clock train. 

“Must you work at those dreadful books to- 
night, Phil?” asked Phoebe. 

“Only for an hour or so, dear. I put in such 
steady work this afternoon that a little more will 
get things in shape. ’ ’ 

“I ’ll go down with you, then, and keep you 
company,” she announced. 

As they walked along the street together in the 
cool of early evening Phil was very thoughtful. 
Finally, he said to the girl : 

“I don’t believe Eric has gone to St. Louis, 
Phoebe. ’ ’ 

“Why, he must have gone!” she exclaimed. 
“Don saw him on board the train.” 


In the Toils 


205 


“I know; but in spite of tliat I ’ve a queer feel- 
ing — a sort of suspicion — that he ’s playing us a 
trick. ’ ’ 

“Have you, Phil? But why?” 

“I can’t explain it. You see, since Boothe has 
been away Eric has been free to do as he pleased. 
He ’s in desperate need of money, just now; but, 
although I ’ve been on the watch, not a single 
crooked transaction have I been able to discover 
— except one.” 

“What was that?” 

“I found on his desk yesterday a scrap of paper 
with my name scribbled over it in many styles 
of handwriting. Anyone seeing it would have 
thought I had been trying to create a lot of dif- 
ferent signatures. I tore the paper in two, 
crumpled it up, and tossed it in the waste basket. 
But, afterward, I decided the thing ought to be 
burnt, and searched for the scraps. They were n’t 
among the other papers, for I went through the 
entire contents of the basket. Some one had 
taken them, and it could be no one but Eric.” 

Phoebe looked grave at this. 

“What does it mean, Phil?” 

“I ’ve tried to think. I know of two or three 
forged deposit slips, aside from that one of Mr. 
Martin’s. Then there was the forged check of 
Mrs. Bandolph — I ’m positive it was forged. 


206 


The Daring Twins 


These things are sure to be discovered some day, 
and then the charge of forgery and embezzlement 
will lie between Eric and me.” 

“Oh, Phil!” 

“As Eric is Mr. Spaythe ’s own son it will be 
easy for him to accuse me. If I tell Mr. Spaythe 
what I know he will ask why I did n’t report it at 
the time. I ’m in a net, Phoebe, and Eric knows it. 
If he can save himself at my expense, he won’t 
hesitate .’ 9 

1 ‘ I see ! ’ ’ she cried, clasping her hands tightly. 
“Is n’t it dreadful, Phil?” 

“That is why I now suspect that Eric is up to 
mischief. It surprised me that he told his father 
so bluntly he was going to St. Louis. It would 
be better policy for him to keep quiet about the 
trip; but he risked Mr. Spaythe ’s anger with un- 
usual boldness. And he took pains to advertise 
his going to the whole town — even to let people 
see him ride away in the train.” 

“What could be his object?” inquired Phoebe, 
much perplexed. 

“To be able to prove an alibi, I imagine.” 

The twins walked on in silence for a time and 
were just passing the railway station when Phil 
had an idea. 

“Come in with me,” he whispered, and fol- 
lowed by Phoebe he walked calmly up to the 


In the Toils 


207 


agent’s window. The man was not busy, as no 
trains were due at this time. 

“Hello, Wakefield,” called Phil, genially. 

“Hello, Phil. Good evening, Miss Daring,” 
responded the agent, recognizing them. 

“I came in to pay for Eric’s ticket to St. Louis. 
He happened to be short of currency, but said 
you ’d let him have the ticket, and I could drop in 
and settle for it to-night.” 

Wakefield seemed surprised. 

“Mr. Spaythe did n’t buy a through ticket,” 
he explained. “He only took one to Canton. Said 
he ’d buy his ticket and sleeper from there on. I 
remember thinking that was a queer way to do. 
If he was short of money, Eric knew I ’d help him 
out.” 

Phoebe trembled as she pressed Phil’s arm. 

“Why, it ’s all right, then, Wakefield,” said 
Daring, calmly. “Probably he changed his mind, 
and in that case I don’t owe you anything.” 

“Not a cent. Good night, Phil. Good night, 
Miss Daring.” 

“Good night,” they answered and walked 
away. 

“You see, I was right,” said the hoy, when 
they were on the street again. “Canton is only 
ten miles away, and Eric plans to leave the train 
there and come back.” 


208 


The Daring Twins 


“When?” 

“Some time to-night. He means to rob the 
safe and get away with the money. That will im- 
plicate me, you see, as I ’m the only one except 
Mr. Spaythe and Boothe that knows the combina- 
tion — and the cashier is sick in bed. ’ ’ 

“Oh, Phil ! I ’m sure your suspicion is too hor- 
rible to be true. ’ ’ 

“Why, it ’s so simple that it must be true. 
Under the circumstances it is the natural thing 
for Eric to do. He is n’t so very clever, although 
perhaps he thinks he has laid a deep plot to ruin 
me. The queer thing about it is that it ’s liable 
to succeed.” 

They had reached the bank now. Phil opened 
the side door and ushered Phoebe into the large 
back room where he did his work. He turned on 
the electric lights, pulled down the shades to all 
the windows and then opened the safe and got out 
the books. Phoebe, perched upon Eric’s vacant 
stool, watched him thoughtfully. Her face was 
pale as wax and she had nervous, trembling fits 
that she could not control. 

“ I ’m glad I am with you, ’ ’ said she, presently. 
“If you are accused, I can swear you did not touch 
the money.” 

Phil bent over and kissed her, but made no 
reply. Putting all his mind upon the books he 


In the Toils 


209 


methodically pursued his work for an hour or so, 
until all the entries had been made and his task 
finished. Then he closed the ledgers with a sigh 
of relief, put them away, and locked the safe. 

“Who knows/ ’ he said, turning to Phoebe with 
a wan smile, “but that this is the last bit of work 
I shall do for Spaythe’s Bank? If my suspicions 
are correct, on Monday morning the safe will be 
found to have been robbed, and then I must face 
accusations and probable disgrace.” 

By this time the girl had recovered most of her 
composure. She was still pale, but had been 
busily thinking during that tedious hour, trying 
to find some way to save her twin brother. 

‘ ‘ Do you know exactly how much cash is in that 
safe now?” she asked. 

“Of course, Phoebe. It is all entered upon the 
books, in black and white, and Mr. Spaythe has a 
copy of the amounts, besides.” 

She looked carefully around the room. At the 
very back of the building, facing the safe, was one 
window which opened upon an unused yard at 
the rear. The window was just then covered with 
a thick shade. Phoebe took the desk shears, 
walked deliberately to this window, and punched 
two small holes in the shade. 

“What on earth are you doing?” asked her 
brother, in amazement. 


210 


The Daring Twins 


“Phil, we ’re going to play we ’re detectives, 
yon and I. Go outside, and around to this win- 
dow, and find out if you can see the safe through 
the holes I have made. If not, I must make them 
larger. ’ ’ 

Phil obeyed, still puzzled as to her meaning. 
When he returned to her, he reported that the 
holes were about on a level with his eyes, when he 
stood in the back yard, and that the safe was 
plainly visible through the tiny openings if one 
stood with an eye close to the windowpane. 

“Very well, ,, said she, nodding with satisfac- 
tion. “What time is it now?” 

“Nearly ten.” 

“We shall have a long wait, but we must n’t 
mind that. Let us go, now.” 

Phil waited until she reached the door; then he 
put out the lights and joined her. As they passed 
out he locked the door and put the key away in 
his pocket. 

“What now?” he asked. 

“Let us take a walk up the street, for a block 
or two,” she replied, in a whisper; and he fol- 
lowed her obediently. Although it was Saturday 
night, this part of the town was practically de- 
serted. There was a light in the laundry office 
across the way and a girl stood in the door of a 
candy shop and nodded to the twins vacantly. 


In the Toils 


211 


Half a block up the street was the printing office, 
but the lights in it went out before they reached 
it, and Mr. Fellows, the editor, gave the Darings a 
pleasant 4 4 Good night !” as they passed by while 
he was locking the door. 

Phoebe crossed over into the next street, which 
was merely a lane, and turning about began to 
retrace her steps. Phil clung to her arm and let 
her lead him. Here there was no light to guide 
them save the dim glow of the stars. The moon 
would not be up for some hours yet. They had to 
feel their way carefully for a time, but ere long 
they had reached a position in the rear of the 
bank and entered the unused yard. From a pile 
of boxes dumped behind a neighboring grocery 
Phil brought two to serve as seats, for now he 
guessed Phoebe’s purpose and fully approved the 
venturesome undertaking. 

They sat in silence for a time, their backs 
against the brick wall of the bank. 

4 4 How will Eric get back from Canton?” the 
girl inquired, musingly. 

44 I don’t know. IJe might drive over, and re- 
turn the same way. Let me see ; there ’s another 
train to St. Louis that passes here at one-thirty. 
It does n’t stop at Riverdale, but it does at Can- 
ton.” 

4 4 That ’s it!” she exclaimed, eagerly. 4 4 That ’s 


212 


The Daring Twins 


his plan, Phil, I ’m sure. Eric will get a livery 
horse at Canton, drive over here, and return in 
time to catch the one-thirty flyer for St. Louis. It 
will be due at Canton at about two o’clock, won’t 
it?” 

‘ ‘ Sooner than that. The flyer will make the ten 
miles in fifteen minutes, easily.” 

“But it will take Eric an hour and a half to 
drive it, in the night. That means he must get 
here, do what# he has to do, and leave by twelve 
o’clock — or soon after. Why, we won’t have long 
to wait, after all.” 

“Not if we are figuring right, Phoebe. After 
all, this is only guesswork on our part.” 

“I ’m sure we are right, Phil. As you say, the 
natural thing for one in Eric’s position to do is 
just what we expect he will do. Let us be patient, 
and we will soon know the truth. If nothing hap- 
pens by half-past twelve, then we may go home 
and go to bed.” 

“And rest in peace,” he added, with a light 
laugh that was not mirthful. “I hope that will be 
our fate.” 

“So do I, Phil — with all my heart.” 

It was a tedious wait, however, for they were 
keyed up to a high pitch of excitement and the 
minutes seemed to drag with teazing languid- 
ness. But suddenly, as they talked together in 


In the Toils . 


213 


soft whispers, Phoebe glanced around toward the 
window and then seized PhiPs arm in a warning 
grasp. The back room of the bank was lighted. 

The girl put her eye to one peephole and the 
boy looked through the other. They saw Eric 
standing in the room and glancing about him with 
fearful, yet keenly observant eyes. The inspec- 
tion seemed to satisfy him, for after tying his 
handkerchief over the one electric light globe 
which he had ventured to turn on, in order to dim 
the strength of its rays, he went straight to the 
safe and began to fumble with the combination. 
A few moments later the heavy door swung open. 

Again Eric glanced around, but could not know 
that two intent eyes were regarding his slightest 
movement. He hastily turned*over the packets of 
bills until he found the one he desired, which he 
thrust into an inner pocket. Then he took a can- 
vas sack, filled with gold, and this filled his coat 
pocket completely and had to be crowded in. The 
next moment he closed the door and set the lock. 

It was all done so quickly that Phoebe found she 
had held her breath during the entire scene. 
While she panted with excitement and her heart 
fluttered wildly, Eric removed his handkerchief 
from the globe and turned off the light. 

They both listened eagerly now, but so stealthy 
were the young man’s movements that no fur- 


214 


The Daring Twins 


tiier sound reached their ears. He must have ef- 
fected his escape from the bank a long time be- 
fore the twins ventured to stir. 

“Phoebe,” said Phil bitterly, “it is evident 
that I We stolen a stack of bills and a bag of gold. 
The fact can easily be proven against me, any- 
how. ’ y 

“Not yet,” returned the girl, in a firm, decided 
tone. “Come with me, Phil.” 

She began to make her way around the building 
to the side door. 

“What are you going to do?” he asked. 

“I ’m going to block Eric’s wicked conspiracy 
and save you,” she replied. “Open that door, 
and let us go in. ’ 9 


CHAPTER XVIII 


a sister's love 

Phil looked up and down the dark, deserted 
street. Eric had made off so quietly that not a 
footfall had been heard. But no one was abroad 
to see him, however much noise he might have 
made. 

The back room of Spaythe’s Bank was witness- 
ing a succession of curious scenes this eventful 
night. Phil had opened the safe again and was 
counting the money. It was a long count, and 
must needs be accurate; but Phoebe, now cool as 
ice, helped him in her methodical way and it was 
not necessary to inspect more of the currency 
than the packets of bank notes and the gold. 

‘ ‘ Whew ! 9 9 whistled Phil, when the final figures 
had been made. 1 ‘ Eric was n ’t at all bashful, was 
he? He grabbed more than three thousand dol- 
lars !” 

“Three thousand, three hundred and ninety/ ’ 
repeated Phoebe, jotting down the exact amount 
on a slip of paper. 6 ‘ All right, Phil ; that is what 
we wanted to know. Now, put this dreadful stuff 
away . 9 9 


215 


216 


The Baring Twins 


He complied. There was a queer feeling in the 
young fellow’s chest, as if iron fingers were grip- 
ping his heart. His worst fears had been realized 
and he had become the innocent victim of his 
former friend’s diabolical scheming. 

As the Daring twins walked home together 
through the still night, arm in arm, they ex- 
changed few words. Phil reflected that his busi- 
ness career was practically ruined. Here in 
Riverdale, his old home, he would be scorned and 
reviled as a common thief, and wherever he might 
go in the big outside world his disgrace would be 
sure to follow him. And what of Eric Spaythe, 
the false friend who had planned his downfall 
and would profit by it? With means to pay his 
debts, and so prevent his father’s knowledge of 
his past extravagance, Eric would doubtless be 
more cautious in the future. In time he might 
become the proprietor of the bank he had to-night 
so cleverly robbed. As for the false entries on 
the books, made to cover the minor thefts that 
had preceded this coup, all evidence would point 
conclusively to Phil Daring as the culprit. That 
poor and struggling youth was to become the 
scapegoat to shield Eric Spaythe, the rich bank- 
er’s son. 

Phil groaned in spirit, but believed himself to 
be absolutely helpless. 


A Sister’s Love 


217 


Phoebe, on the contrary, had recovered her 
cheerfulness, and as she kissed her twin good 
night in the hall she whispered : 

“Forget about Eric, dear. There ’s nothing 
to worry about, so try to get some sleep. Now 
that we know the truth, and just what to expect, 
it will be easy to save you from this contemptible 
plot.” 

Phil clasped the girl close in his arms. It was 
good to feel that Phoebe, the one person he loved 
most in all the world, knew his innocence and be- 
lieved in him. He must be brave and face the 
future calmly, for her sweet sake. 

In his room he looked at his watch. Two 
o ’clock. By this time Eric was well on his way to 
St. Louis. Phil sighed, went to bed, and having 
a clear conscience was presently sound asleep. 

Phoebe pleaded a headache next morning and 
did not go to church with the others. Phil, sol- 
emn eyed and with careworn features, accom- 
panied Cousin Judith and the children and did 
his best to keep his thoughts on the sermon. 

From her window Phoebe endeavored to watch 
the movements of old Miss Halliday, but found 
the woman keeping close to the room in which 
Gran ’pa Eliot was confined. Perhaps she was 
engaged in her morning’s work, but strangely 
enough the chickens had been neglected and were 
plainly calling for food and water. 


218 


The Daring Twins 


In order to ease the nervous strain of waiting 
Phoebe moved softly around the rooms occupied 
by the Darings and removed all the keys she found 
in the locks. Having carried these to her room 
she began trying them in the lock of the door that 
connected old Elaine’s chamber with her own. 
She moved carefully and silently, but to her de- 
spair none of the keys would fit. A second time 
she tried them, with no better success. While en- 
gaged in replacing the borrowed keys she hap- 
pened to think of a big bunch of old keys hanging 
in the closet of the room occupied by Sue and 
Becky. She readily found this bunch, and with it 
hurried back to her chamber. One by one the 
keys were tried and gradually her heart sank as 
they proved to he too large or too small. There 
were now hut three left on the bunch and she was 
crouching on her knees before the door when sud- 
denly she heard Elaine enter the other room. 

To her astonishment the woman was sobbing 
and muttering in the same breath, and seemed to 
be laboring under great excitement. 

“It can’t be!” Phoebe heard her say again and 
again. “It can’t he. No, no, no! — it can’t be.” 

Up and down she paced, and finally the girl 
heard her throw herself upon the bed and give 
way to a violent outburst of sobbing. 

Phoebe dared not move. Her limbs were 


A Sister's Love 


219 


cramped and numb, but she sat crouching beside 
the door until gradually Miss Halliday became 
more quiet and rose from the bed. 

6 ‘ One thing is certain, ’ ’ muttered the woman in 
a firmer tone. “No one shall know!” 

Again she paced the floor, by degrees recover- 
ing her wonted composure. The sobs and mutter- 
ings ceased. At last she left the room, and Phoebe 
breathed freely once more. Then the girl glanced 
at the bunch of keys she held. With those three 
that still remained untried lay her sole chance of 
saving PhiPs honor. 

The first was rusty and too big for the lock. 
The second turned easily, and with a sharp click 
the bolt flew back. Then Phoebe dropped her head 
in her hands and began to cry. The transition 
from despair to joy had been so sharp that it 
unnerved her; but now she was free to carry out 
her plans. 

Wiping the tears from her eyes she sighed 
deeply and rose to her feet. On turning the 
handle of the door, very softly, she found that it 
would open with perfect freedom. She put her 
head within the room a moment — just long enough 
to note that Elaine had left it in perfect order — 
and then she closed the door again. 

W ould it be wiser to act at once, or to wait 1 

Her own anxiety and excitement had, until now, 


220 


The Daring Twins 


prevented her from appreciating the evident fact 
that something unusual had occurred in the other 
part of the house which the old woman regarded 
as serious. The housekeeper was not prone to 
give way to violent outbursts of grief. 4 4 It can’t 
be ! ” she had exclaimed. What could n ’t be ! 4 4 No 
one shall know!” Elaine had cried. What could 
have happened that must be kept a secret? The 
girl’s first thought was that in some way Elaine 
had been robbed of the treasure, and Phoebe’s 
heart stood still as she contemplated that awful 
suggestion. But perhaps it was some personal 
matter not connected with Gran ’pa Eliot’s hidden 
hoard. 

Going to her window she watched in vain for 
the housekeeper to appear in the garden; then, 
unable to restrain her impatience, she ran down- 
stairs and around the corner until she came to 
the lane at the back. Pausing beside the big maple 
she looked around at the house and from her posi- 
tion saw Gran ’pa Eliot propped up in his chair 
before the window, his lusterless eyes fixedly re- 
garding the landscape spread out before him. 

The window of the next room, where he slept, 
was open, too. Phoebe could see the housekeeper 
making the bed and straightening the furniture. 

Presently, Elaine came to the window and stood 
motionless, staring across the fields as if in deep 


A Sister’s Love 


221 


thought. Phoebe shrank back into the shade of 
the maple. 

Now the woman left the window, emerged from 
the door at the head of the outside stairs, and 
quietly descended to the yard. Phoebe quitted her 
post at once and fairly flew back to the house, 
never pausing until she had regained her own 
room. Breathless from her run, she paused to 
peer from the window. Elaine was mixing food 
for her chickens. 

In a moment Phoebe was in the forbidden room. 
She went straight to the mantel and tried to pull 
it outward, as she had seen Elaine do ; but it re- 
fused to move. With a growing fear at her heart 
she examined closely the framework and finally 
noticed that one part of the carving was discolored 
more deeply than the rest, as if with constant 
handling. Pressing hard against this place, 
Phoebe desperately dragged the mantel toward 
her, and this time it swung free of the wall and 
disclosed the secret cupboard. 

Elaine had not been robbed. There were the 
neat piles of money, just as she had seen them 
from her peephole. 

Phoebe hesitated a moment. She wanted a cer- 
tain sum in bills, and another in gold, but it would 
be dangerous to count the money there. So she 
took several packets of bills and ran with them to 


222 


The Daring Twins 


her room. Returning quickly, she pushed the man- 
tel into place and proceeded to pull up a section of 
the rag carpet. A small iron ring enabled her to 
lift the trap, and a moment later she had carried 
a sack of gold through the connecting doorway and 
dumped it upon her bed. 

A swift look through the window showed that 
Elaine was preparing to ascend the stairs again; 
so Phoebe ran into the housekeeper’s chamber, let 
down the trap and rearranged the carpet. Then 
she softly retreated and closed the door after her. 

She breathed more freely now, but her task was 
not yet accomplished and the family might return 
from church at any moment. 

Opening the packets of bills she began carefully 
counting them. The first lot proved of small de- 
nominations and totalled so insignificant a sum 
that the girl was panic-stricken for fear there 
would not he enough paper money for her pur- 
pose. But the next packet proved to be all fifties 
and one-hundreds, and less than half its bulk 
sufficed to make up the amount of bills that Eric 
had abstracted from the safe. 

She counted out the gold next, and as this sack 
chanced to contain only pieces of twenty dollars 
each there was much more than she required. At 
the bank, while Phil was discovering the extent 
of Eric’s theft — when the vague idea of saving him 


A Sister's Love 


223 


first began to dawn in her mind — Phoebe had seen 
a pile of canvas bags, used to contain gold, lying 
upon a shelf. One of these she had quietly ab- 
stracted, for on it was printed in black letters: 
“Spaythe’s Bank of Riverdale.” It was a simi- 
larly marked sack which Eric had taken, and now 
the girl brought out the bag, placed the proper 
amount of gold in it, and neatly tied it up. Then 
she made a package containing both the gold and 
the bills and after winding it securely with cord 
placed it in a drawer of her bureau. 

This much being accomplished she breathed 
easier ; but it was necessary to replace the surplus 
gold and bills in the hiding places from whence 
she had taken it. She felt no hesitation in employ- 
ing a portion of Gran ’pa Eliot’s hoarded wealth 
to save her brother from an unjust accusation. It 
seemed to her quite a proper thing to do, for the 
family honor was at stake. Gran ’pa could never 
use the money, and his granddaughter was defiant 
of old Elaine ’s self imposed watch upon the treas- 
ure. Yet Phoebe would not touch a penny more 
than stern necessity compelled her to. 

Her heart bounded and then stopped beating as 
the housekeeper was heard to enter the next room 
and renew her nervous pacing up and down — up 
and down. Elaine was not likely to discover her 
loss, just yet; only at dead of night was she 


224 


The Daring Twins 


accustomed to pander to tier miserly instincts by 
counting over the money. So Phoebe took courage. 

A long time the girl sat silently awaiting an 
opportunity to restore the balance of the treasure. 
Meantime, she wondered again what had come 
over the usually methodical, self-possessed house- 
keeper to make her act in so queer a manner. No 
doubt some important event had occurred in her 
life; but what could it be! 

A chorus of merry voices announced the return 
of Cousin Judith with her brothers and sisters. 
She hesitated, half expecting Elaine would now 
leave her room, but the woman wholly disregarded 
the Darings and continued her monotonous pac- 
ing. So Phoebe concealed the money under her 
pillows and noiselessly quitting the room went 
down to meet the family. 

The sense of triumph now experienced by the 
girl made her regard Phil’s gloomy looks with 
complacency, if not with cheerfulness. She 
bustled about, helping Auntie to set the table for 
dinner and listening to the chatter of the children, 
and all the time the warm glow in her heart was 
reflected in her sparkling eyes and rosy cheeks. 

Phil looked at his sister astonished and some- 
what reproachful. Her glad laughter and flippant 
remarks made him feel that his twin was forget- 
ting the terrible fate that menaced him. Over the 


A Sister’s Love 


225 


boy’s devoted head hung a veritable Sword of 
Damocles, and it was destined to fall as soon as 
the bank was opened Monday morning. Yet here 
was Phoebe, merry and eager, joking with Becky 
and Don as she flitted through the rooms, and 
seemingly as unconscious of trouble as a dancing 
sunbeam. 

Judith, a little surprised at the girl’s high 
spirits, kissed her affectionately as she came in to 
dinner. She thought Phoebe had never looked 
more lovely than she did to-day. Phil remarked 
that fact, too. “The Belle of R-iverdale,” as she 
was often called, was really a beautiful girl ; yet, 
those who knew Phoebe best recognized the fact 
that her chief charm lay not in her fascinating 
smile, her dainty complexion, nor her magnificent 
eyes, but in the kindly, sympathetic heart that had 
never yet failed to respond to the demands of 
friendship. 

After dinner they were all seated on the front 
lawn in the shade of the big oaks, when Phoebe 
noticed old Elaine standing motionless in the back 
yard, grimly watching the group. The girl seized 
the opportunity to run to her room, grab the 
money from beneath her pillows and replace the 
bills in the cupboard back of the mantel and the 
remainder of the gold beneath the trap in the 
floor. She acted with breathless haste, not know- 


226 


The Baring Twins 


ing how much time would be allowed her; but she 
soon found there was no need of hurry. Return- 
ing to the lawn she saw that Cousin Judith had 
gone to the housekeeper and was engaging Elaine 
in conversation. 

4 ‘ My uncle is better, you say ? ’ ’ asked Miss Eliot. 

“I did not say that,” retorted the woman. “I 
merely stated that he sutf ers no pain. ’ ’ 

“Is his mind still befogged, as when I last saw 
him?” continued Judith. 

“His mind has never been befogged,” said 
Elaine, with unnecessary anger. “You will find 
he is clear-headed enough to defend himself from 
annoyances, if intruded upon.” 

Judith sighed. This creature was absolutely 
impossible to conciliate. She turned away with- 
out further remark and preferred not to see the 
half sneering, half triumphant leer on Elaine’s 
pinched features. Phoebe put her arms around 
the Little Mother and said : 

“Never mind, dear. She ’s old and unreason- 
able; but she takes good care of gran ’pa, so we 
need n’t mind her uncivil ways.” 

“Roots! I ’m half afraid of her,” remarked 
Becky, making a face at the thin figure of the 
housekeeper. 

“I ’m not,” declared Phoebe, laughing at the 
recollection of her late audacity. “Miss Halliday 


A Sister’s Love 


227 


is nothing more than a favored servant, who has 
forgotten her proper place. There ’s nothing 
fearsome about her, I ’m sure.” 

Toward evening the girl’s high spirits began to 
falter and she wandered about the house in an 
uneasy mood. Perhaps Phil’s dismal looks — for 
he could not force his countenance to seem pleas- 
ant while his heart was breaking — had something 
to do with his twin’s growing depression. Even 
Sue accused Phoebe of being cross when she sent 
her small sister to bed somewhat earlier than 
usual. 

When all the household had retired except the 
twins and Judith, they sat on the porch convers- 
ing until Miss Eliot noticed for the first time an 
air of restraint that was unusual. Fearing she 
might herself be responsible for this she pleaded 
some letters to be written as an excuse to go to 
her room, and bade them good night. 

1 i Cheer up, dear, ’ ’ said Phoebe, when their cou- 
sin had gone in. 4 4 Did n ’t I promise to save you ! ’ ’ 

“Yes; but you can’t do that, little sister. No 
one can save me.” 

“There is one way,” announced the girl, de- 
cidedly. 

Phil sat thinking. 

“Yes,” he said; “if Eric would confess, that 
would end it all. Do you imagine he will 1 ’ ’ 


228 


The Daring Twins 


“No, indeed.” 

“Nor I. I have thought of everything; but the 
snare is too strong to be broken.” 

Phoebe did not reply at once. She sat looking 
out into the night, lost in thought. Presently she 
roused herself and whispered: 

“Phil, will you take a little walk with me?” 

4 ‘ I don ’t mind. I ’m not liable to sleep much to- 
night, so there ’s little use in going to bed. ’ ’ 

“Wait for me a moment, ” she said. 

Phil waited. She soon returned with a bulky 
newspaper packet partly concealed beneath her 
cloak. 

Together they strolled down the street toward 
the town. It was after ten o ’clock, and on Sunday 
evening Riverdale was like a deserted village. 

“We ’re getting to be regular night owls, are n’t 
we?” asked Phcebe, with a nervous tremor in her 
voice. 

“Yes, indeed. But why are we prowling around 
town to-night? Would n’t it be more pleasant to 
walk in the lanes ? ’ ’ 

“We ’re going to the bank,” said the girl. 

Phil stopped short to look at her, but the over- 
hanging branches of a tree hid her face. With 
a sigh he walked on, deciding to let her have her 
way. But he could think of no good reason for 
this absurd whim. 


A Sister’s Love 


229 


When they reached the bank Phoebe said : 

“We will go in, Phil. Unlock the door.” 

Mechanically he obeyed. Dully he wondered 
what she was going to do. But it did not matter, 
and he would soon know. 

“Now,” continued the girl, when they were in- 
side, “open the safe.” 

“Why, Phoebe!” he gasped, glancing at her 
fearfully. “You ’re not going to — ” 

“No; I ’m not going to rob Mr. Spay the. Open 
the safe, Phil — quick!” 

He leaned over and set the combination. Then 
slowly the heavy door swung open. 

Phoebe breathed a sigh of relief. Hastily un- 
wrapping her bundle she placed a bag of gold on 
one shelf and a thick packet of bank bills on an- 
other — in just the places from whence Eric had 
abstracted the money the night before. 

“All right, dear; you may lock the safe now.” 

Phil was bewildered. His eyes roamed from his 
sister’s smiling face to the safe, and back again. 

“Wha — what have you done!” he stammered. 

“I ’ve restored the missing cash. Lock the safe, 
Phil, before it ’s robbed again.” 

“Phoebe!” 

“Don’t look so wild, dear. Can’t you under- 
stand you are saved — that there will be no ex- 
posure of a theft to-morrow morning! Lock the 
safe, and let us go home.” 


230 


The Daring Twins 


He could not realize it, even yet. Still dazed 
and wondering he locked the safe and followed 
Phoebe into the street. They were halfway home 
before he asked : 

“Where did you find Erie?” 

“I have n’t seen Eric,” she replied. 

“Then where did the money come from?” 

“It ’s my secret, Phil; you must n’t ask.” 

“But I must know, Phoebe. Why, it ’s — it ’s 
amazing!” 

“Seems so, does n’t it?” 

“It ’s impossible! Three thousand — ” 

“ — Three hundred and ninety dollars,” she in- 
terrupted, with a laugh. “It ’s all there, dear ; all 
back in the safe.” 

“It ’s a fortune! Where did you get it?” he 
persisted. 

“Now, Phil, I ’ve forbidden you to ask ques- 
tions, and I mean it,” she declared, very seriously. 
“It is a secret which I can’t reveal. Not now, 
anyway. ’ ’ 

“Did Cousin Judith — ” 

“It ’s no use, dear; I won’t tell.” 

He strode along in silence, wondering if it were 
really true. They were dreadfully poor, he knew, 
and Cousin Judith’s money was tied up in an 
annuity. Where could Phoebe obtain three thou- 
sand, three hundred and ninety dollars in cur- 


A Sister's Love 


231 


rency ? — and on Sunday, too ! Suddenly a thought 
caused him to start. 

“You have n’t borrowed it of the Randolphs?” 
he demanded in a horrified tone. 

The suggestion made Phoebe laugh again. 

“Guess away!” she said, lightly. 

“We would never be able to repay such a loan 
— not for years and years, if at all,” he said 
miserably. 

“That need not worry you,” she observed. 
“Why don’t you give it up, Phil? Be content 
until the time comes when I can tell you every- 
thing. It ’s the best way. Can’t you trust me — 
Phoebe — your twin?” 

He caught her in his arms and kissed her ten- 
derly, while the first sense of freedom he had ex- 
perienced since the robbery swept over him. 

“Trust you? Of course I can, my darling!” he 
said 


CHAPTER XIX 


THE WAY OF THE TRANSGRESSOR 

Phil had a restless night; but he slept a little, 
nevertheless. His chief source of worry had been 
removed by his sister’s mysterious action, yet the 
wonderment of it all remained, carrying with it 
an intense excitement whenever he thought of the 
probable outcome of this strange adventure. 

On Monday morning he was up bright and early, 
anxiously awaiting the time to go to work. Phoebe, 
looking at him with wistful eyes, kissed her 
brother good-by and said: 

4 ‘Good luck, Phil. Whatever happens, remem- 
ber that I, and all who love you, will stand by you 
to the end.” 

But nothing exceptional happened at the bank. 

Mr. Boothe, looking a little more pale and worn 
than usual, arrived at the same time Phil did, 
and while he was carrying the cash from the safe 
to his cage, preparatory to counting it, Eric 
sauntered in and took his seat at the desk. 

He gave his fellow clerk a brief nod and looked 
curiously at Mr. Boothe. Said Phil, attempting 
to be cordial : 


232 


The Way of the Transgressor 233 

“Back from St. Louis already, Eric?” 

“Yes.” 

“How did you find Ned Thurber?” 

“Oh, Ned ’s all right.” 

“When did you get home?” 

“Six, this morning.” 

Usually talkative, Eric seemed determined to 
he chary of speech on this occasion; but perhaps 
he was absorbed in watching Boothe count the 
money, for he never took his eyes off the cashier. 

In his usual careful, painstaking manner, 
Boothe first counted the checks, drafts, and other 
notes of exchange, checking them off on the tally 
sheet beside him. Then he began on the currency. 
As packet after packet of the bank bills was 
counted and laid aside Eric grew nervous and his 
breath came in short gasps. He pretended to be 
bending over his books, but Phil saw the exhibi- 
tion of nervous fear and was not without a share 
of excitement himself. 

Check ! 

Eric grew pale and then red. He was astounded. 
Mr. Boothe rapidly counted the gold contained in 
the four sacks — positively, there were four, Eric 
noted with dismay, and there should have been but 
three. He saw the cashier pick up his pencil, 
glance at the tally sheet and check the amount as 
correct. 


234 


The Daring Twins 


Eric swayed and almost fell from his stool. 
Great beads of perspiration stood upon his brow. 

“Everything seems to check up all right,” 
called the cashier from his cage, speaking in a 
calm voice. “You Ve kept things pretty straight, 
Eric.” 

4 4 Good ; very good ! ’ 9 cried a deep voice, and the 
two clerks were for the first time aware that Mr. 
Spaythe stood in the open door of his office watch- 
ing the scene. 

4 4 Seems as if you could almost get on without 
me, sir,” said the cashier, apologetically. 

4 4 No,” answered the banker, 4 4 your absence 
caused us all a lot of extra work and worry — 
especially Phil. ’ ’ He came around to young Dar- 
ing^ side, put on his glasses and began a calm but 
thorough examination of the ledgers. 4 4 Feeling 
better this morning, Mr. Boothe!” he asked, with- 
out looking at the man. 

4 4 Quite myself again, sir.” 

Phil stood aside, for it was evident Mr. Spaythe 
wished to carefully compare the books. Daring 
had been obliged to make entries in both his own 
set and Eric’s during the past few days ; but there 
was little to criticise, he felt, and he welcomed the 
examination. 

Meantime Eric sat as if turned to stone, pale 
and red by turns, the perspiration oozing from 


The Way of the Transgressor 235 

every pore. His eyes, as they fell upon his father, 
were full of terror ; when he looked at Phil it was 
with suspicion and fear combined. For a mo- 
ment's thought had convinced Eric that his theft 
had been discovered. How, or in what way, he 
had not the faintest idea. Until now, he had con- 
fidently believed he had covered up every trace of 
the cnme with supreme cleverness. Yet in his 
brief absence someone had detected the robbery 
and replaced the money in the safe so that Mr. 
Boothe would find the bank's accounts correct. 

There was only one person able to do this — his 
father. For it was not to be supposed for an in- 
stant that Phil Daring, or any of his friends, could 
raise so large a sum without recourse to the bank 
itself. 

Then came the thought that if Mr. Spaythe was 
aware of his son's embezzlement, someone had 
betrayed Eric to him. The traitor could be none 
other than Phil Daring, the one he had naturally 
expected would be accused of the crime. 

Hardly knowing which way to turn or what to 
do or say, reading condemnation in every face and 
fearing exposure at any moment, Eric Spaythe 
was indeed in a pitiable plight. Why was his 
father inspecting the books so carefully? It could 
not be that he mistrusted Phil. Was he then look- 
ing for those former defalcations of which his son 


236 


The Daring Twins 


had been guilty ? Eric had intended tg accuse Phil 
of those things, when the logical time came. Per- 
haps Phil knew that, and had saved himself by 
denouncing Eric. 

There was nothing to be learned from Daring’s 
face. It was grave and serene, as if he had the 
situation well in hand. Mr. Spaythe seemed stern 
and vigilant, his practised eye running up and 
down the entries, observing every item with in- 
telligent care. Boothe was imperturbable as ever 
and paid no attention to the group in the back 
room. 

Eric writhed on his stool and kept silent. He 
was fully prepared for the impending denuncia- 
tion and intended to deny everything and stick to 
the lie to the last. But no denunciation came. 

Mr. Spaythe finished his examination and then 
turned to Phil with a satisfied nod. 

“Daring,” said he, “you have done well — very 
well indeed, considering your brief experience. I 
believe you are destined to prove of considerable 
future value to this bank, and hereafter your 
salary will be fifteen dollars a week.” 

Without a word or a look toward his son he re- 
entered his office and closed the door. He was 
still angry with Eric for foolishly making that 
long and expensive trip to St. Louis for a day’s 
stay, and moreover he resented the unkind insinu- 


The Way of the Transgressor 237 

ations his son had made about young Daring’s 
honesty. But Eric attributed his father’s dis- 
pleasure to entirely different causes. 

Phil resumed his work, paying no attention to 
his companion. Eric waited for a while for him 
to speak, and then grew savage. 

4 4 Think you ’ve caught me at it, I suppose ? ” he 
growled, with reckless disregard of the fact that 
he had betrayed himself. The restoration of the 
money was evidence enough that the cat was out 
of the bag. 

4 4 You are caught, Eric,” was the quiet answer. 
4 4 There is no need for me to assure you of that.” 

Eric glared. 

4 4 Where ’s the proof?” he demanded, uneasily. 

Phil looked up with a smile. 

4 4 Has it never occurred to you that money may 
be marked, and also a record kept of the numbers 
of bank notes?” 

4 4 Oh, that was it, was it?” returned the other, 
plainly discomfited by the suggestion, which had 
been hazarded merely to tease him. 4 4 Then 
you ’ve been trying to trap me for a long time, it 
seems. Grateful return for my getting you the 
job here, is n’t it?” 

4 4 1 have n ’t trapped you at all, Eric. The fault 
is your own from beginning to end,” said Phil, 
seriously. 


238 


The Daring Twins 


Eric walked to the window and stood looking 
out. He was trying to understand why his father 
had not frankly accused him of stealing the money. 
The banker ’s reticence was vastly more terrifying 
to the boy than prompt exposure and denuncia- 
tion would have been. Perhaps he had hesitated 
to let the world know that his only son was a thief. 
Yes; that must be the explanation. Therefore, 
Eric was destined to receive his scourging in the 
private office, and he experienced a distinct sense 
of relief at this thought, for he could stand any 
paternal tongue-lashing if his disgrace was but 
kept from the knowledge of his fellows. Eric’s 
disgrace would mean to an extent his father’s dis- 
grace. Come to think of it, he had no great cause 
to worry, in any event. His protection lay in his 
father’s regard for his own good name. 

Following this clue, Eric decided that Phil Dar- 
ing’s raise of salary was merely a bribe not to 
expose the secret. But the culprit’s momentary 
satisfaction in this solution of the problem was 
promptly dampened when he remembered another 
of Mr. Spaythe’s characteristics — to let no fault 
go unpunished. He well knew his father’s stern 
nature, and shuddered a little as he wondered 
what punishment would be decreed for so grave 
an offense. 

4 4 What ’s the program, Phil?” he inquired, com- 
ing back to the desk. 


The Way of the Transgressor 


239 


4 4 1 don ’t know. ’ ’ 

“Not in the gov’nor’s confidence, eh?” 

“Not entirely, I imagine.” 

Eric stared at him thoughtfully. Strangely 
enough, Daring had not reproached him or gloated 
over his downfall. Daring had always been a very 
decent fellow. Perhaps he would prove a friend, 
even yet. Eric’s attitude changed from one of 
defiance to that of entreaty. 

44 We ’ve always been pretty good chums, Phil,” 
he said, in a hesitating tone. 4 4 Tell me what to 
do, there ’s a good fellow.” 

Phil reflected. 

4 4 You might help yourself in one way,” he sug- 
gested. 

4 4 What is it?” 

4 4 Have you any of that money left?” 

Eric nodded, trying to read the other’s solemn 
face. 

“Then I advise you to fix up those little irregu- 
larities in the books. ’ ’ 

4 4 What irregularities?” 

4 4 That check of Mrs. Eandolph’s, for instance. 
It will be sent to her the first of the month, and 
she will claim it ’s a forgery. Then, there ’s that 
deposit of Martin’s, and several other little things. 
It would be policy for you to straighten out those 
tangles at once, Eric, before you are made to do 
it.” 


240 


The Daring Twins 


Eric pondered a while, then drew a sheet of 
paper toward him and began to figure. He seemed 
pleased with the results and at once set to work 
to correct the books. It took him until noon to 
finish his task, for he had undertaken a delicate 
matter, and some transactions were difficult to 
cover up or gloss over. 

While Mr. Boothe was at dinner Eric took occa- 
sion to make the cash straight, in such a way that 
it would not arouse the cashier’s suspicion. Phil 
took no part in the matter and let Eric make resti- 
tution in his own way. 

“I ’ve made good, Phil,” the young culprit 
whispered, eagerly. “ Every customer’s account 
is now as square as a die, as far as I know, and 
I ’ve charged my own account with some of the 
withdrawals and credited it with the money I ’ve 
just turned over to the bank.” 

‘ 4 1 ’m glad of that, ’ ’ said Phil, greatly relieved. 
But he spoke coldly, for he knew the banker’s son 
had acted only from fear, and not because it was 
the right thing to do. Involuntarily, however, 
Eric had saved Phil Daring from the possibility 
of being accused of those dangerous defalcations. 

During the afternoon Eric glanced continually 
at the door of his father’s office, expecting any 
moment a summons into that stern presence. The 
strain upon his nerves was terrible, and Phil knew 


The Way of the Transgressor 


241 


that he was already beginning to suffer punish- 
ment. At one time Eric asked anxiously : 

“ What ought I to do with the rest of the money, 
Phil?” 

i ‘ I don ’t know , 9 9 was the reply ; for Phil thought 
of Phoebe and her secret and was unable to advise 
Eric because he had no idea where the money had 
come from that his sister had put in the safe. 


CHAPTER XX 


ACCUSED 

Phoebe had been watching impatiently for her 
brother’s return and ran to meet him. He told 
her of the scene at the bank — of Eric’s astonish- 
ment and terror, and how Mr. Spaythe had raised 
Phil’s salary quite materially. Then he related 
the manner in which he had worked upon the cul- 
prit ’s fears and induced him to apply a part of 
the stolen money to replacing his former em- 
bezzlements, thus saving Phil from the possibili- 
ties of future complications. 

Tears stood in Phoebe ’s eyes as she murmured : 
“I ’m so glad. Oh, I ’m so glad!” 

4 ‘But the greatest mystery is not yet cleared 
up, ’ ’ said her brother. “I ’m as much as ever in 
the dark concerning your own share in this puz- 
zling affair. Phoebe, where did that money come 
from?” 

She shook her head, smiling through her tears, 
and accompanied him to dinner. But afterward, 
when Phil had gone back to work, the girl sat in 
her room facing the consequences of her act. Con- 
242 


Accused 


243 


science stirred at last and gained control of her 
and its vivid accusations made her cringe. Her 
dearly beloved brother, her twin, had been saved 
from impending disgrace, but in saving him 
Phoebe had herself been guilty of a theft equal to 
that of Eric Spaythe. She had robbed her grand- 
father in exactly the same way that he had robbed 
his father, and if Eric had earned such bitter con- 
demnation, Phoebe could not expect to escape cen- 
sure. True, their motives were different. Eric 
stole for selfish reasons ; Phoebe, to save her twin 
from unmerited obloquy. 

Searching her heart with candid inquiry, she 
wondered if she were really guilty of a crime. 
Civil laws might condemn her, but would not the 
great moral laws of humanity uphold her for what 
she had done? 

“I ’m not wicked, I know,’’ she told herself, 
positively. “I have wronged no one by my act. 
There is more than enough of Gran ’pa Eliot’s 
hoard remaining to last him during his brief life- 
time. And what better use could a share of that 
idle money be put to than saving his grandson 
from humiliation and shame?” 

But, Phoebe’s obdurate conscience was not to 
be appeased by such sophistry as this. 4 4 What 
right had you to take that money?— what right 
had you?” the small voice constantly asked, and 


244 


The Daring Twins 


at last she grew distressed by the vague, yet per- 
sistent fear that she had done an evil deed that 
good might come of it. Was that a sufficient ex- 
cuse? she asked herself, and feared it was not. 

“But, I ’d do it again ! ’ ’ she declared, pressing 
her lips firmly together as she thought of Phil. 
“I ’d do it again this moment, if it were neces- 
sary. ’ ’ 

While the girl thus fought with an accusing con- 
science she heard Elaine come into her room. At 
once the spirit of antagonism toward this dragon, 
who guarded Gran ’pa Eliot’s treasure, hardened 
her into a belief that she was fully justified in what 
she had done. 

Drawing her darning basket toward her she be- 
gan mending some of the family stockings, and 
from her seat by the window listened to the sounds 
made by the old housekeeper, as she moved about 
in the next room. 

Suddenly there was a sharp cry, followed by a 
fall. Phoebe was startled for a moment. Then 
she realized it was not Elaine who had fallen, but 
that the trap door in the floor had been care- 
lessly dropped into place. Her heart beat a little 
faster then, but she kept her seat and even at- 
tempted to thread a needle. Her alert ears heard 
Elaine run to the mantel. There was a long pause ; 
then a wailing cry of distress. 



Phoebe Glanced at 




Accused 


245 


Phoebe smiled grimly and went on with her work. 
The discovery had come a little sooner than she 
had expected. What curious whim could have 
urged Elaine to examine the treasure now, in the 
middle of the afternoon? She had never done 
this before, reflected Phoebe. 

In the adjoining room a dead silence prevailed. 
“She ’s counting,” mused the girl. “She ’s try- 
ing to find out how much is gone, and who took it. 
Perhaps she ’ll lay it to ghosts. Anyhow, she 
won’t have the slightest idea that I know her 
secret. ’ ’ 

Then something happened that gave her a shock. 
Without warning the handle of the connecting door 
turned and the next moment Elaine stood on the 
threshold confronting her. 

The woman’s face was dark and contorted with 
rage. She clasped and unclasped her talon-like 
fingers spasmodically, as if longing to take the girl 
by the throat and strangle her then and there. 

Phoebe glanced at her, frowned, and calmly bit 
oil her thread of darning cotton. 

“What are you doing in this room, Miss Halli- 
day ? ’ ’ she asked, not even a tremor in her voice. 

For a moment Elaine was daunted. Then she 
recovered, and advancing a pace toward Phoebe 
cried in tones of concentrated fury : 

‘ i I want my money ! ’ ’ 


246 The Daring Twins 

u Do I owe you anything?” was the stem de- 
mand. 

The woman’s glaring eyes were fixed upon 
Phoebe ’s upturned face, trying to read her inmost 
thoughts. The girl dropped her lashes a bit, ex- 
amining her work, and a slight flush stole into her 
cheeks in spite of her efforts to appear composed. 
In a flash the woman detected these signs, and her 
confidence was instantly restored. 

“You can’t fool me, Phoebe Daring!” she ex- 
claimed harshly. “You unlocked that door — the 
door I had forbidden you to open.” 

“Miss Halliday! you forget yourself. My 
grandfather’s servant has no right to dictate in 
this house, ’ ’ said the girl, haughtily. 

Elaine gave a short laugh, full of venom and 
disdain. 

“Servant, eh?” she retorted. “And whose 
house do you suppose this is ? ” 

The challenge roused Phoebe to anger and swept 
away the last vestige of her composure. 

“It belongs to Jonathan Eliot, my grandfather; 
and everything in it — money and all— belongs to 
him!” she asserted with pride. “As for you, 
Elaine Halliday, we have submitted to your in- 
sufferable insolence long enough — but only be- 
cause you understood gran ’pa, and were good to 
him, were you allowed to remain. Your temper 


Accused 


247 


and your airs have become unbearable, however, 
and we will at once secure another servant to take 
your place . 7 ’ 

The housekeeper stared at her as if she could 
not believe the evidence of her own ears. Then 
she laughed — a hard, cackling laugh that was hor- 
rible to hear. 

“I ’ll not be turned out, my girl,” she said 
scornfully; “but you Darings will get out of here, 
neck and crop, or I ’ll call in the law to help me. ’ ’ 

“The law, Elaine?” 

“Yes; the law! This house is mine. It does 
not belong to Jonathan Eliot. And all its con- 
tents are mine, deeded to me in black and white as 
the reward of my faithful services. The money 
you have stolen, thief that you are, is mine, too, 
and unless you return every penny of it you ’ll 
go to jail, Phoebe Daring.” 

It was Phoebe ’s turn to stare. Could the woman 
be speaking the truth? 

“Where is the proof of your statement?” she 
asked. 

Without a word Elaine turned and reentered her 
room. A few minutes later she came back with a 
paper — a dreadful, legal-looking document — which 
she unfolded and held before Phoebe’s face for her 
to read, grasping it tightly the while and prepared 
to snatch it away if the girl made any movement 
to secure it. 


248 


The Baring Twins 


Phoebe, frightened and horrified, made an effort 
to read the writing. It was not very distinct, but 
seemed to state in legal jargon that Jonathan 
Eliot, being of sound mind and owing no person a 
debt of any sort, did of his own free will and 
accord give and transfer to Elaine Halliday all his 
worldly possessions, including his residence in 
Riverdale and all its contents of whatsoever kind 
or description, in return for faithful service ren- 
dered him and duly acknowledged. 

‘ ‘ Have you read it V ’ asked the woman, hoarsely. 

‘ ‘ I — I think so!” gasped Phoebe. 

‘ 4 Look at the signature.” 

Phoebe looked. The paper was signed “ Jona- 
than Eliot” in a crabbed, stiff hand. She could 
not tell whether it was her grandfather’s writing 
or not; she was not familiar with it. But, the 
dreadful truth was forced upon her at last, and 
Elaine’s scornful assurance was fully explained. 
She owned the house ; she owned that secret hoard. 
Phoebe had not stolen from her grandfather, as 
she had supposed, but from Elaine Halliday ! 

The old woman noted her blanched cheeks and 
smiled with ruthless joy. Carefully refolding the 
paper she said : 

“I ’ve been robbed, and by you. There ’s no 
use denying it, for I ’ve got proof in that unlocked 
door. But I don’t care to send you to prison. I ’d 
rather get my money back.” 


Accused 


249 


“I haven’t it,” murmured Phoebe, staring 
fearfully into the other’s pitiless face. 

Elaine scowled and shrugged her shoulders. 

4 ‘That ’s all nonsense, girl! Give it up,” she 
advised. 

“I can’t; I have n’t it.” 

“You ’re lying. You took the money yesterday. 
You can’t have spent it already. Give it up!” 

Phoebe was silent. She sat staring helplessly 
at her tormentor. 

“A liar and a thief! You ’ll spend your life in 
prison for this, Phoebe Daring, unless you come to 
your senses and return my money. ’ ’ 

Phoebe answered not a word. There was noth- 
ing to be said. Elaine waited impatiently. Don 
was calling loudly for Phoebe from some of the 
lower rooms. Perhaps he would come here in a 
few minutes. 

“See here,” said the housekeeper, suddenly, 
“I ’ll give you till to-morrow — at noon — to bring 
me that money. Unless I get it — every penny, 
mind you — I’ll send the constable for you and 
have you arrested and jailed.” 

With this threat she walked into her own room, 
closing and securing the door after her. Phoebe 
sat in a stupor. Her mind refused to dwell upon 
this amazing discovery. She was glad Don had 
ceased calling to her and vaguely wondered what 


250 


The Daring Twins 


he had wanted. The stockings must be darned; 
but really there was no hurry about it ; they would 
not be needed for a day or two. 

A sharp blow upon the door startled her out of 
this rambling reverie. Elaine was driving nails. 
Viciously she pounded them into the door with her 
hammer, utterly regardless of the certainty of 
disturbing Gran ’pa Eliot. She intended to assure 
herself that Phoebe would be unable to get at the 
hidden treasure again. 

And now the full horror of the situation burst 
upon the girl’s mental vision, making her cringe 
and wince as if in bodily pain. Jail! Jail for 
helping Phil! Well, it was far better that she 
should suffer than her twin — a boy whose honor 
was all in all to him. She would try to be brave 
and pay the penalty for Phil’s salvation unflinch- 
ingly. 

For a while the poor girl sat cowering in the 
depths of despair. What could she do? where 
could she turn for help? Then a sudden thought 
came to her like an inspiration. Judge Ferguson 
had once made her promise to come to him if she 
was in any trouble. Of course. Judge Ferguson 
was her father’s old friend. She would see him at 
once, and perhaps he would be able to advise her 
in this grave emergency. 


CHAPTER XXI 


SHIFTING THE BURDEN 

Watching' her opportunity Phoebe slipped out 
of the house unseen and hastened down town to 
Lawyer Ferguson’s office. The old man was just 
putting on his hat to go out when the girl’s anx- 
ious, pleading face confronted him. 

“Are you busy, sir?” she asked, with hesitation. 

“Very, my dear. I ’m due at an important 
meeting within five minutes. ’ ’ 

Phoebe’s face fell. 

“Anything wrong?” inquired the lawyer in a 
kindly tone. Phoebe was one of his favorites. 

‘ ‘ Oh, a great deal is wrong, sir ! ” she exclaimed, 
excitedly. “I ’m in great distress, and I ’ve — 
I ’ve come to you — for help.” 

Judge Ferguson hung his hat on the peg again 
and went to the door of an inner room. 

“Toby!” he called. 

“Yes, sir.” 

Toby Clark appeared: a frowsy-headed, much 
freckled youth who served as the lawyer’s clerk. 
He nodded to Phoebe and looked inquiringly at his 
master. 


251 


252 


The Daring Twins 


“Go to Mr. Wells at the insurance office and tell 
him I cannot attend the meeting to-day. Have it 
postponed until to-morrow/ ’ said the judge. 

“Yes, sir.” 

“And, Toby, when you return stand guard over 
the private room and see that I ’m not disturbed. ’ ’ 

“Yes, sir.” 

The youth vanished instantly and with a 
courteous gesture Mr. Ferguson motioned Plicebe 
to enter his sanctum. Evidently, he had shrewdly 
read her face and knew that something very un- 
usual had happened to his ward. 

“Now, then, explain yourself, my dear,” he said 
when they were seated. 

Phoebe looked earnestly into the kind old face. 

“I want to make a full confession of every- 
thing,” she began. “I want you to understand 
me, and — and know just as much as I do.” 

“That is a wise resolve, when you are dealing 
with a lawyer,” he responded, smiling at her 
anxious look. 

So she first told him of how she had discovered 
old Miss Halliday counting the secret hoard, and 
of her reasons for keeping the knowledge to her- 
self. Next, she related Phil’s experiences at the 
bank, his suspicions of Eric and the midnight ad- 
venture when together the twins watched the 
banker’s son robbing the safe. All the details of 


Shifting the Burden 


253 


Eric’s plan to implicate Phil had been carefully 
treasured in the girl’s memory, and she now re- 
lated them simply, but convincingly, to the lawyer. 

It was more difficult to confess the rest, but 
Phoebe did not falter nor spare herself. A way to 
save Phil had been suggested to her by the dis- 
covery of her grandfather’s hoarded money — for 
she naturally supposed it was his. Her descrip- 
tion of the manner in which she had secured ex- 
actly the same amount Eric had taken was 
dramatic enough to hold her listener spellbound, 
and he even smiled when she related Eric’s con- 
fusion at finding the money restored, and how he 
had eagerly made restitution of the minor sums 
he had embezzled by 4 4 fixing ’ ’ the books. 

Perhaps Judge Ferguson had never been so 
astonished and sta.rtled in all his long experience 
as he was by Phoebe ’s story. The thing that really 
amazed him was Jonathan Eliot’s secret store of 
money. He had not been without suspicion that 
the old man had grown miserly, but so cleverly 
had the treasure been concealed that when Mr. 
Ferguson searched the house — under the cunning 
guidance of Elaine, of course — he had found noth- 
ing at all to justify that suspicion. 

When, in conclusion, Phoebe told of her late in- 
terview with the old housekeeper and recited as 
well as she could remember the terms of the deed 


254 


The Daring Twins 


of gift from Mr. Eliot to Elaine Halliday, Judge 
Ferguson became visibly excited. 

“Was it really your grandfather’s signature ?” 
he inquired. 

“I cannot say, sir, for I have seldom seen his 
signature,” she replied. 

“Were the names of any witnesses affixed to 
the document?” 

‘ 4 1 did not notice any . 9 ’ 

“H-m. What then?” 

‘ 4 Then she threatened to put me in prison unless 
I returned the money, and of course I cannot do 
that,” said Phoebe, plaintively. “She has given 
me until to-morrow noon, and then I must go to 
jail.” 

The lawyer sat for some time staring at a pen- 
holder which he tried to balance upon his middle 
finger. He was very intent upon this matter until 
a long-drawn sigh from Phoebe aroused him. Then 
he leaned back in his chair, thrust his hands deep 
in his pockets and bobbed his head at her re- 
assuringly. 

“We ’ll not let you go to jail, Phoebe,” he as- 
serted, in a tone that carried conviction. 

“But I — I ’ve stolen her money!” she moaned. 

“I don’t believe it. I know Jonathan Eliot. 
And I ’ve known other misers before him. Not 
one of them would ever give up a dollar of their 


Shifting the Burden 


255 


beloved accumulation as long as a spark of life 
remained in their bodies — your grandfather, least 
of all. And to his housekeeper! Why should he 
resign it to her, I ’d like to know?” 

“She seems to have a powerful influence over 
him, ’ ’ remarked Phoebe, thoughtfully. ‘ 4 She alone 
is able to communicate with him now, or make him 
understand. She alone cares for him while he is 
helpless as a baby, and he depends upon her 
promise to see that his body is finally laid in the 
queer tomb he once built. Perhaps she obliged 
him to give her everything, by threatening to leave 
him to die alone. ’ ’ 

“Don’t believe a word of it, my dear!” ex- 
claimed the lawyer, pounding his fist on the table 
for emphasis. “If Jonathan Eliot is clear-headed 
enough to dictate that deed of gift, or to sign it, 
he is still shrewd enough not to part with his 
money. Deeds of gift executed under compulsion 
are illegal, too. But I believe this paper to be 
nothing more than a rank forgery.” 

Phoebe stared at him with wide open eyes. 

“You do, sir?” 

1 ‘ 1 certainly do. Elaine is bluffing, and the bluff 
might succeed if she had only a girl like you to 
deal with. You were quite right to come to me, 
Phoebe. I ’ll agree to settle this controversy with 
Elaine.” 


256 


The Daring Twins 


“How?” she asked, feeling much encouraged by 
his confident tone. 

“H-m. I cannot say, as yet. I must have time 
to think. Why, it ’s five o’clock,” looking at his 
watch. “Sit still! Don’t be in a hurry. Let ’s 
figure a little; let ’s — figure.” 

He was balancing the penholder again. Phoebe 
watched him with dreamy curiosity. It was a dis- 
tinct relief to shift the burden to other shoulders. 

After a while she said softly : 

“Do you think I ’ve been so — so very wicked, 
Judge?” 

Slowly he rose from his chair, came over to her 
and kissed her cheek. 

“ Very wicked, Phoebe. All good, true women 
may be just as wicked, to help those they love. 
God bless ’em!” 

He turned away to face an old print of Abraham 
Lincoln that hung on the wall, and seemed to 
study it intently. 

“How is your grandfather’s health, lately?” he 
abruptly inquired. 

‘ ‘ I saw him through the window yesterday. He 
seemed the same as usual.” 

“A live carcass. An active mind in a dead 
body. If Elaine can rouse that mind, can com- 
municate with him, others may do the same.” 

He seemed to be speaking to himself. Phoebe 
sat quietly and did not interrupt his thoughts. 


Shifting the Burden 


257 


4 4 So you counted the gold with Elaine. Are you 
sure of the sums you mentioned? Could you see 
clearly through that peephole ?” 

“I may have made a mistake, of course,” she 
answered. 4 4 But I am almost sure I counted 
right.” 

4 4 You took three thousand, three hundred and 
ninety dollars?” 

4 4 Yes, sir. Fifteen hundred in gold and eigh- 
teen hundred and ninety, in bills. ’ ’ 

44 H-m. H — m — ! We must return that money, 
Phoebe.” 

4 4 Return it! Why, how can I, Judge?” 

4 4 You can’t, my dear; but I can. Let ’s see. 
She has given you until to-morrow noon — All 
right. ’ 9 

Phoebe drew a long breath. 

4 4 Meet me here at ten o’clock in the morning,” 
he added. 

4 4 Very well, sir.” 

She started to rise, but he motioned her to re- 
tain her seat. 

4 4 Can you give up your room for to-night, 
Phoebe — perhaps for a couple of nights?” 

44 Why, I think so,” she said, astonished. 4 4 Per- 
haps I can sleep with Cousin Judith; hut — ” 

4 4 We ’re going to play a little game, Phoebe; 
but, in order to win we must keep our secret. Tell 


258 


The Baring Twins 


no one at home the story yon have told me. Keep 
away from Elaine for to-night. Perhaps you ’d 
better come over to our house and stay with Janet 
— Yes; do that. It will lull suspicion.” 

4 4 Are you intending to use my room, yourself ? ’ * 
inquired Phoebe. 

4 4 No. I want to put a detective there. I ’m 
almost sure there will be something to see through 
that peephole to-night. ’ ’ 

44 A detective !” 

44 A private detective; meaning Toby Clark/ ’ 

Phoebe stared at him. She had never imagined 
Toby could be a detective. 

4 4 And now,” continued the lawyer, briskly, 
4 4 it ’s all settled, cut and dried. You may go home 
to supper without a single worry. I ’ll send Janet 
after you with an invitation to spend the night at 
our house, and Toby will take your place at home. 
You ’ve given me proof that you ’re not a bad 
conspirator, Phoebe, so I depend upon your wit to 
get Toby into your room unobserved.” 

44 I ’ll try, sir,” she said. 

4 4 Don’t fret, my dear. We ’ve got everything 
planned, now, and you have nothing further to 
fear from this strange complication.” 

She could not quite understand how that might 
be. Whatever plans Judge Ferguson had evolved 
he kept closely guarded in his own bosom. But 


Shifting the Burden 


2.59 


Phoebe knew she might trust him, and carried 
away with her a much lighter heart than the one 
she had brought to the lawyer’s office. 

When she had gone Mr. Ferguson called Toby 
Clark into his private room and talked with the 
young man long and earnestly. 

Toby was considered one of the Riverdale 
‘ ‘ characters. ’ 9 He had been born in a shanty on 
the bank of the river, where his father had been 
a fisherman and his mother had helped to eke out 
their simple livelihood by washing for the ladies 
in the village. Both had died when Toby was a 
small boy, and for a time he did odd jobs for the 
storekeepers and managed in some way to keep 
body and soul together. He was a little fellow, 
even now, when he was nineteen years old. His 
unruly hair was a mop of tow color, and his form 
was not very sightly because his hands and feet 
seemed overgrown. Out of his whimsical, freckled 
face peered a pair of small, twinkling eyes, so 
good-humored in their expression that the boy 
was a general favorite. But he never had much 
to say for himself, although he was a keen ob- 
server and listened intently to the conversation 
of others. 

Some years ago Judge Ferguson had taken Toby 
Clark into his employ, recognizing a shrewd wit 
and exceptional intelligence hidden beneath his 


260 


The Baring Twins 


unprepossessing exterior. At first, the boy went 
to school and took care of the judge’s furnace in 
winter, and his lawn and flower beds in summer. 
Then he was taken into the office, where he was 
now studying law. No one had really understood 
Toby except the old lawyer, and the youth was 
grateful and wholly devoted to his patron. 

In this interview the judge told Toby exactly 
what he was expected to do after Phcebe had 
secretly introduced him into the Daring house- 
hold. The entire situation was explained to him 
with such clearness that the amateur detective had 
no difficulty in understanding what was required 
of him. 

He asked no questions, but nodded his head to 
show that he comprehended the situation. 

“Above all,” was the final injunction, “do not 
lose sight of Miss Halliday. Stick to her like a 
burr, whatever happens ; but do not let her know 
you are watching her. Is it all clear to you, 
Toby?” 

“Yes, sir.” 

“Then run along, and be prepared to meet 
Phoebe at the house when Janet calls for her.” 


CHAPTER XXII 


Marion’s ghost story 

When Janet Ferguson arrived at the Eliot 
homestead that evening she was greeted by en- 
thusiastic shouts from the younger Darings, with 
whom she was a great favorite. They surrounded 
her in a group before she could reach the house, 
while Phil came across the lawn to meet her and 
shake hands cordially. 

Phoebe, glancing sharply around, saw Toby 
Clark leaning against a column of the dining room 
porch, where he was half hidden by the vines. 

“Come!” she whispered, and led the way into 
the house. Halfway up the stairs she paused to 
look back, not hearing his footsteps ; but he was 
so close behind that he startled her and soon she 
had ushered him into her own little room. 

“Lock the door behind you,” said she, “and pay 
no attention if anyone knocks or tries to get in.” 

Toby merely nodded as he shut himself in. 
Phoebe hurried down to join Janet, carrying a 
little handbag that contained the things she needed 
for the night. 


261 


262 


The Daring Twins 


“Why, Phoebe! where are you going !” asked 
Sue, seeing the bag. 

“To stay with J anet. Where is Cousin J udith ! ’ ’ 

“Over at the Randolphs.” 

“Then let us go that way,” said Phoebe to Janet. 
‘ ‘ I must tell her my plans, for otherwise the Little 
Mother might worry.” Passing close to Phil she 
whispered: “Is everything all right!” 

‘ ‘ Everything is right so far, ’ ’ he replied. ‘ ‘ But 
how is it with you, and why are you going away 
to-night!” 

“Just for a little excitement,” she laughed. 

“You seem nervous and excited, now,” said her 
brother, looking at her closely. “Anything new 
turned up to annoy you, Phoebe!” 

“I ’m quite contented to-night, Phil, dear.” 
And then she ran away before he could question 
her, further. 

They met Cousin Judith just leaving the Ran- 
dolph’s house, and Marion was with her. Miss 
Eliot at once approved Phoebe’s plan to stay with 
Janet for the night. She thought the girl had 
seemed unnerved and ill at ease lately and be- 
lieved the change of environment would do her 
good. 

When Judith had bade them good night and 
started across the street to rejoin her flock, Marion 
said : 


Marion’s Ghost Story 


263 


“I ’ll walk with you a little way, if you don’t 
mind. It ’s such a lovely evening, and I ’ve a 
mystery to disclose, besides.” 

“A mystery — oh, Marion!” exclaimed Janet. 

“Why are you so astonished?” asked Marion, 
as the three girls locked arms and sauntered up 
the street. 

‘ ‘ Because I cannot imagine a mystery connected 
with such a very practical person as yourself,” 
returned Janet. 

“Tell us what it is,” urged Phoebe, “for then it 
will remain a mystery no longer. ’ ’ 

“Oh, yes it will,” declared Marion, rather 
soberly. “I ’ve no solution to offer. All I can 
do is tell you what I saw, and allow you to solve 
the mystery yourselves.” 

“What did you see, then?” inquired Janet, 
curiously. 

“A ghost.” 

‘ ‘ A ghost ! Why, Marion ! ’ ’ 

“Of course, my dears, there is no such thing as 
a ghost, although, as I say, I saw it plainly. Other- 
wise I should have called it an ‘apparition’ in- 
stead of a ‘mystery’.” 

“To be sure.” 

“But if I saw a ghost, and ghosts are impos- 
sible, then I am in touch with a mystery,” she 
continued. “Do you follow my logic, girls?” 


264 


The Daring Twins 


Janet gave a careless laugh. 

“I thought at first you were in earnest,’ ’ she 
said. 

But Phoebe had lived in romance during the past 
few days and no element of mystery now seemed 
absurd to her. Indeed, she began to feel slightly 
uneasy, without knowing why. 

“ Where did you see your ghost, Marion?” she 
asked. 

‘ i In its proper place — the graveyard. ’ ’ 

“Oh!” said Janet and Phoebe together, for 
their companion had spoken seriously and with a 
slight shudder. Moreover, the graveyard was at 
that moment a short block to their left, and twi- 
light had already fallen. Beneath the rows of 
maples and chestnuts that lined the road the 
shadows were quite deep. 

4 ‘ I am troubled with insomnia, ’ 9 explained Mar- 
ion. “The doctors say I have studied too hard 
and my nerves are affected. At any rate I am 
very wakeful, and sometimes do not go to bed 
until two or three o ’clock in the morning, knowing 
I could not sleep if I tried. Last evening I was 
especially restless. It was a beautiful starlit 
night, so after the family had all retired I slipped 
out of doors and started for a walk through the 
lanes. I have often done this before, since I came 
here, and it is not unusual for me to visit the old 


Marion’ s Ghost Story 


265 


graveyard; not because I am morbid, but for the 
reason that it seems so restful and quiet there.’ ’ 

“Naturally, dear,” murmured Janet. 

“Last night my walk took me that way. I 
passed through the turnstile and wandered among 
the graves to the far end. It must have been long 
after midnight, but I had not a particle of fear, 
believe me, girls. I was not even thinking of such 
preposterous things as ghosts. 

“By and by I retraced my steps and sat down 
on a fallen slab of stone to indulge in reverie. 
From my position I faced that ugly square mau- 
soleum Phoebe’s grandfather once built. There 
is an iron grating around it, you remember, and 
a marble door to the tomb itself, with bronze 
hinges and a bronze catch. By the way, is n’t that 
tomb supposed to be vacant ? ’ ’ 

“Yes,” answered Phoebe, strangely excited. 
“Gran’ma Eliot and my father and mother occupy 
graves just beside it, for gran ’pa built the big 
tomb just for himself.” 

“Not a very generous thing to do,” added 
Janet; “but Mr. Eliot has always been a queer 
man, and done queer things.” 

“Well,” continued Marion, “I sat facing the 
tomb, as I said, when slowly and without sound the 
marble door opened and a ghostly figure emerged. 
I won’t assert it was a spirit from the other world, 


266 


The Daring Twins 


nor will I claim it was some person dressed in a 
sheet; but I am positive it was no vision of my 
imagination. So let us call it the Ghostly Mys- 
tery.’ ’ 

4 ‘Was it a man or a woman?” asked Phoebe, 
breathlessly. 

‘ ‘ It failed to disclose its sex, my dear. The door 
seemed to swing shut behind it; but the ghostly 
one was obliged to put out an arm to raise the 
latch of the iron gate. It passed through and I 
heard the click of the latch as it again fell into 
place. Then the apparition — ” 

“The Ghostly Mystery, Marion!” 

“Oh, yes; the Ghostly Mystery glided out of 
sight while I sat listlessly wondering what it could 
be. I was not frightened, but I failed to act 
promptly ; so, when I arose to follow it, the thing 
or person — or whatever it was — had disappeared 
for good and all.” 

The three strolled on in silence for a while. 
Then Phoebe asked : 

“What time was it?” 

“Perhaps one o’clock. It was nearly two when 
I got home ; but I had walked quite a way before 
I decided to enter the house. ’ ’ 

“And have you no idea who it might be?” 
questioned Janet, who had now grown thoughtful. 

“Not the slightest.” 


Marion’s Ghost Story 


267 


“I wish I had seen it,” said Phoebe, softly. 

“Oh, do you like ghosts? Well, then, I ’ll take 
you with me on my next midnight ramble,” 
laughed Marion. 

“Why not go to-night?” suggested Janet. 
“Phoebe is going to stay with me, and you may 
come too, Marion. Our house is even nearer to 
the graveyard than your own, and at dead of 
night we ’ll all steal out and waylay his ghost- 
ship. What do you say?” 

“I am willing,” declared Marion. “Are you 
sure you will not be frightened?” 

“I may be,” admitted Janet, honestly; “but 
I ’m willing to risk it. ’ ’ 

“So am I!” echoed Phoebe, eagerly. 

“Then it is decided,” said Marion. “I frankly 
acknowledge, girls, that while we are living in an 
eminently practical and scientific age, these ro- 
mantic adventures still prove fascinating. Let us 
hope we shall discover the ghost, and that the 
apparition will be of a quality to thrill our stag- 
nant blood.” 

“Must you go home first?” inquired Janet. 

“Not if you ’ll lend me a night robe. No one at 
home pays any attention to my wanderings, so I 
shall not be missed.” 

They soon arrived at Judge Ferguson’s com- 
fortable residence, which was a little beyond the 


268 


The Daring Twins 


outskirts of the village and delightfully situated 
on a slight eminence. Mrs. Ferguson, an alert, 
pleasant-faced little woman, welcomed the girls 
cordially and they passed the evening chatting to- 
gether and discussing recent events in which all 
were alike interested. Phoebe was a bit distrait, 
for she could not help wondering what was hap- 
pening in her room at home, where Toby Clark 
was keeping watch over the movements of old 
Elaine ; but no one appeared to notice her abstrac- 
tion. 

Later in the evening the judge came in, and 
smiled cheerily upon the three young girls. 

i ‘You Ve quite a house-party to-night, Janet,’ ’ 
he said. “I wish you might keep this bevy with 
you for a month.” 

Neither by glance nor word did he remind 
Phoebe of their conversation of the afternoon, and 
when they prepared to go upstairs he kissed all 
three impartially. 

4 ‘ What, to bed already?” he cried. “But run 
along and get your beauty sleep. Why should you 
wish to sit up with an old fossil like me?” 

“Who has deserted us nearly the whole even- 
ing,” pouted Janet. 

“True; I am to blame,” he admitted. “But a 
lawyer is never his own master, and to-night busi- 
ness kept me in the town. ’ ’ 


Marion's Ghost Story 


269 


Phoebe thought she knew what had occupied 
him, but said nothing. 

In their rooms the girls sat and discussed their 
plans, waiting for the judge and Mrs. Ferguson 
to get to bed and for the arrival of the hour when 
they might venture forth. It was demure little 
Janet who suggested they all wear sheets on their 
midnight stroll. 

“We can carry them over our arms until we 
get to the graveyard/ ’ she said, “and then wrap 
ourselves in the white folds. If the ghost appears 
we ’ll show him that others are able to play the 
same trick.” 

“But we might frighten him,” laughed Marion. 

“Whoever is playing ghost must be trying to 
frighten others,” returned Janet; “for, as you 
say, actual really-truly ghosts do not exist. I 
think it would be fun to turn the tables on the 
impostor. ’ ’ 

“Perhaps so. What do you think, Phoebe?” 

“It may be a good idea,” she said, rather re- 
luctantly, for somehow she regarded this matter 
far more seriously than did the others. The ghost 
was using her grandfather’s tomb for its head- 
quarters, according to Marion’s report, and that 
gave Phoebe a personal interest in the affair. 

At last the clock warned them it was nearly 
twelve o’clock; so they gathered up the sheets 


270 


The Daring Twins 


Janet had provided and stole noiselessly from the 
house. The graveyard was only a short distance 
away and they reached it about midnight, taking 
their position in a dark corner near the Eliot 
mausoleum. They assisted one another to drape 
the sheets effectually and then sat down upon the 
ground, huddled close together, to await the ad- 
vent of the ghost. 

“Perhaps it won’t come to-night,” whispered 
Janet, with a suspicion of hopefulness in her voice. 

“True; we must be prepared for that disap- 
pointment,” replied Marion, soberly. 

“Do you feel at all creepy, girls?” asked 
Phoebe, who caught herself indulging in nervous 
shivers at times, despite the fact that the night 
was warm and sultry. 

“For my part,” said Marion, “I have no silly 
fears when in a graveyard. I find the place 
serenely restful, and therefore enjoy it.” 

“I would n’t care to be here alone,” admitted 
Janet; “but, as we ’re all together I — I don’t — * 
think I shall mind it — even if the Ghostly Mys- 
tery materializes.” 

It was a long wait, and the three girls beguiled 
it at times by whispering together, more through 
desire to hear the sound of their own voices than 
because they had anything important to say. One 
o’clock arrived at last. Marion could read the 


Marion’s Ghost Story 


271 


face of her watch under the starlight. Another 
half hour dragged wearily away. 

“I fear we shall encounter no adventure to- 
night,” Marion was saying, when Phoebe seized 
her arm and drew her back into the shadow. 

“Hush!” she murmured, and pointed an arm 
toward the turnstile. 

Two hearts, at least, were beating very fast 
now, for the long-expected ghost was at last in 
sight, gliding silently past the turnstile. Well, 
not exactly “gliding,” they decided, watching in- 
tently. It was not a very healthy looking ghost, 
and to their astonishment was entering the grave- 
yard with shuffling, uneven steps. Of course it 
should have suddenly appeared from some tomb, 
as every well regulated ghost is supposed to do. 

“The Mysteiy seems rather clumsy, Marion,” 
said Janet in an excited whisper. 

“Is n’t it carrying something?” asked Phoebe. 

“Yes; a weight of some sort in each hand,” was 
Marion’s composed reply. “The weights are a& 
white as the ghost itself. Queer; is n’t it, girls?” 

Glancing neither to right nor left the apparition 
slowly made its way into the graveyard and ad- 
vanced to the big square mausoleum erected as 
the future abiding place of Jonathan Eliot. The 
white-robed figure seemed bent and feeble. 

“Come!” said Marion; “let us surround it and 
play ghost ourselves.” 


272 


The Daring Twins 


She glided swiftly out into the starlight, wrap- 
ping her sheet closely about her, and gained a 
position behind the tomb. Phoebe and Janet fol- 
lowed, spurred on by Marion’s fearless action. 
One passed to the right and the other to the left. 

Singularly enough, the bent figure did not ob- 
serve their presence until the tomb was nearly 
reached, when Marion circled around the railing 
and confronted the mysterious visitant. At the 
same time Janet and Phoebe advanced and all 
three slowly raised their white-draped arms above 
their heads. 

“Woo-oo-oo!” wailed Marion. 

With a shriek that pierced the night air far and 
wide the ghost staggered backward and toppled to 
the ground, lying still as death. 

Startled though she was, Phoebe sprang for- 
ward and peered into the upturned face. 

“Why — it ’s Elaine!” she cried aloud. 

“Yes,” said a quiet voice beside her. “And 
you ’ve raised the very mischief by this mad prank, 
Phoebe Daring.” 

It was Toby Clark, who gazed down at the still 
figure and wagged his tow head, mournfully. 

“Is she dead, Toby?” asked Janet, in a hushed, 
frightened tone. 

“I think not. Probably, she ’s fainted.” 

“And what was she carrying?” inquired Mar- 
ion, seeming unmoved by the tragic occurrence. 


Marion’s Ghost Story 


273 


Phcebe knew; they were two canvas bags of 
gold ; but she said nothing. 

“See here,” cried Toby abruptly, “it ’s pos- 
sible you crazy females have not spoiled the game, 
after all. Make tracks — will you, girls? — get 
away, out of sight; run home, so she won’t see 
you when she comes to.” 

“But — I don’t understand,” began Janet, 
timidly. 

“You ’re not supposed to,” retorted Toby, more 
gruffly than he had ever spoken to her before. 

“Toby is right, girls — I know he is right. Come 
— please come!” pleaded Phoebe, anxiously. 

Thoroughly bewildered, Janet and Marion suf- 
fered her to lead them away, and when they had 
passed the turnstile and were out of sight Toby 
retreated and hid behind a gravestone. 

Elaine did not recover at once, for her terror 
had been great and her faint was proportionately 
deep and lasting. But finally, when Toby was 
about to steal out again and see if she were dead, 
the old woman moved uneasily and moaned. A 
little later she sat up, placing her hands to her 
head. Then she seemed to remember the cause of 
her fright, for she cast fearful glances around her. 

Apparently reassured, she presently tried to 
rise, and after several attempts regained her feet. 
The bags of gold still lay where she had dropped 


274 


The Daring Tivins 


them and after another suspicions look around the 
graveyard she stooped and picked them up. 

For several moments the woman stood motion- 
less in that silent city of the dead, pondering on 
the forms she had seen and trying to decide 
whether her imagination had played her a trick, 
or she had really beheld the spirits of those gone 
before. The fact that she had not been robbed led 
her to dismiss any idea that the forms were mor- 
tal. Whatever the explanation might be, she re- 
flected that she was now alone and had a purpose 
to accomplish. 

She carried her load to the iron grating, un- 
locked the gate and passed through. The marble 
door of the mausoleum worked with a secret 
spring. Toby’s sharp eyes carefully marked the 
manner in which she released this spring and per- 
mitted the heavy marble block to swing noise- 
lessly outward. 

Elaine only lingered long enough to place the 
bags of gold inside. Then she closed the door of 
the tomb, let herself out at the iron gate and after 
one more shrewd inspection of the silent place 
made her way out of the graveyard and took the 
path that led back to her home. 

Far behind her Toby followed like a shadow. 

In half an hour she returned to the vault again, 
laden as before. For an old woman, and one who 


Marion 9 s Ghost Story 


275 


had just received a nervous shock, Elaine Halli- 
day showed remarkable vitality. Her body ap- 
peared frail and weak, but an indomitable spirit 
urged it to perform its tasks. 


CHAPTER XXIII 


TWO AND TWO MAKE FOUR 

When Judge Ferguson arrived at his office the 
next morning he found Toby Clark awaiting him. 

“What! You Ve not let Miss Halliday es- 
cape ?” he exclaimed. 

“Miss Phoebe is watching her,” returned Toby. 
“I felt it was important for me to come here to 
report. ’ ’ 

“Very well; sit down and tell me what you have 
to say.” 

“Early last evening,” began the youth, “I 
heard the woman in her room. I watched her 
through the peephole Miss Daring had prepared. 
She was gathering all the money from the hiding 
places. The bills and small change she made into 
packages ; the gold she left in the bags. Then she 
went into anothei room — the room occupied by 
Mr. Eliot — and returned with an armful of 
papers.” 

“What sort of papers?” inquired the lawyer. 

“They looked like legal documents, bonds, deeds 
and such things, sir. All were neatly folded and 
tied in packages.” 


276 


Two and Two Make Four 


277 


“Ah ! I wonder where they could have been 
hidden. ’ ’ 

“No telling, sir. They Ve been mighty clever, 
have n’t they? Well, sir, she made those papers 
into two separate parcels. Then she wrapped her- 
self in a sheet which she took from her bed, hid 
the parcels under it, and left the house.’ ’ 

“She took only the papers?” 

“Only the papers that time, sir. I tried to fol- 
low her, but the only way I could get out of the 
house without noise was through the window. I 
tied some sheets and blankets together and let 
myself down that way; but I was too late. The 
woman had disappeared, and I could not tell in 
what direction.” 

“Too bad, Toby.” 

“But I knew she would return, for there was 
the money to be lugged away. So I hid by a hedge 
and waited till she came back. She went into the 
house by the outside stair and soon brought out 
two bags of gold, one in each hand. This time, 
I followed her. She went to the graveyard, and 
I knew why she had draped herself in the sheet.” 

“Why?” 

“So, if anyone chanced to see her there, they 
would take her for a ghost. Some one did see her 
there — three girls, also dressed in sheets — your 
daughter, Phoebe Daring and Marion Randolph.” 

“Well, I declare!” ejaculated the lawyer. 


278 


The Daring Twins 


Toby told of the incident in the graveyard, and 
how Miss Halliday had afterward made still an- 
other trip with the balance of the money. 

“Did she put it all into the vault V’ asked the 
judge. 

“Yes, sir; and so I suppose she put the papers 
there, too. But I cannot be positive of that. ’ ’ 

“But — good gracious, Toby! — what possessed 
the woman to hide all that plunder in a vault ? ’ ’ 

i ‘ She is quite clever, sir. The other hiding place 
had been discovered by Phoebe ; some of the money 
had been taken ; it was best to hide it elsewhere. 
Who would ever think of searching a graveyard 
for it?” 

“You ’re right, Toby. But what happened 
afterward?” 

“Very little, sir. Miss Halliday went to bed and 
slept soundly, for I heard her snore.” 

“You climbed in at the window again?” 

“Yes, sir; and had some sleep myself.” 

“WTiat a wonderful woman Elaine is!” 

“I can’t help admiring her, sir.” 

“And what about Mr. Eliot, Toby?” 

“While waiting for the woman, when she es- 
caped me the first time, I stole up the stairs and 
looked in. Mr. Eliot was sitting quietly in his 
chair, in the dark. ’ ’ 

‘ ‘ She left him there all night ! ’ ’ cried the judge, 
horrified. 


Two and Two Make Four 279 

“It seems so, sir.” 

“That is cruelty. Even his helpless body must 
tire with remaining in one position so long. Usu- 
ally Elaine has taken better care of him than 
that,” said Mr. Ferguson, indignantly. 

“She was much excited last night ; and the poor 
man can’t complain, you know,” returned Toby, 
with a shrug. 

“What did Miss Halliday do this morning?” 
asked the lawyer, after a moment ’s thought. 

“She rose early and got her breakfast. I heard 
her walking around the front rooms, putting them 
in order and waiting on Mr. Eliot. She seemed 
quite composed this morning, and that may be due 
to the thought that her money is now safe from 
discovery. When Miss Phoebe came home from 
your house, Miss Halliday met her and handed her 
this note.” 

Judge Ferguson took the paper. On it were 
scrawled the words: “At twelve o’clock I will 
keep my word. ’ ’ 

“Miss Phoebe is very anxious, sir,” continued 
Toby. “So I thought it best to come to you and 
report.” 

The lawyer looked at his clerk, reflectively. Old 
Miss Halliday ’s persistent threat to prosecute 
Phoebe impressed him strongly. For, had she not 
been able to prove her right to this secret hoard, 


280 


The Daring Twins 


the woman would never dare to expose the affair 
to public notice. Mr. Ferguson was quite posi- 
tive that no such paper as Elaine had displayed 
to Phoebe would hold good in a court of law ; but 
the woman might have other proofs that she was 
entitled to the property she claimed. In any event 
the judge did not wish to be forced to act hastily 
in so important a matter. Time was necessary. 

Half an hour later he entered Mr. Spaythe ’s 
private office at the bank and said : 

“Spaythe, I want to borrow three thousand, 
three hundred and ninety dollars — and I want the 
money now.” 

Mr. Spaythe gave a perceptible start, passed 
his hand over his forehead, and cast a perplexed 
and annoyed glance at the lawyer. 

“May I have it?” demanded the judge. 

Eric had entered in time to hear this demand, 
and the sum mentioned sent his face white and 
made his knees knock together. In his hand was a 
paper he had intended asking his father to indorse, 
but it was all forgotten as the boy stared blankly 
at Judge Ferguson. Did the lawyer know? Then 
how many others knew? Eric had not yet recov- 
ered from his fright, and his great fear was of his 
father’s anger. Why had Mr. Spaythe said noth- 
ing to his son about the stolen money, and what 
punishment was he planning? The son of the 


Two and Two Make Four 281 

strict, inflexible banker well knew the fault would 
not be forgiven nor condoned, and the uncertainty 
of his position was becoming unbearable. 

‘ ‘ Certainly you may have the money, Judge,” 
was Mr. Spaythe’s slow reply. “For how long 
do you require the loan?” 

“Perhaps only for a few days.” 

“Then I ’ll give you my personal check, and 
make no other record of the transaction. ’ ’ 

As he drew his check book toward him Eric 
slipped back into the bank and resumed his stool. 
He was trembling as with an ague. 

Presently Mr. Ferguson came to the window 
and asked Mr. Boothe to give him currency for the 
check. He spoke loudly enough for both Eric and 
Phil to overhear him. 

“How will you have it, sir?” asked the cashier. 

i ‘ Fifteen hundred in gold and eighteen hundred 
and ninety in bills.” 

Eric nearly fell off his stool, and Phil looked up 
with a start. The effect upon the two boys was en- 
tirely different, however, for Daring had nothing 
to fear. So Phoebe’s secret was out, thought Phil, 
and Judge Ferguson was the person who had given 
her the money. But, in that case, why was the 
judge now asking for a similar sum, and in the 
same sort of money? The mystery was certainly 
beyond Phil Daring’s ability to solve. He gravely 


282 


The Daring Twins 


continued his work, feeling certain that everything 
would come right in the end. It hurt him, though, 
to feel he was not in his twin’s confidence. 

Mr. Ferguson took his money and departed. 
When he reached his office he said to Toby Clark : 

4 4 Go back to the Eliot house and send Phoebe to 
me. You must remain to watch Miss Halliday, but 
you can do that from the lane, or from some other 
point of vantage. I don’t much care what the 
woman does while she is at home, but if she at- 
tempts to leave the place be prepared to follow 
her.” 

“All right, sir.” 

Phoebe came for the money and found it ready 
for her, tied in a neat parcel. 

4 4 Don ’t answer any questions during your inter- 
view with Elaine, ’ ’ he advised. 4 4 And take care to 
ask none. Above all, don H let her suspect you 
were playing ghost in the graveyard last night.” 

Phoebe promised and went home again. At 
twelve o’clock she carried the package around to 
the rear stairs, which she was about to mount when 
Elaine appeared in the doorway above her. 

4 4 Stay where you are ! ’ ’ was the harsh command. 

The girl resented the words and the tone, so 
with determination she mounted the stairs. Elaine 
barred her way. 

4 4 You must count the money and give me a re- 
ceipt,” said Phoebe. 


Two and Two Make Four 


283 


“I ’ll count it ; but you ’ll get no receipt, for you 
gave none, you miserable little thief ! ’ ’ snarled the 
woman, rudely snatching the parcel. 

* ‘ Then, I ’ll wait here until you count it. ’ ’ 

“No you won’t. Go down — instantly! And if 
the money is not all here, to jail you go.” 

“I think I ’ll see my grandfather,” asserted 
the girl, more to annoy Elaine than because she 
wished to visit the helpless old man. 

For answer Miss Halliday slammed the door in 
her face and locked it. Phoebe slowly retreated 
and descended to the yard. There the thought oc- 
curred to her that she might watch Elaine through 
the rear windows, for she was curious to see how 
she acted when she found the money all restored. 
So she slipped away into the lane, which being 
slightly elevated enabled her to peer into the sec- 
ond story windows. There she bumped against 
Toby Clark, who was standing half hidden by a 
clump of bushes. 

“Oh! You here?” she exclaimed. 

“Yes. Anything up?” he inquired. 

* ‘ I ’ve just given plaine the money, and she im- 
pudently locked me out. So I thought I ’d come 
here and watch the windows.” 

“That ’s what I ’ve been doing. Stand back 
here in the shade, Miss Daring, so you won’t be 
seen. That ’s it. Now look at that window. What 
do you see?” 


284 


The Daring Twins 


‘ 4 Only gran ’pa sitting in his chair.” 

“Oh. Is that your grandfather?” 

“Of course,” said Phoebe. “He sits there all 
day long, looking over the country. Once, you 
know, he owned all the land as far as he can now 
see.” 

“And does he sit there all night, too?” 

“No, indeed; Elaine puts him to bed at night.” 

“Last night,” said Toby, reflectively, “she left 
him in his chair, instead of putting him to bed. I 
saw him. The room was dark, but he was so close 
to the window that the stars showed his form dis- 
tinctly. ’ 9 

“Then Elaine is neglecting poor gran ’pa!” 
cried Phoebe, indignantly. “And he is so depend- 
ent on her kindness, too ! ’ ’ 

Toby gave a low, apologetic cough. 

“Your eyes are good, Miss Daring?” 

“Yes,” she replied. 

* 4 Then look again, and carefully. Is that indeed 
your grandfather — is it really Mr. Eliot in the 
chair ? ’ ’ 

Phoebe was surprised at the question, but she 
looked carefully. 

“Of course. I ’ve seen him sitting that way 
every day, for months past.” 

* ‘ Can you see his face ? ’ ’ 

“Not very well, from here. It is muffled up in 


Two and Two Make Four 


285 


his dressing gown, you know, so he won’t take 
cold.” 

“It ’s pretty warm to-day,” observed the law- 
yer’s clerk. 

‘ ‘ But Gran ’pa Eliot is paralyzed, and his blood 
does n’t circulate freely. He is always well 
wrapped up, whatever the weather.” 

Toby whistled softly and looked down at the 
ground, where he was digging up the earth with 
the toe of his shoe. 

1 6 It must be dinner time, ’ ’ said Phoebe, suddenly 
remembering the fact. * ‘ Phil will be coming home 
and I must go in. ’ ’ 

“Will you be very busy this afternoon, Miss 
Daring?” 

“I think not. Why?” 

“Can you come here for a half hour or so?” 

“Yes, Toby, if I can be of any service.” 

“I think you can. This is a queer affair, is n’t 
it?” 

“It ’s very queer, Toby.” 

“Then I shall expect you,” he said with a sud- 
den change of tone. 

Phoebe went in, thinking the while how odd this 
boy was. She wondered casually why Judge Fer- 
guson had placed so much confidence in him. There 
was still a good deal of mystery about this affair 
and Phoebe did not yet know what the lawyer in- 


286 


The Daring Twins 


tended to do to checkmate old Elaine. However, 
she was content to trust her father’s friend, and 
greatly relieved to be able to return that dreadful 
money to the covetous woman. 

After dinner she walked with Phil to the gate. 
Said he : 

4 4 Have you anything to tell me!” 

“Not yet, Phil,” she answered softly. 4 4 Try to 
be patient, for all is well, I ’m sure, and we ’re 
going to be very happy when these troubled days 
are over. ’ ’ 

He said no more, but bent and kissed her and 
went on his way. 

After accomplishing a few household duties and 
bandaging a cut on Becky’s arm — it seemed the 
girl was always hurting herself — and helping Don 
find his cap, which he always mislaid when he came 
in, Phoebe remembered her promise to Toby Clark 
and slipped away unobserved to his station in the 
lane. 

She found the little clerk staring fixedly at the 
window where Gran ’pa Eliot sat. He gave a start 
as the girl approached, and then his freckled face 
lit up with a smile. 

44 I want you to watch Miss Halliday for me, for 
half an hour,” he said. 

4 4 Where is she 1 ?” 

4 4 Somewhere in those upper rooms. She has 


Two and Two Make Four 


287 


just passed the window to the left. But, although 
I Ve watched her for hours, she has never once 
stopped at your grandfather's side to do anything 
for him." 

4 ‘Poor gran 'pa!" 

“Now, listen, Miss Phoebe. The judge told me 
not to lose sight of that woman. If she tries to 
leave the house I am to follow her. But I want to 
get away, for just a little while, and I ’d like you 
to watch in my place. ’ ’ 

4 4 But, what shall I do if she goes away ? ’ ’ 
“Follow her, and I ’ll find you both. But she 
won ’t leave the house to-day, I ’m sure. ’ ’ 

“Very well; I ’ll do the best I can, Toby.’’ 

He nodded and walked away, going straight to 
the graveyard. When he reached there he climbed 
nimbly over the high iron rail, at the risk of break- 
ing a limb, and faced the Eliot mausoleum. Press- 
ing the spring, as he had seen Elaine do, he opened 
the marble door and passed into the tomb. 

A few moments later he came out with a pale, 
startled face and closed the door. A while he stood 
lost in reverie; then he clambered over the rail- 
ing again and went to relieve Phoebe. 

“Thank you, Miss Daring,’’ he said quietly. 
“You may go, now. Anything to report?’’ 

“Why, a minute ago Elaine came to the win- 
dow where gran ’pa sits, and after staring out, as 
if she suspected I was watching her, she turned 


288 


The Daring Twins 


and shook up gran ’pa's pillows, and moved his 
chair back a little. So you see we were wrong, 
and she is not really neglecting him.” 

Toby chuckled. 

“She ’s a slick one, is Miss Halliday! ,, he 
murmured. “But I ’ll keep an eye on her now.” 

“Are n’t you hungry?” asked Phoebe, remem- 
bering he had been on duty since the evening 
before. 

He shook his head. 

“Brought some bread and cheese with me, 
Miss Daring. Good-by. ’ ’ 

“Good-by, Toby.” 

The afternoon passed slowly for Phoebe. She 
was still wrought up over the exciting events of 
the past few days and felt that she was almost 
as much in the dark concerning Judge Ferguson’s 
intentions as was Phil. She tried to copy some 
manuscript on her typewriter, for she had been 
neglecting the work lately, but somehow the girl 
had conceived an undefined horror of her room. 
So she went to sit with Cousin Judith, while she 
finished darning her stockings. 

“Phoebe, dear,” said Miss Eliot, “there ’s 
something mysterious going on in this house.” 

“Is there?” asked Phoebe, with downcast eyes. 

“I think so. Phil has not been himself, lately. 
I ’m sure he is worrying dreadfully over some- 
thing. Is anything wrong at the bank?” 


Two and Two Make Four 


289 


“No, Cousin Judith. Phil is all right. He ’s 
doing splendid work, as you may know from the 
fact that Mr. Spaythe has raised his salary/ ’ 

“But the boy is unhappy, nevertheless,’ ’ per- 
sisted the Little Mother, musingly. 

Phoebe sighed. She knew it was true. 

“As for you, my dear,” continued Judith, 
“you are a mere bundle of nerves lately, and 
start and grow pale if anyone speaks to you. 
What has happened, Phoebe?” 

The girl darned industriously for a time. Then 
she said earnestly: 

“You trust me, Cousin Judith, do you not?” 

“You know I do, Phoebe.” 

“Then please do not question me to-day. I 
don’t want to mislead you, or deceive you, and 
Judge Ferguson has asked me not to confide in 
anyone — not even you.” 

“Judge Ferguson!” exclaimed Judith, re- 
lieved. “Is it his secret, then?” 

“Just now it is,” answered Phoebe. “But there 
is nothing to worry about, dear. That ’s what 
I told Phil, just after dinner.” 

Miss Eliot was really puzzled, but she felt it 
would be unkind to press Phoebe further. 

“Becky, Don and Sue know nothing of the 
matter, at least,” she observed, after a moment’s 
reflection. 

“No, indeed,” said Phoebe. 


CHAPTER XXIV 


TOBY CLARK’S HEROISM 

Late that night Toby Clark heard a man pac- 
ing slowly up and down the street, passing the 
Eliot house each time. Peering through the 
shadows the boy thought he recognized the 
straight, erect figure. Creeping close to a hedge 
that bordered the highway he whispered: 

“Mr. Ferguson !” 

“Yes, Toby. I ’ve been looking for you,” re- 
plied the judge in a low voice, as he paused beside 
the hedge. 

4 ‘ Something ’s going to happen to-night, sir. ’ * 

“So I suspected. What is it?” 

“Miss Halliday ’s getting ready to flit, sir.” 

“Are you sure?” 

‘ ‘ She ’s been packing up for the last Hour, sir . 9 9 

“And intends to leave poor Mr. Eliot alone! 
How dreadful!” • 

“Would you mind going for Sam Parsons, Mr. 
Ferguson ? 9 9 

The lawyer gave a start. Parsons was the vil- 
lage constable. 


290 


Toby Clark's Heroism 


291 


“Parsons! Dear me; do you think lie’s 
needed, Toby?” 

“Better have everything ship-shape, sir.” 

The judge reflected. Had he a right to arrest 
Elaine? She was merely a servant, after all, and 
it was not a felony to throw up such a position. 
But, there was the money — that secret hoard 
which she had claimed as her own and hidden 
away in the tomb. She had claimed to own the 
property, as well, yet was voluntarily preparing 
to leave it — a circumstance which led the shrewd 
lawyer to suspect that she knew her claim to be 
illegal. Had she, then, any better right to the 
money, the bonds and papers? Judge Ferguson 
decided he would get the constable. 

“There is no time to be lost, sir,” suggested 
Toby Clark, uneasily. 

“I ’ll meet you here shortly. Sam does n’t 
live far away, and he ’ll be at home now; prob- 
ably in bed and asleep.” 

“I ’d like you to hurry, if you please. And if 
I ’m not here when you return, come to the 
graveyard.” 

“The graveyard!” 

“She ’ll want to put away the money that Miss 
Phoebe gave her to-day, you know.” 

“Of course, Toby. I ’ll hurry.” 

He turned and walked swiftly away, while the 


292 


The Daring Twins 


clerk went back to his post of observation. A 
candle was burning in one of the upper rooms 
and it dimly lighted the form of Jonathan Eliot, 
seated beside his favorite window. Now and 
then Miss Halliday passed one of the windows. 
She had on a shawl and bonnet. 

The judge was prompt. He encountered the 
constable just coming home from town, and im- 
mediately dragged him away, explaining the case 
as they walked. 

Sam Parsons was a man of few words and he 
knew Judge Ferguson. He asked no questions, 
understanding he was merely to arrest old Miss 
Halliday if she tried to get away. The judge 
knew the reason for this action, and that was all 
that was necessary, for the time being. 

Toby met them and posted them beside the 
path Elaine must take to get to the tomb. From 
their cover they gazed curiously at the muffled 
form of old Jonathan Eliot; but the examination 
was brief, for suddenly the light went out. 

“She ’s coming !” whispered Toby. “I ’ll 
follow her first, and then you must follow me at 
a safe distance.” 

“Why not arrest her now?” asked the lawyer. 

“Oh, no — not now, sir!” protested Toby in an 
eager voice. “Wait, sir; wait.” 

He could say no more, for they discerned 


Toby Clark’s Heroism 


293 


Elaine’s angular form coming down the stair- 
way. In one hand she carried an old-fashioned 
satchel. Under the other arm was the package 
of money which Phoebe had returned to her. 

Pausing at the foot of the stairs the woman 
cast penetrating glances in every direction. Then, 
evidently reassured, she stealthily traversed the 
back yard and passed through the gate into the 
lane. It was quite dark under the shadow of the 
trees, and Elaine had no suspicion that three 
silent watchers stood almost within arm’s reach 
as she hurried along the well-known path. Pres- 
ently Toby Clark glided away in her wake, and 
before his dim form became wholly invisible the 
constable and the lawyer started after him. 

Thus the extraordinary procession advanced 
to the very borders of the graveyard. Once or 
twice Toby halted suddenly, and the others per- 
force followed suit ; but that was only when Elaine 
paused to shift her luggage from one hand to the 
other; then they all resumed the silent march. 

When she unlocked the gate of the iron grat- 
ing surrounding the tomb she did not wait to 
fasten it behind her; so, as soon as she had en- 
tered the mausoleum Toby slipped inside the rail- 
ing and signaled the others to follow him. The 
three being now within the enclosure, the young 
man closed the gate and turned the key in the 
lock just as Elaine again appeared. 


294 The Daring Twins 

The starlight rendered the three forms clearly 
visible. 

The woman gave a low cry and rushed to the 
grating, which she shook with impotent rage. 
Then, turning to confront her captors, she ex- 
claimed : 

4 4 Who are you? How dare you come here?” 

44 A graveyard is not private property,” said 
the judge. 

4 4 Mr. Ferguson!” 

4 4 Yes, Miss Halliday. Let me return your 
question: why are you here?” 

She glanced at the door of the mausoleum, 
which she had left ajar in her first panic at being 
discovered. Then her eyes fell upon the satchel 
she had left beside the gate. These people had 
surprised her, but she reflected that they could 
know nothing of her secret, or of her present pur- 
pose. All she needed was to gain time. Before 
any could prevent her she sprang to the marble 
door and forced it shut. It closed with a sharp 
click as the spring bolt shot into place. The 
secret of opening it had been known only to 
Jonathan Eliot and herself. 

Toby gave a little laugh, and the lawyer roused 
himself and said sternly : 

4< I am awaiting your explanation, Miss Halli- 
day.” 


Toby Clark’s Heroism 


295 


“Well, I guess you ’ll wait for it awhile,’ ’ she 
retorted, a note of triumph in her voice. “You ’ve 
no right to detain me here, Judge Ferguson. 
Open that gate, and let me go ! ” 

“I fear, madam, you have broken the law, and 
we must therefore arrest you,” said the lawyer. 

“ I ’d like to see you do it ! ” she cried, but she 
drew in her breath sharply and pressed one hand 
to her heart. 

“You will be gratified, Miss Halliday. Officer, 
do your duty.” 

As the constable advanced she shrank back 
against the iron gate. 

“No, no!” she said. “Don’t arrest me. I ’ve 
done nothing to be arrested for. Come to the 
house in the morning and I ’ll explain every- 
thing. ’ ’ 

The lawyer hesitated. 

“You may go to the house, if you wish; but Mr. 
Parsons will go with you, and guard the place 
until morning,” he said. 

Toby Clark was pulling his sleeve. 

“One moment, sir, before you decide,” he 
pleaded. 

“What is it, Toby!” 

“Come with me, please.” 

The boy went to the door of the mausoleum, 
touched the secret spring, and the marble block 


296 


The Daring Twins 


swung out. Elaine gave a cry that was half a 
sob and pressed her hands to her heart again. 

‘ 4 Come in, please — all of you, if you will, * * said 
the clerk. 

Parsons and Mr. Ferguson followed him into 
the black interior of the tomb. The air was close 
and bore a peculiar, sickening odor. 

“One moment,* * said Toby. 

He struck a match, holding it shielded between 
his hands until it flared up and lighted the con- 
fined space. On a marble slab in the center of 
the tomb lay a dead body. 

“Good God!” cried the judge, recoiling; “it *s 
Jonathan Eliot !” 

An echoing cry came from Toby. Dropping 
the match he made a bound for the door just as 
the heavy slab was swinging into place, urged by 
Elaine’s most desperate efforts. There was no 
way to open it from the inside, and the danger 
was imminent. In an instant the young man had 
thrust his foot into the crack that was now barely 
large enough to receive it, while Elaine, crowding 
the weight of her body against the marble, 
crushed and mangled the heroic boy’s flesh in a 
last vain effort to entomb her three captors and 
condemn them to a horrible death. 

The next instant the burly form of Sam Par- 
sons thrust back the door. Then he wrapped his 


Toby Clark’s Heroism 


297 


arms around the struggling woman and caught 
her in a firm clasp. Judge Ferguson, trembling 
with horror, raised Toby from the ground, where 
he had fallen and lay writhing and moaning with 
the pain of his maimed and wounded foot. 

Snap — snap! went the handcuffs that encircled 
Elaine’s wrists, while she fought, scratching and 
biting, to resist capture. 

“I ’ll carry Toby down to the doctor’s, sir,” 
said the constable. 4 ‘You can march ahead with 
that tigress. There ’s no danger, Judge; she 
can’t escape us now, and we ’ll soon land her in 
jail.” 


CHAPTER XXV 


FATHER AND SON 

The Darings slept soundly that night, all un- 
aware of the tragic events taking place in their 
neighborhood. However, the adventure was not 
yet ended for Judge Ferguson, even when the 
Halliday woman had been securely locked up and 
the doctor had dressed Toby’s mangled foot and 
he had been put to bed. 

“Sam,” said the lawyer, “I have work to do, 
and you must help me.” 

“Count on me, Judge,” was the ready reply. 
“I don’t mind an all-night job once in a while, 
though I would n’t care for it as a steady diet. 
What ’s next?” 

They awakened the undertaker, Davis, the next 
thing, and after the lawyer had told him the story 
he at once hitched up a team to drive to the tomb 
for Mr. Eliot’s body. As the undertaker was 
also the liveryman, Mr. Ferguson obtained a 
single horse, harnessed to a roomy box-buggy, 
in which he and Sam Parsons followed the other 
rig. Arriving at the graveyard they held back 
298 


Father and Son 


299 


while Davis took charge of the remains and loaded 
the body into the wagon, and not till he had 
driven away did the constable and the lawyer 
venture into the mausoleum, the door of which 
they had propped open to avoid the danger of 
being entombed alive. 

The buggy was fairly loaded when all the 
treasure and the papers had been placed in it, 
and then they drove to the lawyer’s office, where 
they deposited the precious freight and Parsons 
watched beside it until morning. 

Mr. Ferguson, meantime, got a couple of hours ’ 
sleep; but he was back at the office by daybreak, 
and while waiting for the bank to open sent Sam 
to get his breakfast, while he himself began a 
systematic examination of the papers he had 
seized. 

It did not take him long to discover that Jona- 
than Eliot had been a wealthy, if miserly, man. 
The government bonds and cash alone constituted 
a fortune, but aside from these were many 
mortgages and investments that drew a high rate 
of interest. There was no paper purporting to 
be a will; no letters of administration or any in- 
dication that the old man had transferred his 
holdings to Elaine Halliday, or to any other per- 
son. The deed of gift which Phoebe had seen was 
doubtless secreted upon the person of the house- 
keeper. 


300 


The Daring Twins 


While the judge was thus absorbed in the 
papers the day advanced and Spaythe ’s Bank 
was opened for business. Phil, arriving at his 
usual time, found Mr. Spaythe already in his 
office and the door communicating with the count- 
ingroom wide open. 

Moreover, the hanker seemed laboring under 
unusual excitement. He would walk the floor of 
his office with nervous strides, then seat himself 
in the chair by his desk, and a few moments later 
resume his pacing. At times he glanced into the 
room where Phil was at work, or toward the cage 
where the cashier was busy. Eric had not yet 
arrived. 

Presently in came Judge Ferguson, accom- 
panied by Sam Parsons, and both were loaded 
down with gold and bank notes. 

“Good morning, Spaythe,” called the judge, 
nodding genially. 1 ‘ I want to make an important 
deposit, to be credited to the Estate of Jonathan 
Eliot.” 

“Eliot !” exclaimed the banker. “Is the old 
man dead, then?” 

“Very dead, Spaythe; and he ’s left a lot of 
money. Here, Boothe, count it — and count it 
carefully, my man — for this is the biggest deposit 
your bank has ever received.” 

Phil had overheard this, and came forward with 
a pale and troubled face. 


Father and Son 


301 


“Is it true, sir!” he asked, half frightened. 

“Yes, Phil; it ’s true.” 

“When did my grandfather die!” 

“Two or three days ago, I think. But we only 
discovered his body last night, lying in that tomb 
he built, where Elaine Halliday had carried him 
after propping up a dummy in the window to 
make us all believe he was still alive.” 

Then they all went into the private office, where 
Mr. Ferguson related the night’s occurrences to 
Mr. Spaythe and Phil Daring, the constable be- 
ing present to confirm the story. 

“Had it not been for the bravery of Toby 
Clark,” concluded the judge, “we might all three 
have been buried alive in that hideous tomb. No 
one could have come to our assistance, for no 
one knew where we had gone.” 

“The woman must be crazy,” asserted the 
banker. 

“Perhaps; but she ’s clever enough in some 
ways,” sighed the lawyer, “and may cause us a 
lot of trouble yet. That ’s why I have deposited 
this money to the credit of the Eliot Estate. No 
one can touch it now until the courts decide to 
whom it belongs. And, by the way, Spaythe, 
that three thousand, three hundred and ninety 
dollars I borrowed from you is among the lot!” 

During this conversation Eric had entered the 


302 


The Daring Twins 


bank, and seeing the interested group gathered in 
his father’s office came to the open door just as 
the judge again mentioned the fatal sum that he 
had stolen from the safe. His face instantly went 
white with terror, and he was creeping away 
when Mr. Spaythe sprang up, seized his son’s 
arm and drew him into the office. 

4 4 Gentlemen, ” said the banker, turning to the 
others, “I too have a story to relate, and I beg 
you to seat yourselves and listen.” 

4 4 May I go, sir?” asked Phil in a troubled tone. 

4 4 No, Daring; you must remain; for what I 
have to say concerns you closely. Sit down.” 

Phil sat down. Judge Ferguson glanced from 
Phil to Eric, who stood with hanging head ; then to 
Mr. Spaythe, whose countenance was cold and 
severe and bore the marks of a secret sorrow. 
The constable, accustomed to strange scenes, re- 
mained impassive and silent. 

4 4 On Saturday night,” began Mr. Spaythe, in 
a hard, resolute tone, 4 4 this bank was robbed of 
three thousand, three hundred and ninety dol- 
lars, in gold and currency.” 

Eric staggered and caught at the corner of the 
desk for support. Phil grew pale, for he was 
astonished at the banker’s knowledge. Mr. Fer- 
guson knew the fact already, having listened to 
Phoebe’s confession, so he merely glanced at the 



C i 


1 ’ve a Story to Relate, ’ ’ Said the Banker. 































































































Father and Son 


303 


father and son in a thoughtful way and refrained 
from comment. 

“My son had warned me/’ continued the 
banker, speaking bitterly, “that Phil Daring would 
not be liable to withstand the temptation of steal- 
ing money, once he was alone in the bank and 
knew the combination of the safe. At first I 
scorned the idea; then, for my own satisfaction, 
I decided to watch. Here in my door is a sliding 
panel, through which I am able to observe, when 
I so desire, everything that goes on in the back 
room. On Saturday night I came here, letting 
myself in at the private entrance to this room, 
and found Phil Daring working on the books 
while his twin sister sat beside him. From their 
conversation I discovered that they knew the 
bank was about to be robbed. They arranged to 
watch the robbery unobserved, and I decided to 
do likewise. At midnight a man entered the bank, 
opened the safe and took away three thousand, 
three hundred and ninety dollars. That man,” 
he added, pointing a merciless finger toward the 
culprit, “was my own son.” 

No one spoke. Eric tried to answer, but a sob 
choked him. He had raised his head now and 
was reading his father’s face with a fascinated 
and horror-stricken gaze. 

“From the conversation of the two Darings,” 


304 


The Daring Tivins 


went on Mr. Spaythe, “I learned that Eric had 
so plotted that Phil was to be accused of the 
crime — and of other peculations that preceded 
it. The girl promised to save her brother, and I 
was curious to know how she would do it. To my 
amazement they brought the money to the bank 
on Sunday evening, and I saw them replace it in 
the safe — every penny that Eric had taken. The 
act was so astonishing, so wholly unexpected and 
inexplicable, that there seemed but one possible 
solution : that the Darings had in some way 
forced Eric to give up the stolen money. So I 
kept silent, waiting for an explanation, or for 
some further development; for if Eric had been 
shown the folly and wickedness of his crime it 
might be better for him not to know that I had 
discovered it. I may have been weak in this; 
but, gentlemen, he is my son.” 

The banker paused, pressed his lips firmly to- 
gether, and after a time resumed his statement. 

“Further developments occurred, indeed, but 
they served to undeceive me, and to add to my 
perplexity. Eric restored to the bank several 
hundred dollars which he had formerly embezzled ; 
he also paid his debts around town, amounting 
to several hundred dollars more ; I have a list of 
them. Therefore, he could not have returned to 
the Darings the money he took from the safe on 
Saturday night — and he had no other money.” 


Father and Son 


305 


Eric drew a long and tremulous sigh. Then 
he sank into a chair and buried his face in his 
hands. The tale was all new to him, and he found 
the truth vastly different from what he had im- 
agined. Also, despair had seized him in its piti- 
less grasp, and as his eye by chance fell upon the 
constable he shuddered. His father’s intentions 
were clear to him now. 

“Another surprising circumstance,” said Mr. 
Spay the, ignoring Eric’s dejected attitude, “was 
Judge Ferguson’s demand upon me for the exact 
sum Eric had stolen — the exact sum Phoebe Dar- 
ing had restored to the safe. Therefore, I have 
asked you to listen to me that you may under- 
stand I am entitled to some explanation. My son ’s 
crime is known to the Darings and to Mr. Fergu- 
son, as well as to myself ; I, only, am in the dark 
concerning the events which followed it.” 

“Those events I can explain in a few words, 
sir,” said the judge, his kindly voice showing how 
deeply he was grieved for his old friend. “Phcebe 
Daring had discovered her grandfather’s hoard, 
which Miss Halliday had secreted in her own 
room. To save her brother from unjust ac- 
cusation the girl took the sum required to make 
good Eric’s — eh — eh — withdrawal. Miss Halliday 
claimed this money was given her by Jonathan 
Eliot, by a deed of gift, and threatened Phoebe 


306 


The Daring Twins 


with jail unless she returned the entire sum. It 
was my purpose just then to lull old Elaine’s 
suspicions; so I borrowed the money from you, 
Mr. Spaythe, that Phoebe might return it to her 
grandfather’s housekeeper. So you see that after 
all the various conspiracies, Spaythe ’s Bank is 
still short that identical sum of three thousand, 
three hundred and ninety dollars.” 

“Not the bank, sir,” said the other harshly, 
“but my personal account is short that sum. You 
are relieved of all obligation to return it, Judge 
Ferguson. ’ ’ 

The lawyer bowed. 

‘ 4 In that case, ’ ’ said he, somewhat embarrassed, 
“perhaps you will permit us now to withdraw.” 

The banker sat silent a moment, his stern face 
pallid and thoughtful. Then he turned to Phil. 

“Mr. Daring,” he said, “I owe to you and to 
your brave sister my thanks for your discretion 
and consideration of me in the conduct of this 
unfortunate affair. Eric owes you a still greater 
debt. You have behaved as a man, sir; I wish to 
God you had been my son instead of that cower- 
ing criminal seated before me. Will you add a 
little to my obligation — will you do me another 
favor?” 

“If I may, sir,” said Phil, flushed and miser- 
able despite this praise. 


Father and Son 


307 


4 ‘Tell me what punishment to inflict upon this 
— thief. ’ ’ 

Phil straightened up and looked squarely into 
the banker’s eyes. He had longed for this ques- 
tion; the opportunity was now his. 

‘ ‘ Sir, ’ 9 he replied, ‘ ‘ I know Eric ; I have known 
him for years. His fault lay in his extravagant 
tastes, which forced him into debt because his 
father would not give him as much money as he 
thought he needed. The debts drove him to 
crime, and for his crime he has already suffered 
such punishment as all your proposed severity 
could not inflict upon him. I know Eric — tender- 
hearted, generous and kind — not bad, sir, in spite 
of this offense he was so weak as to commit. If 
you will forgive him, Mr. Spaythe, if you will 
love him and take him to your heart again, I 
promise that never in the future will you have 
cause to regret it. Eric will be honest and true 
from this day forward. But if, on the other hand, 
you now cast him off, you will ruin his life and 
your own; for a boy condemned by his own 
father can hope for no mercy from the world. 
He is your only son, Mr. Spaythe; forgive him.” 

During this impassioned speech, which came 
straight from the young fellow’s heart, the hanker 
sat staring at him with dull, expressionless eyes. 
Eric had raised his head to gaze at Phil wonder- 


308 


The Daring Twins 


ingly. Then he turned to his father a pleading 
look that might have melted his anger had he 
seen it; but Mr. Spaythe still stared at Phil Dar- 
ing, as if dazed by the boy’s frankness. 

Mr. Ferguson slowly rose and laid an arm 
across the banker’s shoulder. The gesture was 
strangely caressing, as between one man and an- 
other. 

“Phil is right, Duncan,” he said softly. “The 
boy is your son, and you can make a man of him, 
if you will.” 

Slowly the banker’s head drooped until it 
rested upon his arms, outstretched upon the flat 
desk before him. For a time he remained motion- 
less, while those who watched and waited scarce 
dared to breathe. 

Then Mr. Spaythe looked up, and the sternness 
had left his face. 

“Eric,” he said, “you are forgiven.” 


I 


CHAPTER XXVI 


THE WATERMARK 

Phoebe found the chickens had not been fed, 
and they were making a plaintive outcry for at- 
tention. She went to the stair and called to 
Elaine, but there was no reply. 

Slowly ascending to the upper floor she pushed 
open the door and called again. Then something 
about her grandfather’s awkward position at- 
tracted her attention. She crept forward to peer 
into his face; then started back with a cry of 
dismay. Her grandfather was not there. A pil- 
low and a bolster supported the dressing gown 
and head-shawl which had so cleverly deceived 
her. 

Hurrying down she met Phil and Judge Fergu- 
son coming up the walk. They told her to get 
Cousin Judith, and when the four were assembled 
in the quaint old parlor the girls heard the ex- 
traordinary story of Elaine’s arrest and Eric’s 
forgiveness. 

Miss Halliday made a desperate fight for Jona- 
than Eliot’s money. Judge Ferguson was not the 
309 


310 


The Daring Twins 


only lawyer in Riverdale. Among the others was 
a little, fat, bald-headed man named Abner Kel- 
logg, whom the court allowed to defend the 
woman. 

Kellogg was shrewd, and Elaine promised him a 
big fee if he won ; so he challenged Mr. Ferguson 
to prove that the deed of gift was a forgery and 
had not been signed by the deceased miser. 

This was a difficult thing to do. The signature 
was very much like Mr. Eliot’s; so like it that the 
experts would not state positively that he had not 
affixed it to the deed. Moreover, Elaine’s con- 
tention that she had received no regular wages 
for years ; that she had been the only close friend 
and confidant of the old man, and that he had 
promised her his money and property, when he 
died, as a return for her faithful service, was all 
so plausible that it greatly strengthened her 
claim. 

She testified before the court that Jonathan 
Eliot had executed this deed of gift just before 
he was stricken with paralysis. 

“He would not give me the paper then,” she 
explained in a logical, composed way, “but kept 
it in an iron box in his secret cupboard. He told 
me that when he died I could take the paper, and 
it would prove my claim. So I did take it, and 
showed it to Phoebe Daring, and she gave me back 
the money she had stolen from me.” 


The Watermark 


311 


When asked why she had concealed the fact of 
Mr. Eliot’s death for three days and hidden his 
body and the money in the tomb, she replied that 
she was afraid of the Darings and their lawyer, 
Judge Ferguson. The Darings had stolen from 
her and the judge had threatened her with the 
law. She was a simple, inexperienced old woman, 
she added, unable to oppose such bitter and 
powerful enemies, who had always treated her 
unjustly. She feared that when they knew of 
Mr. Eliot’s death they would take away her 
money — as indeed they had done — and so she 
had tried to keep the matter secret until she could 
get far away from Riverdale. She had intended 
to let the Darings have the house, although it was 
clearly her own. The place had grown distaste- 
ful to her, and the money would enable her to live 
comfortably in some other part of the country. 

She flatly denied her attempt to entomb Mr. 
Ferguson, the constable and Toby Clark, which 
had been frustrated by the boy sacrificing his foot 
for their lives, and they refrained from pressing 
this charge against her. Toby’s foot was heal- 
ing, but he would be a cripple as long as he lived. 

Taken all together, Elaine’s position was far 
more strong than Mr. Ferguson had anticipated. 
By permission of the court he examined the deed 
of gift closely, afterward complaining that the 


312 


The Daring Twins 


paper seemed too new to have been written upon 
three years ago. It was a heavy, thick sheet, re- 
sembling parchment, and on it the judge dis- 
covered a watermark consisting of the letters 
“A.R.” 

Lawyer Kellogg, who defended Elaine, replied 
that paper kept away from light and air, as this 
had been, would remain white and look new for 
years, and therefore Mr. Ferguson’s contention 
was ridiculous. The court agreed with Mr. Kel- 
logg in this, and poor Mr. Ferguson was at his 
wits’ end to find some reasonable flaw in the 
document. 

The case had been on trial for a week, and had 
been adjourned over Sunday. The Darings and 
Cousin Judith, who had at first been elated at 
the prospect of inheriting Gran ’pa Eliot’s wealth, 
had by degrees fallen into a state of hopeless 
despondency. 

After his Sunday dinner Judge Ferguson came 
over for a talk with his clients, and although his 
intention was to cheer them, his own face was too 
serious to be very assuring. 

U I am morally certain that woman is deceiving 
us,” he said; “but I must confess my fear that 
we shall be unable to prove the deed a forgery.” 

“Never mind, sir,” replied Phil, smiling at 
Phcebe to give her courage; “we ’ve managed to 


The Watermark 


313 


get along so far without gran ’pa ’s money, and I 
guess we can stand it hereafter.’ ’ 

i 'That is n’t the point,” suggested Judith. 
“The money is rightfully yours, and you are en- 
titled to it. Why, the fortune left by my uncle 
is nearly a hundred thousand dollars, counting 
the money and securities alone. Surely Elaine 
Halliday cannot claim her services to be worth 
all that!” 

“Not justly, my dear,” answered the judge; 
“but the law will not look at it from that point 
of view, and here is a point of law to be con- 
sidered. If the deed is allowed to stand we can- 
not prevent Elaine from getting every penny, and 
the house to boot. If it is a forgery, and so 
proved, she is not entitled to a dollar beyond her 
wages as housekeeper. Even that would be for- 
feited by her deception.” 

“Suppose,” said Phoebe, “we compromise, and 
agree to give her all the money if she will let us 
have the house. Would n’t that be better than 
getting nothing at all?” 

“I fear it is too late to compromise,” said the 
judge, shaking his head regretfully. “At first 
we might have made such an arrangement, but 
now that pettifogger Kellogg will insist on her 
getting everything. Elaine has wisely left her 
defence entirely in Kellogg's hands.” 


314 


The Daring Twins 


“Is n’t he a rascal?” asked Cousin Judith. 

“I would not accuse him of rascality,” was the 
reply. “No; Kellogg is not a bad man, nor a 
bad lawyer; he is doing his duty by his client, 
that is all.” 

Just then Becky came rushing across the lawn, 
screaming and laughing. She was closely fol- 
lowed by Don and Allerton Randolph, who tried 
to head her off. Becky was clutching and waving 
a paper, and she ran up to Cousin Judith, who 
sat beside the judge, and thrust the paper into 
her hand, crying: 

“Don’t let ’em have it, Little Mother — promise 
you won’t!” 

“But what is it?” asked Judith, glancing at 
the paper and then smiling. 

“Allerton drew it, just for us,” said Donald, 
flushed and angry, “and Becky grabbed it and 
ran away. Make her give it back, Cousin Judith 
— Allerton does n’t want anyone to see it.” 

“But it is quite clever,” replied Judith, still 
smiling. “I did not know you were so good an 
artist, Allerton.” 

“I am not very clever, Miss Eliot,” replied 
Allerton, in his sedate way. “Mother thinks I 
am artistic, and encourages me to draw; but she 
does not like me to make cartoons, such as this, 
for she says it degrades my talent.” 


The Watermark 


315 


“H-m. Let ’s see the cartoon,” said the judge. 

“May I show it to Mr. Ferguson, Allerton?” 

The boy hesitated. 

“If you wish to, Miss Eliot,” he said. 

The judge took the paper, put on his glasses, 
and after a glance laughed heartily. It was a 
caricature of old Miss Halliday, executed with 
considerable humor and skill, considering the 
artist’s youth. 

Suddenly the judge gave a start and the paper 
trembled in his hands. 

“Bless my soul!” he cried, holding it to the 
light. “What ’s this?” 

“That?” said Allerton, leaning forward. “Oh, 
that is the watermark of my initials, ‘A.B.’ The 
drawing paper was especially made for me, as a 
Christmas present.” 

A silence fell upon the little group. Mr. Fer- 
guson, Phoebe, Phil and Cousin Judith eyed one 
another by turns, and in every eye gleamed the 
certainty that Jonathan Eliot’s fortune was saved 
to the Darings. 

“When did you receive such a fine present, 
Allerton?” asked Phil, his voice trembling in 
spite of his efforts to control it. 

“At the last holiday season,” answered the boy 
readily. 

The old lawyer turned a delighted face to the 
eager group. 


316 


The Daring Twins 


“Your grandfather has been paralyzed three 
years !” he exclaimed. 

“Tell me,” said Phoebe to Allerton, “did yon 
ever give Miss Halliday any of your paper ?” 

He took time to think; then his face brightened 
and he replied: 

“Only one sheet. She begged me for it one 
day when she brought the eggs.” 

“And when was that, my lad?” inquired Mr. 
Ferguson. 

“A month ago, perhaps.” 

* # # 

Mr. Kellogg threw up Elaine ’s case in disgust, 
and would have nothing more to do with it. When 
the deed of gift was proven a forgery and old 
Miss Halliday was told she must go to prison 
unless she confessed, she finally broke down and 
admitted the truth. Being aware of the fact that 
no one save herself knew of her master *s hoarded 
treasure, she planned to get it for herself. After 
practising his handwriting for months she be- 
came so expert that the deed she finally executed 
deceived even the experts. Had it not been for 
the telltale watermark upon the paper she would 
have easily won. 

The unscrupulous woman took her defeat with 
dogged indifference, still protesting that her 
wages were in arrears and that she was entitled 


The Watermark 


317 


to several hundred dollars for back pay. This, 
by advice of Judge Ferguson, was given her. 
The Darings refrained from prosecuting the poor 
creature, and she was allowed to take her wages 
and leave Riverdale forever. 

No one in the little village seemed sorry to see 
her go. 


In Preparation 

“Phoebe Daring: Conspirator” 
by L. Frank Baum 














■ - ■ ■*- ^ — 


Good Books for Boys 



Boy Fortune Hunters 
Series 

By FLOYD AKERS 


The Boy Fortune Hunters in Alaska 

The Boy Fortune Hunters in Panama 

The Boy Fortune Hunters in Egypt 

The Boy Fortune Hunters in China 

The Boy Fortune Hunters in Yucatan 

The Boy Fortune Hunters in the South Seas 

M R. AKERS, in these new books, has at a single bound 
taken front rank as a writer for boys. The stories are 
full of adventure, yet clean, bright and up-to-date. The 
first volume tells of the exciting scenes in the early days of 
the Alaskan gold fields. The next book takes “The Boy For- 
tune Hunters” to the “Canal Zone,” and the third story is 
filled with stirring incidents in a trip through Egypt. The fourth 
book relates exciting adventures in the Flowery Kingdom, and 
the fifth and sixth stories detail further adventures in Yucatan 
and among the South Sea Islands. 

Illustrated 12mos. Uniform cloth binding , stamped 
in three colors. Stunning colored wrapper. 


Price 60 cents each 


The Aeroplane Boys Series 

By ASHTON LAMAR 

I IN THE CLOUDS FOR UNCLE SAM 

Or, Morey Marshall of the Signal Corps. 

II THE STOLEN AEROPLANE 

Or, How Bud Wilson Made Good. 

III THE AEROPLANE EXPRESS 

Or, The Boy Aeronaut's Grit. 

IV THE BOY AERONAUTS’ CLUB 

Or, Flying For Fun. 

V A CRUISE IN THE SKY 

Or, The Legend of the Great Pink Pearl. 

VI BATTLING THE BIG HORN 

Or. The Aeroplane in the Rockies. 

OTHER TITLES TO FOLLOW 

These stories are the newest and most up-to-date. All aeroplane de- 
tails are correct. Fully illustrated. Colored frontispiece. Cloth, 12mos. 
Price, 60 cents each. 


The Airship Boys Series 

By H. L. SAYLER 

I THE AIRSHIP BOYS 

Or, The Quest of the Aztec Treasure. 

II THE AIRSHIP BOYS ADRIFT 

Or, Saved by an Aeroplane. 

HI THE AIRSHIP BOYS DUE NORTH 

Or, By Balloon to the Pole. 

IV THE AIRSHIP BOYS IN THE 

BARREN LANDS 

Or, The Secret of the White Eskimos. 

V THE AIRSHIP BOYS IN FINANCE 

Or, The Flight of the Flying Cow. 

VI THE AIRSHIP BOYS’ OCEAN FLYER 

Or, New York to London in Twelve Hours. 

These thrilling stories deal with the wonderful new science of aerial 
navigation. Every boy will be interested and instructed by reading 
them. Illustrated. Cloth binding. Price, $ 1 .OO each. 

The above books are sold everywhere or will be sent 
postpaid on receipt of price by the 

Publishers The Reilly & Britton Co. Chicago 

Complete catalog sent, postpaid on request 


t *’83 













7^ A 

4 A V\ X * *• 1 v o C 0 

/ < 0 

> * * °<v . /J Wj 

=~ * fills* .* *+ ^ 

S T&JJ\ S'” V Vv ^f. <* ^ 

C' V ^5^ * * !* + L 

•■*V*- v'** — . % 

‘ v % <& :Mfh r ° % 4* : 

*** ° 


o> <?• ^ 

* V ^ O N c *V\ ^ * s S ill 

■ • <^ia - s* -■• « gp 

it 

0 


c> <> 



* o N 


o 





^ .a v - V 

v * ,& < * 

Q? C 0 N C ♦ <? 

0 *> r-S^N\ X ^ 


. s ^ y '\ \w; / ^ 

7..‘!v.V*‘7 t - 





# v \wiw * t 

O y „ . A ' 


v. o ' J «-' -» , \ 

i c * * * ■» \ i » y 0 « * aO 

C * <0 A' , * v ® * n o ( o>U. 'y> 

' T v.w , .v \ v J^Y ^ ^ * Vy * ~s*v. . ' 7_ 

- v? K i6Mp%v \ •>• V ^ - 

« V * j©glg oo' ° 5V/ 

» * , * fei 

^ c,^'/ V^V ^ 

V * * fr 0 , s s s * * ' ,, ^ 

' a o v s/t^ y 

"■ ■- * * « 


\ 0o „. 


v :MK- W 

.*>«?„ *p 



% ,w * v ^ '. sws ,° **• •% 

& * <S> £> A _ 0 > v v c* 

y o * x * All <. ^ , S S .A 

*4 * ^ o° .‘11* «/ % • * •/ y"J*. 

h f * w -^0k' ^ ' 

»yQ?\- 1 Ay^vlU -■=^=^ ?^y >, lA is ‘V- 1 -' 1 


a ** v % VWa 

S . V ^ . . '-^/ > ' 0 o X * ^ 

°o G ° k 



x° °x. * 


V X * V * 0 A > # 1 ^V* S S * * ^ ^ 

A. .W/V «c <A \. a'.' 

\V </* y ^ / ^U$\vSS * c. A, 

^ ^ °y W^. ^ a X> ^ 5 

<\ r. s 



7 -> \y *j* c l '*\zv\\ N v =» s /> 

.v^ \ “^m* ./ ^ 
/,.' i -<V*' ki / i - 



% ./ % v-^ A ^ v, - 

I ' 0 * K <$£* c o X c - C / 4 * S a\ <, \ 1 * 4 ^1' 

■ * i ° G° S U^ x' N ^/T? 9 ^ ^ ^ 








